James Skinner, Allan Edwards, Ben Corbett - Research Methods For Sport Management-Routledge (2014)
James Skinner, Allan Edwards, Ben Corbett - Research Methods For Sport Management-Routledge (2014)
Sport Management
Research methods courses have become a compulsory component of most degree programmes in
sport management. This is the first introductory research methods textbook to focus exclusively on
sport management. Through the use of examples, cases and data taken from the real world of sport
management it opens up a traditionally dry area of study, helping the student to understand the
vital importance of sound methodology in their studies and subsequent professional practice.
The book covers the full range of quantitative and qualitative methods across the whole span
of the research process, from research design and the literature review to data analysis and report
writing. Every chapter contains a range of useful features to aid student learning, including
summaries, discussion questions and guides to further resources, as well as examples drawn from
contemporary sport around the world. Research Methods for Sport Management is an essential
course text for all sport management students and an invaluable reference for any sport management
professional involved in operational research.
James Skinner is a Professor of Sport Business and Director of the Institute for Sport Business
at Loughborough University, London, UK. His research interests are in drugs in sport, culture
strategy, leadership and change, sport and social capital, and research methods for sport
management.
Allan Edwards is Head of Sport and Exercise Science at the University of Canberra, Australia.
His research interests include qualitative research methodology, high performance sport management
and sport marketing.
Ben Corbett is a sport management PhD candidate and lecturer at Griffith University, Australia.
His research interests include organizational strategy and change, high performance management,
and sport event legacy.
Foundations of Sport Management
Series Editor:
David Hassan, University of Ulster at Jordanstown, UK
PART 1
Overview of the Sport Management Research process 1
PART 2
Qualitative research for sport management researchers 47
v
CONTENTS
12 Narrative inquiry and the stories sport management researchers can tell 195
13 Phenomenology and the lived experience of the sport management researcher 206
PART 3
Quantitative research for sport management researchers 245
PART 4
Alternative approaches to Sport Management Research 317
References 346
Index 360
vi
Figures
vii
Tables
viii
TABLES
ix
TABLES
x
Abbreviations
xi
ABBREVIATIONS
xii
Part 1
Overview of the
Sport Management
Research process
This page intentionally left blank
Chapter 1
At one extreme, sport is viewed as a unique cultural institution with a host of special
features wherein the reflexive application of standard business practices not only
produces poor management decision making, but also erodes its rich history,
emotional connections, tribal links, and social relevance. At the other extreme, sport
is seen to be nothing more than just another generic business enterprise subject to
the usual government regulations, market pressures and customer demands, and is
best managed by the application of standard business tools that assist the planning,
finance, human resource management and marketing functions. (p. 1)
It is not hard to suggest from this statement that the sport purists (born in the Health Science
Schools) side with the first extreme, and the management purists (born in Business Schools)
side with the second extreme. The truth does lie in the middle, with theory and research
frameworks from health and business borrowed, adapted or amalgamated in the study of sport
issues.
The convergence of disciplines occurs not just between health and business schools, but
also within the business school disciplines. Economics, marketing, strategy, finance,
organizational behaviour, sustainability, human resources, law and politics to mention some,
are all topics a sport management researcher can both simultaneously apply to existing
business theory and diverge within a unique sport context. While sport often, and more
frequently, operates in a business setting, there are significant theoretical and practical
variations that require a sport management researcher to alter traditional business viewpoints.
For example, can a model designed to explore marketing practices to business ‘customers’
easily transition to study sport ‘fans’? The sport management discipline offers researchers a
wide variety of business studies within the inimitable and complex contexts of sport. Smith
and Stewart (2010) noted the following special features of sport that separate it from
institutionalized business principles:
one of the primary distinctions between a discipline or profession and trade is that
the trade deals only with how to deal with something, whereas the discipline or
profession concerns itself not only with how but also with why something should
be done in a certain manner and why it should even be done (p. 6).
The same authors go on to discuss some of the problems associated with research and its
applicability to practitioners and professionals in sport management: problems directly
affecting Sport Management Research and sport management practitioners. In particular, they
discuss the language and jargon of research, which can be at times too technical, too unfamiliar
and, dare we say, too ‘academic’. Additionally, practitioners may not always see the relevance
to the work they are actually undertaking. These are all concerns that the sport management
researcher should heed before embarking on their research project. They should ask some
important questions of themselves: Is this topic relevant? Who will benefit from this research?
If the answers to these questions are that the topic is of relevance only to the researcher, and
the researcher her/himself is the primary beneficiary of the research outcome, then serious
consideration should be given before proceeding down this particular path.
Sport Management Research can add important information to the discipline’s knowledge
base. Such information, where relevant, can be drawn on by other researchers, practitioners,
policy makers, and even other stakeholders such as club members, athletes, fans, existing and
potential sponsors, advertisers, marketers and any other interested member of the general
public. For the researcher, a particular research study may be on a topic or issue previously
ignored, or perhaps on a ‘new’ topic that had never been considered before. The research
may also build on previous research studies, providing results to confirm or extend the previous
study, or even to question its findings. This is true of any academic discipline and sport
management is no exception. A research report might provide a study that has not been
5
OVERVIEW OF SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
conducted and thereby fill a void in existing knowledge. It can also provide additional results
to confirm or disconfirm results of prior studies.
Research can assist in advancing organizational practices through suggesting new ideas to
improve organizational effectiveness and efficiencies. It can help practitioners evaluate
approaches that they hope will work in their own management settings and at a broader level
create relationships between sport managers who may be trying out similar ideas in different
locations. Research also informs conversations, for example by influential policy makers, which
might directly impact on sport managers. For example, policy decisions relating to drugs in
sport or the funding of youth sport in deprived areas. Research can help the policy makers
weigh up various perspectives and make informed decisions: decisions that therefore should
be fair, contextualized, responsible and (hopefully) effective.
and many more. More recently, the management of doping has been in the forefront of Sport
Management Research.
research intended only to provide greater familiarity with the phenomena one wants
to investigate so that one can formulate more precise research questions and perhaps
develop hypotheses. Such studies can be essential when a sport management
researcher is investigating new phenomena or phenomena that have not been studied
before (p. 89).
In contrast, structured research refers to a research process that follows a relatively familiar
patterned arrangement. For example, in a structured study, the researcher organizes or
structures what one is looking for according to a protocol that guides him/her in terms of
‘What to look for, the order in which to make observations and the way to record the results’
(p. 202).
7
OVERVIEW OF SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
In general terms, when employing this approach the researcher will look at trends or variables
whose relationship can be defined in a quantifiable manner. For example, variables such as
gender or age, and attitudes towards a specific type of behaviour such as illicit drug use in
sport, or undesirable off-field behaviour, could be studied to determine whether there is a
relationship between the two and whether one variable influences another.
an alternative to the traditional form of quantitative research. Creswell (2008) sees the current
characteristics of qualitative research as:
Qualitative research has been constantly evolving, with the development of naturalistic
inquiry, or constructivism, to emphasize the importance of the participant’s view; to take
into account the setting or context in which the participants expressed those views; and to
look at the meanings that people assigned to different issues. During the 1980s and 1990s,
types of qualitative research design emerged including case studies, grounded theory research
and narrative inquiry, along with the emergence of qualitative computer software programs
for data analysis – examples include NVivo and Qualysis.
In the 1990s and 2000s researchers have seen the emergence of participatory and advocacy
practices in qualitative research, themes that express concern for the needs of individuals in
lower social classes, racial groups and women. These themes called for researchers to report,
as part of their research, their own personal biases, values and assumptions. It cast research
into politics in which it considered the rights of women, gays, lesbians, racial groups and
different classes in our society – all traditionally under-represented in mainstream sport –
and honoured different viewpoints during both the writing and the reading of qualitative
reports. It also spoke about qualitative data collection procedures in which inquirers were
sensitive to participants, actively collaborated with them (rather than studying them) and
respected the dignity of each individual who offered data for research.
to transform one form of data into the other form in order to integrate and compare data.
Additionally, even if integration of the data is possible, inconsistent results may emerge, making
it necessary to collect additional data or revisit the collected databases to reconcile the
differences.
What the above discussion indicates is that as a potential sport management researcher
there are a number of methodologies and approaches that you can choose to employ. Before
you can do this, however, you need to have a sound understanding of each method as well
as the knowledge of how to implement a research study that may employ one of these methods.
We devote much of this text to providing you with this knowledge, as we believe such
knowledge is essential for sport managers in the twenty-first century.
RESEARCH PARADIGMS
We believe that it is important that sport management researchers understand research
paradigms and that they have an understanding of the major frameworks that they will come
across in their reading. This is because it is not a matter of having a theory and putting it into
practice, nor of doing something and deriving a theory from it, but of both theory and practice
happening simultaneously, interactively and continuously. Understanding the range of possible
frameworks, and how others have used them is key to understanding your own processes of
thought. Paradigms can be considered as ways of seeing the world in terms of perceiving,
understanding and interpreting a theory, explanation, model or map. Edwards and Skinner
(2009) believed that most sport management researchers have an intellectual framework that
governs the way they perceive the world, and their own place within it, even if they are
unable to articulate just what that framework is.
This paradigm, or framework, shapes research from the beginning to the end, because it
provides the structure within which choices (including the initial choice of a research subject)
are made. This framework comes partly from the institutional setting within which research
takes place – the position taken by employers or those who commissioned the research, or
by supervisors, by the department within which researchers work and by the university/college
that employs them. Part of it will come from the personal position of the sport management
researcher which may have been shaped by their biography of experiences as well as their
previous education, political and religious beliefs, gender, sexual preference, race and/or
class affiliations. So your choice of a research topic, its conduct and its results will be governed
by your own beliefs about your understanding of what constitutes knowledge and knowing.
Research paradigms can shape our thinking (and research) processes as they allow us to
understand what kinds of knowledge are possible, and how we can ensure they are both
adequate and legitimate (Maynard and Purvis, 1994). As an introduction to this way of thinking,
we will touch on three research paradigms: (1) objectivism, (2) constructivism and (3)
subjectivism.
Objectivism suggests there is an objective reality and things exist irrespective of observers.
Understandings and values are objectified in those being researched, and if we go about it
‘the right way’ we can discover objective truth. We often associate objectivism with positivism,
as both approaches sense the bases of valid knowledge and suggest that knowledge is advanced
through careful observation and experiment. It is argued that theory is universal and not context
10
PRINCIPLES OF SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
bound. Such approaches search for an invariant causal relationship and imply that there is a
body of scientific knowledge waiting to be found through rigorous objective research often
referred to as the ‘scientific method’.
Constructivism suggests there is no universal objective truth ‘awaiting discovery’ and that
there is no meaning without mind and therefore truth/meaning is not discovered but
constructed. Truth (meaning) comes into existence in, and out of, our engagement with our
unique realities. Constructivist approaches include interpretivism, which suggests that life is
explained in terms of multiple interacting factors and that cause and effect are mutually
interdependent. Humans make sense of their world by construing or constructing and
therefore it is impossible to have complete objectivity. We need to understand each individual
in context and not pursue general laws, as the world is composed of tangible and intangible
multifaceted realities that are best studied holistically. In this light, inquiry is value laden as
values influence the framing, conduct and focusing of the research problems. Similarly, the
constructivist approach can be seen in critical approaches to research that acknowledge that
a great deal of life cannot be personally controlled. Interpretations of reality only make sense
against a background of social rules, practices and beliefs. Critical approaches argue that
research must involve the reformulating, or ‘resymbolizing’, of events through constructing
rather than through discovery, recording or transmitting. In critical approaches, including
feminism and queer theory, the fundamental aim is liberation and emancipation.
Finally, subjectivism suggests that truth (meaning) comes into existence in, and as a
product of, our engagement with our world realities as there is no reality ‘out there’. Meaning
cannot originate in an interaction between humans and their world realities, since the latter
are not valid. Subjectivism is associated with the post-structural and postmodern domains.
These domains reject faith in reason, rationality and belief in evolutionary progress. They
seek to challenge the authority of convention and science and examine the ideological
underpinnings of convention and science. Researchers who work within these domains argue
that knowledge claims must be set within the conditions of the contemporary world and
embrace multiple perspectives of race, class, gender, age, sex orientation and other group
affiliations. As such they acknowledge and recognize the importance of different discourses
and of marginalized people, and reject meta-narratives or universals that hold true everywhere.
For post-structuralists it is through the deconstruction of texts that researchers are able to
expose contradictions, inconsistencies and concealed hierarchies of power/oppression.
11
OVERVIEW OF SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
objectively observed/measured then it is not ‘real’. Likewise, the objectivist approach would
seek to use universally applicable theories of team culture to frame the issue and interpret
any data generated.
A constructivist (or interpretivist) would seek to understand the unique and immeasurable
way in which the team’s culture is constantly constructed and reconstructed by its members.
While no universally ‘valid’ theory can be applied, rules describing the transmission of beliefs
and attitudes could be described and used to identify key individuals, groups and networks
that might allow a successful intervention to prevent/reduce drug taking.
A subjectivist would reject the possibility of either applying a general theory or generating
a unique theory for this particular social group. Instead, the subjectivist might seek to
participate in the group’s processes and interactions, with a view to influencing attitudes and
beliefs (as well as personally experiencing their content and transmission). While the ‘system’
may be influenced and experienced, no objective knowledge about it can be generated or
extracted, and at best the researcher’s experiences will form any resultant ‘data’.
Which approach do you most agree with, and why?
We shall explore research paradigms later in this text, as Sport Management Research
embraces a diverse array of practices driven by varying knowledge constituting assumptions.
This eclecticism legitimizes distinctive perspectives and research agendas yet identifies a need
to be concerned about how and why in particular social contexts certain research practices
are deemed valuable while others are discounted as valueless aberrations.
be chosen to effect an appropriate analysis. In the final chapter in this section, Chapter 21,
chi-square and Spearman’s rho are discussed, both of which are non-parametric tests that are
used when you have serious violations of the assumptions required to perform parametric
statistical tests.
The final section of the book, Part 4, looks at alternative approaches to Sport Management
Research. In Chapter 22 we examine mixed methods approaches to research and look at some
of the ways this can be applied to Sport Management Research. Chapter 23 discusses the
emerging framework of Research 2.0, and whether this can be adapted to Sport Management
Research 2.0.
14
Chapter 2
LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of this chapter you should be able to:
KEY TERMS
Qualitative research – research that seeks to provide understanding of human experience,
perceptions, motivations, intentions and behaviours based on description and observation,
utilizing a naturalistic interpretative approach to a subject and its contextual setting.
Quantitative research – research based on traditional, more formal scientific methods, which
generates numerical data and usually seeks to establish straightforward causal
relationships between two or more variables, using statistical methods to test the
strength and significance of the relationships.
Mixed methods research – a style of research that adopts research procedures that are
typically applied in both quantitative and qualitative studies.
Research plan – a detailed description of the procedures that will be used to investigate your
topic or problem.
KEY THEMES
n What are some of the basic differences between qualitative, quantitative and mixed
methods approaches?
n How does the research process differ in each of the approaches?
15
OVERVIEW OF SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter makes explicit the notion that, when undertaking any research study or
investigation, careful and methodical planning on the part of the sport management researcher
is required (Edwards and Skinner, 2009). From the outset, the sport management researcher
must carefully plan every step of the research process – from formulating the initial question,
conducting a review of the literature, refining the research question(s), formulating the research
design and determining the methodology to be used. This chapter will look at the different
ways the sport management researcher can approach the development of their research plan
from the perspective of a quantitative, qualitative or mixed methods approach.
INTRODUCTION
This chapter is our attempt to distinguish between three research methodology paradigms,
in terms of the type of data they generate. A paradigm is a perspective based on a set of
assumptions, concepts and values that are held by a community of, in this case, sports
management researchers. For most of the twentieth century, the quantitative paradigm was
dominant. During the 1980s, the qualitative paradigm came of age as an alternative to the
quantitative paradigm, and was often conceptualized (sometimes wrongly) as the polar
opposite of quantitative research – after all, all research seeks to answer questions and improve
our understanding of phenomena. Finally, as the ‘gap’ between qualitative and quantitative
methods was questioned and closed, mixed-methods research became the legitimate third
paradigm, in particular following the publication of the Handbook of Mixed Methods in Social
and Behavioral Research (Tashakkori and Teddlie, 2003).
QUANTITATIVE RESEARCH
Quantitative research generates numerical, comparable data that, in sports management at least,
often entails the use of large-scale survey methodologies, such as questionnaires or structured
interviews. If a researcher has stopped you at a stadium or if you have responded to an online
survey, in most cases, it falls under the umbrella of quantitative research. Economic impact
of a sporting event is a common quantitative study used in sport management, and is often
accomplished by in-stadia and/or online surveys of attendee spending. This type of research
reaches many more people, but the contact with those people is much quicker than it is in
qualitative research. Surveys, however, are not the only available option; Creswell (2009)
outlined five different categories of quantitative research designs: experimental; quasi-
experimental; single subject experiments; correlation; and survey research. In reality,
however, it is often very difficult to conduct controlled experiments in the sport management
setting – leaving questionnaires and correlational research as perhaps the most pragmatic
quantitative options. As a rule of thumb, quantitative research is often associated with
deductive approaches: testing existing theories by using them to make predictions that can
then be compared, as impartially as possible, to real and ‘accurate’ measurements.
16
THE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH PROCESS
QUALITATIVE RESEARCH
Researchers who use qualitative research for their studies are interested in understanding,
exploring and discovering. They use interviews and focus groups, analyse documents, observe
behaviours in groups, investigate culture and look for trends and patterns in the data they
collect. For example, teams often use focus groups to gain valuable data from the local
community before undergoing new stadium construction. The data collected is then analysed
to find trends in what the community prefers in a new stadium (e.g. seat plans, food outlets),
where and how the stadium can be built to minimize disruptions (e.g. noise, traffic), and
what other ways the community desires to use the stadium and surrounding facilities outside
of team competitions. Under the umbrella of qualitative research, there are many different
methodologies, some of which are discussed in later chapters. As a rule of thumb, qualitative
research is often associated with inductive approaches: building theories and explanations where
none (or nothing suitable) currently exist.
2 a strong idea of how each step will inform the next – i.e. how the literature review
will frame neat research questions and formulate clear research questions, and how
the methods and analysis will answer these research questions.
18
THE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH PROCESS
Literature
Reporting
search
Data collection
tools
Analysis of data and Choosing research design
reporting the results and data collection method
by novice sport management researchers. Planning, executing and reporting the research
process can all be supported by making reference to the matrix provided here.
While the sequence looks linear in the process, in actual practice there is a great deal of
iterative or recursive effort, circling back, to refine and revise earlier steps. It is also important
to note that, depending upon the research design, some of the linear/sequential steps can
actually occur simultaneously (e.g. data collection and analysis). However, regardless of this
real-life ‘truth’, the writing of proposals and reporting of the process tend to follow quite a
common structure and format.
20
THE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH PROCESS
21
OVERVIEW OF SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
1 A research proposal should contain all the key elements involved in the research process
and include sufficient information for the readers to evaluate the proposed study.
2 A research proposal is a planning tool: a map or sketch of activities to be executed,
resources to be employed and a time frame to be adhered to.
3 A research proposal serves the function of convincing people of the value of the proposed
work by showing them how the research will make a difference to the world, or by
identifying a dilemma in existing theory that the research will help resolve.
4 A research proposal demonstrates the expertise of the researcher in a particular area of study
by summarizing, comparing and integrating all the relevant theory and existing
research pertaining to a specific topic.
5 A research proposal seeks to demonstrate competency to carry out the proposed study by
describing an appropriate and feasible research method.
Research proposals come in different formats, as different universities, funders and governing
bodies will place a different emphasis on certain elements of the research process. For
example, some will emphasize scientific rigour, while others might emphasize accessibility
and dissemination of findings. Likewise, the process may vary for qualitative and quantitative
projects. Tables 2.2 and 2.3 outline a generic proposal and then potential variations when
writing qualitative and quantitative proposals.
Table 2.3 Typical differences between qualitative and quantitative research proposals
The basic research methodologies of a university thesis using quantitative methods are listed
and described in Table 2.4, briefly, to give you an idea of what is involved when tackling a
quantitative research thesis.
23
OVERVIEW OF SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
In quantitative research there is a typical chapter structure. This structure may vary
depending on the research, the supervisor’s preference or a particular university’s preferred
approach (although this is rare). In general terms, however, the quantitative thesis structure
is outlined in Table 2.5.
Most recent qualitative research includes such methods as: case studies; observation of
experiments in natural settings; interviewing; historical analysis (historiography); and analysis
of documents/texts. A suggested format for a thesis based on qualitative methods is outlined
in Table 2.7. Exceptions, revisions and modifications to this format are acceptable.
25
OVERVIEW OF SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
1 Introduction
a) Statement of the problem
b) Purpose of the study (including rationale for mixing quantitative/qualitative
statements)
c) Research questions (quantitative/qualitative)
d) Literature review (separate section, if quantitative)
e) Scope and limitations of the study
2 Procedures/methods
a) Characteristics of mixed method research
b) Type of mixed methods design (including decisions involved in its choice)
c) Visual model and procedures of the design
d) Data collection procedures (types of data, sampling strategy)
26
THE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH PROCESS
CONCLUSION
The sport management researcher will approach the development of their research process
from the perspective of either a quantitative, qualitative or mixed methods approach.
Regardless of the approach, the sport management researcher must carefully plan every step
of the research process, from formulating the initial question, conducting a review of the
literature, refining the research question(s), to formulating the research design and determining
the methodology to be used. To enhance our understanding of the research process further
we need to look at how a sport management researcher identifies their research problem,
conducts a review of the literature and, importantly, considers the ethical implications of the
research study to be undertaken. This is the focus of our next chapter.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
Undertaking any research study or investigation requires careful and methodical planning on
the part of the sport management researcher.
n Identify one type of research study where quantitative research methodologies would
be most effective.
n What might be some of the advantages of using a mixed methods approach?
n What would a typical research plan look like for your project, and can you start to
formulate a proposal for it?
27
OVERVIEW OF SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
Questions
1 Thesis topic
• Is the topic clear and well defined?
• Does it involve a problem, question or hypothesis that sets the agenda and points
precisely to what needs to be explored or discovered?
2 Literature review
• Have you accessed the most recent literature of relevance to your topic, as well as
seminal sources from the past?
• Do you refer to major books, articles, artefacts? Since quality is more important
than quantity, how well have you selected your material?
• Does the literature review hang together, to show how the ideas and findings have
developed, or is it merely a shopping list of books and articles?
• Is the review critical? Does it briefly evaluate, showing how your dissertation fits into
what is mistaken or lacking in other studies? The literature review should provide a
critically appraised context for your studies.
3 Theoretical underpinnings
• Does theory permeate the structure from beginning to end; from statement of
problem to conclusion? Are you asking yourself a key question, presenting a thesis
or defending a statement? Be clear about your approach.
• Theory is the framework of your study – not a luxury. Your thesis will be judged, in
part, by how well you express and critically understand the theory you are using, and
how clearly and consistently it is connected with the focus and methodology of your
dissertation.
4 Methodology
• Is your choice of methods and research techniques well suited to the kind of problem
you are studying? Methods work if they provide a persuasive response to your
question, positive or negative.
• Is your description of the methods you have adopted clear enough to take a blueprint
and replicate?
5 Results
• Are your findings faithful to what you actually found – do you claim more than you
should? Don’t ‘massage’ your evidence or findings.
• Have you provided enough evidence to make a convincing case?
• Have you presented everything directly relevant to the question in such a way that
the reader doesn’t have to flip back and forth to make their own connections?
• Are results or findings clearly and accurately written, easy to read, grasp and
understand?
6 Conclusions
• Have you answered the question ‘so what?’ What should we do with your findings
and conclusions? What do they imply?
• Findings don’t speak for themselves – they need to be analysed. Have you explained
what your findings mean and their importance, in relation to theory and practice?
28
Chapter 3
LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of this chapter you should be able to:
KEY TERMS
Inductive reasoning – from data to theory – where individual observations that appear to be
linked allow the researcher to formulate models and theories that might explain the
pattern observed.
Deductive reasoning – from theory to data – testing theoretical explanations by isolating the
predictions that they make about reality, and testing whether these predictions are
accurate.
Hypothesis – a clear statement of what observations or effects will be observed if the theory
is correct (H1, ‘research’ hypothesis), or if the theory is incorrect (H0, the ‘null’
hypothesis).
Delimitations – restrictions imposed by the researcher to ensure that the experiment remains
controlled, so that s/he can be more confident that the specific things they examined
caused the changes they observed.
Basic research – highly constrained experiments, often conducted in lab conditions with strict
delimitations, which therefore loses immediate social significance. Delivers a ‘pure’ test
of theory, but may not translate into ‘real-life’ settings.
29
OVERVIEW OF SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
Applied research – addresses immediate problems for improving practice and is evaluated
on the basis of its contribution to the solution of immediate problems.
Literature review – a critical comprehensive reporting of any existing literature that is relevant
to the study being conducted by the researcher.
Research problem – a concise and clear statement that provides the context for the research
study, and that generates specific research questions that the research study aims to
answer.
Ethics – a set of principles of right conduct, and the rules and standards governing the actions
of a person. Generally, ethical principles exist to ensure the protection of research
participants, the researchers themselves, the universities/institutes overseeing the
research, and the discipline as a whole.
Integrity – steadfast adherence to a strict moral or ethical code.
Beneficence – the state of being beneficial.
Consent – acceptance or approval of what is being done or planned by another. Where possible,
informed consent (giving consent in the full knowledge of planned actions and likely
consequences) is viewed as preferable to simple consent.
Coercion – compelling by force of authority, by deceit or by the use of inappropriate
incentives or punishments.
Conflict of interest – competing interests that may undermine the researcher’s pursuit of
‘pure knowledge’, for example financial links to companies interested in ‘proving’ a
particular result.
KEY THEMES
n What is a research problem?
n What are different types of research?
n What is a literature review?
n Where does the sport management researcher get research ideas from?
n What are the legal and ethical considerations that need to be considered by the sport
management researcher?
CHAPTER OVERVIEW
It is an important part of the research process for the sport management researcher to precisely
identify the area they want to investigate. To do this, they must first critically examine what
has been published in the area, and this process will help them to work out how they should
go about conducting the investigation (and why). Once the researcher has determined these
things then it is possible to address the first part of a research thesis – the introduction. This
chapter looks at the various ways in which the sport management researcher can determine
a suitable research topic/question.
30
RESEARCH PROBLEM, LITERATURE REVIEW, ETHICS
INTRODUCTION
Many sport management problems may not be appropriate for a research study. They may
simply be trivial issues that do not require further investigation – such as, are there more
blonde haired football players than those with brown hair in the draft? It is very unlikely that
answering this question would provide meaningful insight into sport management. The sport
management researcher should avoid trivial research problems, as well as those studies that
lack any theoretical relevance. If there is no theoretical framework to inform or guide a study
(deductive) and any study designing one (inductive) would struggle to fit alongside existing
research, then we need to ask serious questions about the benefit of doing the study. For
example, many wristbands that claim to improve performance would require an entirely new
branch of physics to explain how they work – so should a sport management researcher concern
themselves with this? The final type of problems that the sport management researcher will
avoid are those where a research topic is ‘saturated’ and any new studies are either purely
replication or do not add meaningful knowledge to the body of literature.
With a literature base that is still emerging in sports management it can sometimes seem
that the harder a researcher tries to think of a research topic/question, the more the researcher
might feel that their study has already been done. This frustrating experience is the reason
why the success of research depends largely on taking a great deal of care during the
preliminary preparation of the project (i.e., you’d rather solve this issue early on than find
out you’ve been beaten to the punch after you’ve collected and analysed your data).
Workability: Is the contemplated study within the limits and range of your resource and
time constraints? Will you have access to the necessary sample size to generate the
numbers required (e.g. to enable statistical comparisons)? Is there reason to believe
you can come up with an ‘answer’ to the problem? Is the methodology that you have
planned appropriate, manageable and understandable?
Critical mass: Is the problem of sufficient magnitude and scope to fulfil the requirements of
your course and level of study? Will it deliver findings of sufficient significance?
Will it ‘fill’ your specified word limit?
Interest: Are you interested in the problem area, specific problem and potential solution?
Does it relate to your background and career interest? Does it ‘turn you on’? Will you
31
OVERVIEW OF SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
learn useful skills from pursuing it? Generally, if you are going to spend 6–12 months
(or more) investigating a problem, you had best be interested in the answer.
Theoretical value: Does the problem fill a gap in the literature? Will others recognize its
importance? Will it contribute to advancement in your field? Does it improve the
‘state of the art’? Is it publishable?
Practical value: Will the solution to the problem improve sport management practices? Are
real-life sports managers and CEOs likely to be interested in the results? Will future
research be changed or informed by the outcomes? Will your own research practices
be likely to change as a result?
Finding a problem
There are many problem situations that may give rise to research. Bless, Higson-Smith and
Kagee (2006) suggest that research problems can be classified according to the motives or
interests that drive them, using the following criteria: observation of reality, theory, previous
research, practical concerns and personal interest.
Where they exist, read a review paper covering your topic (i.e. a paper that uses other research
findings as its ‘data’) and from there read any relevant research studies from the reference
list. From the search you should make a list of research questions that appear unanswered.
Try to balance your research question with your capabilities and experience. It shouldn’t be
too hard or too easy.
A general process for developing a research problem may involve the following processes:
n outline the general context of the problem area;
n highlight current key theories, concepts and ideas in this area;
n establish what appear to be the underlying assumptions of this area;
n question why the issues identified are important/relevant;
n establish whether there is anything that needs to be solved.
Read around the area (subject) to get to know the background and to identify unanswered
questions or controversies, and/or to identify the most significant issues for further
exploration.
Clearly specifying the problem is important because it provides a foundation for the research
objectives, the methodology, the work plan and budget etc. (e.g. how much money can you
justifiably request for the project?). Additionally, a clearly stated research problem makes it
easier to find information and reports of similar studies and enables the researcher to clearly
explain why the proposed research project should be undertaken. The research problem is a
key element of research, and Table 3.1 contains several questions that help determine the
feasibility of the research problem.
Table 3.1 Criteria for testing the feasibility of the research problem
33
OVERVIEW OF SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
34
RESEARCH PROBLEM, LITERATURE REVIEW, ETHICS
For example: Rule 1: All sport marketers are creative. Rule 2: Michelle is a sport marketer.
Deduction: Michelle is creative. Deduction begins with theory and then develops specific,
testable hypotheses derived from theory, and then tests these hypotheses by making careful
and accurate observations.
This approach to testing and theory is often referred to as the hypothetico-deductive method
and since it emphasizes hypotheses, prediction and testing, is sometimes held to be the par
excellence of science. As explained above, theories are used to derive testable predictions, or
hypotheses, and then observations are carefully collected to test these predictions. Both forms
of reasoning, inductive and deductive, are useful – although the inductive approach tends to
be used more in humanities-based research and adopts a qualitative methodology, while the
deductive approach tends to be used more in ‘hard science’ areas and adopts more quantitative
methodologies. For example, a sport management researcher may predict that watching the
Olympic Games inspires more youth participation in Olympic sports. How might the
researcher quantitatively test this hypothesis?
Developing hypotheses
Hypotheses are logically derived from previous theories and research findings. For example,
a theory (or a new modification to a theory) may make a prediction that has not yet been
tested, or alternatively one may make predictions based on the findings of recent similar studies.
The ‘research hypothesis’ always predicts what will happen if the theory is correct, while the
null hypothesis always predicts what will be seen if there is no pattern. This is discussed in
more detail in Chapter 18.
be evaluated. One could even argue that the researcher has ‘failed’ when the results of the
study are blamed on methodological problems. A review of the literature is very helpful in
identifying successful methods, for example recent studies examining the same topic, or other
studies that have attempted to use the same experimental design. It is a good idea to pilot-
test any unusual methods to determine whether the method answers the specific question
asked, and delivers useable data. Otherwise the researcher may find out too late that their
method does not answer the question, and their contribution to sport management literature
will be undermined.
1 Generally, only more recent references are available for computer searching,
depending on the database used (and in many cases you might still need to go
and find a paper copy for older ‘classic’ references rather than simply clicking on
a link).
2 Getting the necessary background and broad overview of the problem from individual
studies can be difficult, as many database searches tend to only give individual studies
– leaving you as the researcher to evaluate which studies are truly relevant to your
own study.
Talk to the reference librarian at your library for guidance in undertaking the literature search.
The review of literature is generally undertaken in two stages: stage one involves a general
overview of the relevant area using secondary sources (i.e. books, book chapters and reviews
that will give you a broad overview of the area); while stage two involves a more specific and
structured review involving primary sources (i.e. to help identify specific research problems
and opportunities to contribute). Primary sources are ultimately the most valuable tool for
the researcher in that the information is first-hand. Most primary sources in a literature review
are peer reviewed journal articles. In sport management some of these journals include: Sport
Management Review, Journal of Sport Management, European Sport Management Quarterly,
International Journal of Sport Management, International Journal of Sport Communication and the
International Journal of Sport Management and Marketing. Dissertations are also primary sources,
however dissertations may be difficult to locate as they are often only stored in a university
library. Typical databases for searching sport management studies include: Index Medicus
(medline); Psychinfo; ERIC; Sports Discus; and of course, the bibliographies of any good
articles that you do find. Online search engines, such as Google Scholar, are fast becoming a
user-friendly online tool to search many databases at once.
36
RESEARCH PROBLEM, LITERATURE REVIEW, ETHICS
always try to write the statement as completely (and as concisely) as you can very early in
the literature review.
Step 2: Collate secondary sources. As noted above, these will offer you a broad oversight of
the area so you can begin to ‘get your bearings’ and navigate around.
Step 3: Determine descriptors. What are some of the key words and phrases that relate to
your research question?
Step 4: Search, evaluate and collect primary sources. Original studies are those that have
collected their own data, rather than reviewing the studies of others.
Step 5: Read and record literature. While arduous and sometimes very boring, this is the
‘meat’ of your task in preparing a literature review, and key tasks to guide your reading should
include: forming a statement of problem; considering the characteristics of subjects that you
will need; the types of measures and instruments you may need to source; the independent
and dependent variables in your own study; the experimental design and statistical/
interpretative analyses used; the way you will report findings; and potential questions for
further study.
Step 6: Write the literature review. A review of literature is not a mere list or summary of
books and articles that the researcher has read. Instead, a literature review combines the most
significant aspects of the works one has consulted. It is a combination and synthesis in the form
of an integrated description of the field of study. In reviewing literature, the reviewer must
show awareness of the most important and relevant theories, models, studies and
methodologies and should indicate how these are relevant to one’s project, and evaluate how
these works are similar to and/or different from one’s own research.
The literature review serves several important functions. It ensures the production of
original work; it acknowledges the contribution of previous works; it demonstrates critical
ability to evaluate literal materials; it rationalizes the importance of the problem being
studied; it defines the boundaries of the research project; it establishes the size and extent of
the research project; it considers the procedures and the instruments that can/should be used
in the research project; it casts the ‘problem’ in a better perspective through a better
understanding of the underlying theory in an attempt to render it ‘solvable’; it helps to ensure
you avoid the unnecessary (non-purposeful) repetition of research already undertaken.; it
assists you in evaluating the significance of your own findings (i.e. at the end of the study);
it helps to formulate and justify hypotheses and research questions; and it allows the researcher
to carry out work more purposefully. In fact a good literature review can be pretty
inspirational, believe it or not!
A literature review normally has an introduction, a body (with relevant research organ-
ized and synthesized), a summary and conclusions. It is important to include in the literature
review a description of the work being done, being critical where necessary. Summarize the
main facts and conclusions that emerge, synthesizing to produce main themes, directions/
trends, contradictions etc., and point out those areas in the field that are still inadequately
covered.
It is increasingly a good idea to use a software program such as EndNote when conducting
the literature review as this will assist you throughout the preparation of your final article or
report, by managing your references and producing an ‘instant’ reference list at the end.
38
RESEARCH PROBLEM, LITERATURE REVIEW, ETHICS
Hostile takeover or joint venture: Connections between institutional theory and sport
management research. Washington, M., and Patterson, K. D. W. (2011). Sport
Management Review, 14(1), 1–12.
Washington and Patterson reviewed the literature on institutional theory as it is often used
in Sport Management Research. After a comprehensive analysis of primary sources and
summarizing the common concepts, they concluded that sport management researchers have
a limited use of all the concepts. They found that sport management studies lack breadth
and depth in the concepts of institutional change and organizational field dynamics, and that
the use of institutional theory could and should be extended to explore other neglected sport
management problems. For example, they suggest that institutional theory may assist in
understanding the emergence or decline in sport institutions (i.e. teams, brands and marketing
methods).
ANNOTATED BIBLIOGRAPHY
Developing an annotated bibliography is another procedure to organize research information.
Many academic organizations/schools require this highly simplified literature review as part
of the initial research process. What the annotated bibliography will display is that the
researcher has read and understands the materials gathered. It also identifies critical research
issues that directly support the study topic, such as research designs, methodology, samples
and findings. For example, a sport management researcher may put together an annotated
bibliography on organizational change. This may include the more generic studies on
organizational change before eventually being narrowed to those research projects that have
examined organizational change in sporting organizations.
‘why’, ‘what if’; (d) where possible, focus on a single phenomenon or concept; (e) use
exploratory verbs: discover, seek to understand, explore a process; (f) use non-directional
language (delete words that suggest quantitative study with a directional orientation: affect,
influence, impact, determine, cause etc.); (g) be open, and expect that the research questions
will evolve and change during the study consistent with the emerging design.
A research hypothesis will state the expected results. For example, a sport manager involved
in the fitness industry could hypothesize that the distance from the fitness centre is more
influential in determining regular attendance than the types of activities offered. The null
hypothesis will state what will be observed if ‘nothing unusual’ is happening. So, for example,
if you predicted a positive correlation between distance-to-gym and usage, the null hypothesis
would be ‘no relationship’ and not a negative correlation (which would mean the closer you
live, the less you use the gym). This is a common mistake made by undergraduate students.
Crucially, the statistics are testing that the null hypothesis can be rejected, and not that the
experimental hypothesis is ‘true’. Rejecting the null does not automatically mean the
‘alternate’ hypothesis is true, it might mean some other effect that we didn’t think of has
happened too.
Formulating hypotheses
Because hypotheses give structure and direction to research, the following aspects should be
kept in mind when formulating a hypothesis:
41
OVERVIEW OF SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
n Hypotheses can only be formulated after the researcher has gained enough knowledge
regarding the nature, extent and intensity of the problem. A hypothesis is formulated
after the problem has been stated and the literature study has been concluded. It is
formulated when the researcher is totally aware of the theoretical and empirical
background to the problem.
n Hypotheses are tentative statements/solutions to be tested, derived from explanations
of the formulated problem.
n The research problem does not have to consist of one hypothesis only. The type of
problem area investigated, and the extent that encircles the research field are the
determining factors on how many hypotheses will be included in the research
proposal.
DEFINITIONS
The researcher must define every term that is directly associated with the study. The operational
definition is the observable phenomenon that enables the researcher to empirically test whether
or not the predicted outcomes can be supported. If the researcher is going to conduct a study
that involves a measure of sponsorship effectiveness, then they must operationally define
sponsorship effectiveness and must also provide some observable evidence of changes in its
effectiveness. Owing to the exploratory and technical nature of research, the definitions you
need are very rarely the same as those in the dictionary. For example, management skills,
abilities and talent can all appear very similar in everyday language, but can have very specific
meanings in Sport Management Research as established by the definition attached to them.
tests. These often involve the distribution of data, the number of participants etc. and if you
do not check they have been met then you may end up making spurious claims.
Delimitations are boundaries that the researcher sets to limit the generalizability of findings.
They are imposed by the researcher in the scope of the study. For example, in a study dealing
with the attitude of individual sport athletes to doping, the researcher may choose to restrict
the selection of subjects to just two or three sports, simply because all individual sports cannot
be included in one study. Thus the researcher delimits the study.
Limitations are possible shortcomings or influences that cannot be controlled or are the
results of the delimitations imposed by the researcher. If we limit the previous study of
individual-sport athletes to just two sports there is an immediate limitation with respect to
how well these represent all individual sports and therefore the generalizations that can be
made from the research. The researcher should not be overzealous in searching for limitations
as it may devalue the study too much in the eyes of the research community. An example of
a limitation is that a sport organization might only allow the researcher to collect data during
a certain time of the regular season, or that selected participants might not answer truthfully
or at all. In setting out the limitations, Pajares (2007) suggested that the researcher should
think about one’s analysis, the nature of self-report, one’s instruments and the sample. In
other words one should think about threats to internal validity that may have been impossible
to avoid or minimize and explain. Further discussion of this is taken up in Part 3 of the book.
Table 3.2 can be used to help you identify some common sources of limitations in
quantitative and qualitative research.
43
OVERVIEW OF SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
completion of a study, if it is clear that documented potential or probable benefits have been
withheld from some individuals these individuals should be offered the benefits they were
denied.
CONCLUSION
This chapter discussed the processes that underpin a research study or investigation. It has
identified that ideas for research can be obtained from numerous sources. Once the research
topic has been identified the sport management researcher needs an understanding of research
planning, what constitutes a literature review and strategies to complete one. A systematic
approach to research that is guided by well-constructed questions will allow the sport
management researcher to not only identify what happens, but how it happens, and also,
importantly, why it happens.
This chapter has also offered an overview of the ethics process and its implications for
Sport Management Research. There are many times when the researcher faces difficult
choices and will need to weigh up the benefits of the research against any possible harm caused
to participants. A system of research ethics serves to guide the researcher in making the moral
choices that will ultimately benefit both the research and the participants.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
It is an important part of the research process for the sport management researcher to identify
the area they want to investigate. With a basic understanding of this process, answer the
following questions:
n Identify three ways in which the sport management researcher can determine suitable
research topics.
n How can the sport management researcher identify what has already been published in
their area of interest?
n What are the implications of conducting a basic research study as opposed to an
applied research study?
The design of the research study, including the formulation of ideas, questions, reviewing
the literature and the research plan itself are the essential first steps for the sport management
researcher intending to undertake research. Now, having an overview of this process, attempt
to answer the following question:
n Is the Internet a primary and reliable source of literature and/or information for the
sport management researcher?
Research ethics, central to the design of the research study, are necessary to protect the right
of the sport management researcher, to ensure the research participants are not placed at any
45
OVERVIEW OF SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
risk of harm, and to reduce the likelihood of legal action against researchers and their
institution. With this understanding, attempt to discuss the following scenario.
n Discuss the ethical concerns associated with investigating the impact of a new sport
development programme on elite junior athletes.
46
Part 2
Qualitative research
for sport management
researchers
This page intentionally left blank
Chapter 4
LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of this chapter you should be able to:
KEY TERMS
Participant observation – the researcher observes the research study site by direct
participation in the study.
Focus groups – small groups of participants share their thoughts about a specific topic of
research.
Direct observation – the noting and recording of actions and behaviours, events and activities
at the research site.
Fieldwork – where the researcher engages in the research study in the natural setting of the
topic of study, as opposed to a controlled environment.
KEY THEMES
The key questions raised in this chapter are:
n How does the sport management researcher determine the most applicable data collection
methods to utilize?
n Which interview techniques are more suitable for the Sport Management Research study?
n When are focus groups a preferable approach for data collection?
49
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
CHAPTER OVERVIEW
The data collection phase is devoted to gathering the data for the research and organizing it,
so that it can be properly analysed. This chapter covers the four basic types of qualitative data
collection: observations, interviews, documents and audiovisual materials.
In recent years, new forms of data collection have emerged consisting of journaling in
narrative story writing, utilizing text from email messages, and observation through videotapes
and photographs (Creswell, 1998). In addition, Denzin and Lincoln (2005) suggested data
collection using techniques such as the analysis of artefacts and cultural records, the use of
visual materials and the use of personal experience. For instance, a biography, the portrait
of an individual’s life, is made from documents, interviews and possible observations (Creswell,
1998).
1 Observations
Observational techniques are methods by which individuals gather first-hand data on the
policies, programmes, projects, processes or behaviours being studied. They provide
researchers with an opportunity to collect data on a wide range of behaviours, to capture a
great variety of interactions, and to openly explore the evaluation topic. Observation entails
the systematic noting and recording of actions and behaviours (both verbal and non-verbal),
events and objects in the location or group being researched. Observations can be useful during
both the formative and summative phases of research. Table 4.1 summarizes some of the key
discussion concerning the use of observations in qualitative research.
The ideal is to negotiate and adopt that degree of participation that will yield the
most meaningful data about the program given the characteristics of the participants,
50
QUALITATIVE DATA COLLECTION
Advantages
• Researcher conducts fieldwork to understand situation/context
• Researcher may be able to identify unanticipated outcomes from an ‘insider’ perspective
• Are usually unstructured and flexible
• Observations give insight into the behaviour of individuals and groups
Disadvantages
• High levels of observer expertise may be necessary in various settings
• Observer presence may contaminate data
• Selective perception of observer may compromise data
• Observer has little control over the setting and may not get quality data
• Behaviours observed may not be an accurate representation of actual setting
• Fieldwork may be expensive and time consuming
• Training is critical
There are two generally recognized observation techniques: direct and participant. Direct
observation is privileged in the scientific or positivist paradigm, as it is believed to be more
objective and protect the neutrality of the researcher. In contrast, participant observation, which
evolved in the field of anthropology, is more aligned with the naturalistic paradigm that argues
that total objectivity is neither possible nor desirable.
DIRECT OBSERVATION
The researcher observes without engaging or interacting with the situation or environment
they are observing, in the belief that they are not disturbing the environment and are able to
maintain neutrality and objectivity in the process. For example, a sport management researcher
may quietly and inconspicuously observe the engagement/non-engagement of fans with
sponsorship activation booths outside a sporting event. There are critiques of this belief that
point out that once researchers appear on the scene, total objectivity and therefore, control
of bias, is no longer possible as the presence of the researcher alone will automatically influence
people’s behaviour. Engaging in observation – where the participants are unaware of the
researcher’s presence – raises ethical concerns, as participants may not have given informed
consent for the observation to occur.
PARTICIPANT OBSERVATION
As the name ‘participant’ suggests, the researcher participates in the activities of the persons
being observed rather than being an aloof observer. The researcher has two roles – as
51
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
observer and as participant. The researcher participates as much as possible in the daily life
of the subjects while also carefully observing everything he or she can about it. Volunteering
at a sport event is one way to enable participant observation. Through this, the researcher is
seeking to gain what is called an ‘emic’ perspective of the native’s point of view or the insider’s
perspective. The researcher records detailed field notes, conducts interviews based on open-
ended questions and gathers whatever site documents might be available, and these items
form the data in the study.
The role of the researcher in participant observation also involves variations in overt or
covert dimensions. In terms of the overt, participants in the field are fully aware who the observer
is and that observations are being conducted together with a complete explanation of the
study. By contrast, in a covert position, participants are not informed or aware of anything
occurring. Researchers need to be aware of ethical considerations around covert observation
and the absence of informed consent on the part of the unaware (and perhaps even unwilling)
research participants. Hammersley and Atkinson (1983) suggested that there is the danger of
the researcher ‘going native’. This often means being too involved or having too close a rapport
with the person or persons being observed to the extent that the researcher loses objectivity,
or rather (given objectivity is not always the aim of such studies), loses the ability to achieve
the study’s aims. For example, a researcher sent to covertly observe a culture of illicit doping
in a sport team may be seduced by the success of winning, and perhaps the money/fame and
status. This researcher might then be very unwilling to report on the team, or may fabricate
data to help exonerate the team from any wrongdoing.
Fieldwork
Fieldwork involves the researcher working for long periods of time in a natural setting. Field
relations are the complex relationships the researcher develops with others (for example,
gatekeepers who help to allow/arrange access, and the research participants themselves) while
in the field. Whereas volunteering for a single sport event was an example of participant
52
QUALITATIVE DATA COLLECTION
observation, volunteering over the course of the year in the event office would be considered
fieldwork. These relationships have logistical, procedural, ethical and political dimensions
(Schwandt, 2001).
FIELD NOTES
Field notes are frequently used to provide more in-depth background or to help the observer
remember salient events (for example key emotions during a data collection, or vital
information that was provided outside the formal ‘observation’/recording). Field notes
contain the description of what has been observed. The descriptions must be factual, accurate
and thorough, without being judgemental and cluttered by trivia. The date and time of the
observation should be recorded, and everything that the observer believes to be worth noting
should be included. No information should be trusted to future recall, as human memory is
famously unreliable. The ideal observation process is supported and contextualized by keeping
systematic and analytical field notes. During the data collection phase the researcher typically
keeps four types of field notes, as described by Richardson (2000):
1 methodological notes on issues and decisions pertaining to the research process, such as
coding labels and participant criteria;
2 observational notes collected during observations made while attending the above
mentioned events and interviews;
3 analytical notes noting assumptions and the process of data analysis and interpretation;
and
4 general field notes that include anecdotal information such as contacts made for future
reference.
The use of technological tools, such as a battery-operated tape recorder or dictaphone, laptop
computer, camera or video camera, can make the collection of field notes more efficient and
the notes themselves more comprehensive. Informed consent must almost always be obtained
from participants before any observational data are gathered, and the participants must be
informed where their data will be kept, how long for, and how it will be used before they
give consent (covert studies create a problem in this respect, and the ‘solution’ is normally
agreed by negotiation with a suitable ethics board).
53
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
It is essential that the sport management researcher employs good observational practices
when using this method. These practices include: (a) careful documentation of the following:
the degree and quality of participation of individuals and groups; all aspects of the setting;
the personal interactions between individuals and groups; the body-language of participants
and the physical setup of the house or meetings and gatherings; the informal interactions before,
during and after discussions and meetings, and during breaks; (b) a critical attitude involving:
continual questioning of own assumptions and biases; cross-checking; reflexivity; and (c) video
and photographs that may be useful in certain circumstances as they offer relatively objective
and accurate recordings of events.
2 Interviews
The use of interviews as a data collection method begins with the assumption that the
participants’ perspectives are meaningful, knowable and able to be made explicit. An interview,
rather than a paper and pencil survey, is selected when interpersonal contact is important
and when opportunities for follow-up of interesting comments are desired.
The most utilized data collection method in qualitative research studies is the interview.
Two schools of thought exist with respect to interview type. Most authors classify qualitative
interviews into three types: structured interviews, unstructured interviews and semi-structured
interviews. Other researchers propose only two types of interviews in qualitative research:
structured interviews, in which a carefully worded questionnaire is administered; and in-depth
interviews, in which the interviewer does not follow a rigid form but simply lets the
conversation flow. The following discussion outlines the use of the term interview by both
schools of thought.
Structured interviews, sometimes called standardized interviews, are used in quantitative
research and involve the researcher asking the same set of questions, in the same order, using
the same words, to different interviewees. Structured interviews are convenient for comparing
different interviewees’ answers to the same questions, and when a team of researchers is
involved in conducting the interviews. For instance, structured interviews may offer a source
of comparison of sponsor message recall, drawing on both the subject matter and feelings
generated for a particular message. This is especially helpful when several researchers are
testing recall from numerous study participants.
Burns (1997) suggests there are several disadvantages to this method of interviewing. First,
the researcher has no flexibility to determine the beliefs, feelings, attitudes and perceptions
54
QUALITATIVE DATA COLLECTION
of the respondent beyond those elicited by the predetermined response categories. Second,
in using a structured interview, the interviewer must become a neutral standardized medium
wherein questions are presented without bias or subjectivity. As a result, the method fails to
acknowledge the inherent human-ness of the interviewer. Finally, the detachment and
impersonal approach required can prevent trust and rapport from developing between the
interviewer and the respondent, meaning important data (such as the participant’s real
feelings on a matter) may be lost.
Semi-structured interviews (sometimes referred to as focused interviews) involve a series of
open-ended questions based on the topic areas the researcher wants to cover. The open-ended
nature of the question stays true to defining the topic under investigation, as well as providing
opportunities for both interviewer and interviewee to discuss some topics in more detail. If
the interviewee has difficulty answering a question or provides only a brief response, the
interviewer can use cues or prompts to encourage the interviewee to consider the question
further. In a semi-structured interview the interviewer also has the freedom to probe the
interviewee to elaborate on the original response or to follow a line of inquiry introduced by
the interviewee. Because of the nature and context of many qualitative sport management
studies, semi-structured interviews are the most common form of interviewing in the
discipline. The major disadvantage of semi-structured interviews, if one is seeking to generate
objective or comparable data, is that the researcher is vulnerable to the interpretations and
subjective insights of the informant.
Unstructured interviews (sometimes referred to as ‘depth’ or ‘in-depth’ interviews) have very
little structure at all. The interviewer goes into the interview with the aim of discussing a
limited number of topics, sometimes as few as one or two, and frames the questions on the
basis of the interviewee’s previous response. Although only one or two topics are discussed
they are covered in great detail. Unstructured interviews are exactly what they sound like –
interviews where the interviewer wants to find out about a specific topic but has no structure
or preconceived plan or expectation as to how they will deal with the topic. The difference
with semi-structured interviews is that in a semi-structured interview the interviewer has a
set of broad questions to ask and may also have some prompts to help the interviewee but
the interviewer has the time and space to respond to the interviewee’s responses. The major
disadvantage of unstructured interviews is that the researcher is vulnerable to being dragged
‘off topic’ by the responses of the interviewee, as responses that often seem like a natural
part of the conversation may, when analysed, be totally irrelevant to the actual research
question.
All three types of interview can be used in combination (Patton, 1990). For example,
after conducting structured interviews, researchers could follow up with semi-structured
interviews, and perhaps even extend to using unstructured interviews or, conversely, they
may start with unstructured interviews to relax the interviewees, and move to a semi-
structured interview format.
In-depth interview
As indicated previously, some researchers propose only two types of interview approaches in
qualitative research: structured interviews and in-depth interviews. In structured interviews (as above)
55
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
the emphasis is on obtaining answers to carefully phrased questions. Interviewers are trained
to deviate as little as possible from the question wording to ensure uniformity of interview
administration. In contrast, an in-depth interview is a dialogue between a skilled interviewer
and an interviewee. Its goal is to elicit rich, detailed material that can be used in analysis
(Lofland and Lofland, 1995). In-depth interviews are characterized by extensive probing and
open-ended questions. Typically, the project evaluator prepares an interview guide that
includes a list of questions or issues that are to be explored and suggested probes for following
up on key topics. The guide helps the interviewer pace the interview and make interviewing
more systematic and comprehensive. Lofland and Lofland provide guidelines for preparing
interview guides, conducting the interview with the guide and writing up the interview. Poor
interviewing skills, poor phrasing of questions or inadequate knowledge of the subject’s culture
or frame of reference may result in a data collection that obtains little useful information.
There are also a number of factors to consider when determining the setting for an interview,
these are detailed in the following text box.
56
QUALITATIVE DATA COLLECTION
Alternatively, another procedure for recording interviews draws on notes taken by the
interviewer or assigned note-taker. This method is called ‘note expansion’. As soon as
possible after the interview, the interviewer listens to the tape to clarify certain issues and
to confirm that all the main points have been included in the notes. This approach is
recommended when resources are scarce, when the results must be produced in a short period
of time, and when the purpose of the interview is to get rapid feedback from members of
the target population. The note expansion approach saves time and retains all the essential
points of the discussion. In addition to the drawbacks pointed out above, a disadvantage is
that the interviewer may be more selective or biased in what he or she writes, and the method
of expanding notes is very likely to generate unreliable and incorrect data.
Finally, the interviewer may use no tape recording, but instead takes detailed notes during
the interview and draws on memory to expand and clarify the notes immediately after the
interview. This approach is useful if time is short, the results are needed quickly and the
evaluation questions are simple. The drawbacks noted above are at their most pronounced,
however, if this method is used, and real care must be taken to record the outcomes of the
interview. The key practices to employ in qualitative interviews are outlined in the following
text box.
57
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
Step 1: Organize and prepare the data for analysis (for example, by carefully coding
participants’ ages, backgrounds and roles).
Step 2: Read through all the data for familiarization.
Step 3: Begin detailed analysis with a coding process (examples follow later, as they
depend on the exact methodology chosen).
Step 4: Use the coding process to generate a description of the setting or people as well as
themes for analysis.
Step 5: Advance how the description and themes will be represented in the qualitative
narrative.
Step 6: Make an interpretation or meaning of the data.
Face-to-face structured, semi-structured and unstructured interviews are some of the most
effective procedures used by the sport management researcher. There are also several more
specialized forms, including ethnographic interviewing, phenomenological interviewing, elite
interviewing, focus-group interviewing, and interviewing children – each requires particular
levels of expertise and guidance.
The researcher’s personal contacts and networks within the surfing industry initially made
the process of gaining permission to conduct the research less problematic. To gain insight
into the branding, sponsorship perceptions and management practices by the Big Three surf
companies, the researcher utilized a combination of both structured and semi-structured
interview approaches to approach and interview representatives from each surf company.
The representatives also named as ‘marketing’ and/or ‘team managers’ in charge of women’s
surfing within the selected companies were targeted because of their experience and
understanding of the area to be researched. An initial phone call was made to each surf
company by the researcher. This served as a means of introduction to the research topic and
to also ascertain which person would be best to provide information about management
58
QUALITATIVE DATA COLLECTION
practices of the company. Once identified, the representatives were contacted by phone and
a meeting time or phone interview was set up. A structured format was found more useful
when undertaking the surf company representative interviews as a tool to gain a comparative
sense of their role within the company and to complement questions sent via email. The
interview began with the researcher initiating a conversation about their background and
their role within the particular surf company. A typical question was:
How long have you been involved with this company and what is your main role
with regard to female surfers?
Does your company believe female lifestyle marketing and sponsorship is becoming
a more valuable investment and if so, does your company have a main strategic
direction with regard to public and media image for your sponsored female surfers?
Following these interviews a company profile was developed by the researcher using relevant
surf websites, to provide initial background information about the individual surf company
and brand. Once completed, an individual company profile was sent to each representative
for verification and for them to append any additional information they felt necessary.
Focus groups
Sometimes it is preferable to collect information from groups of people rather than from a
series of individuals. Focus groups are (usually semi-structured) interviews with a number of
participants that aim to explore a specific set of issues. Focus group discussions (or group
interviews) capitalize on group interaction and communication to generate data. Focus group
discussions can help researchers explore and clarify views in ways that are not possible or
accessible in one-to-one interviews. A sport management researcher may gather eight to ten
fans of a team and through a series of open-ended questions, encourage discussion around
issues important to fans in their own vocabulary, and explore their priorities. Tables 4.2 and
4.3 provide a summary of other issues to consider when planning to use focus groups in your
research. Factors to consider when choosing focus groups are included in Table 4.3.
Source: Adapted from Krueger (1994) Focus Groups: A Practical Guide for Applied Research
‘reliability’ outright, whereas others seek to conduct interviews that can make some sort of
claim to these.
Validity in interviewing refers to the formation of suitably operationalizing constructs and
ideas. Edwards and Skinner (2009) indicated that interviewing attempts to achieve construct
validity through three tactics. First, triangulation of interview questions is usually established
in the research design stage by two or more carefully worded questions that look at the subject
matter under investigation from different angles. Second, the interview method usually
contains an inbuilt negative case analysis whereby, in each interview and before the next, the
technique explicitly requires that the interviewer attempt to disprove emerging explanations
60
QUALITATIVE DATA COLLECTION
The purpose of this research study was to provide a rich and thick description of what it
means to be a NASCAR (National Association of Stock Car Racing) fan. Specifically, the
researcher examined how NASCAR fans create their sport fan identity, how being a NASCAR
fan influences their overall identity, and the social and cultural aspects associated with being
a NASCAR fan. The participants consisted of 12 (10 male and 2 female) self-identified
NASCAR fans in attendance at one of three races (Daytona 500 at Daytona International
Speedway in Daytona Beach, FL; Samsung/RadioShack 500 at Texas Motor Speedway in
Justin, TX; or the Richmond 400 at the Richmond International Raceway (RIR) in Richmond,
VA) during the 2006 NASCAR Nextel Cup Series season. Interviews were transcribed
verbatim and analysed, yielding four major themes. The themes that emerged included: (a)
entry into NASCAR, (b) being A NASCAR Fan, (c) ‘ya’ll NASCAR fans’: fan camaraderie,
and (d) win on Sunday. . . sell on Monday.
interpreted in the data (Dick, 1990). Finally, the flexibility of the approach allows the
interviewer to re-evaluate and redesign both the content and process of the interview
programme, thus establishing content validity.
Reliability in interviewing refers to how consistently a technique measures the concepts it
is supposed to measure, enabling other researchers to repeat the study and attain similar
findings. Edwards and Skinner (2009) suggested that reliability is usually achieved through
four tactics: first, reliability is attained through the structured process of interviews. Second,
reliability is achieved through organizing a structured process for recording, writing and
interpreting data. Third, research reliability is often achieved through comparison of the
research findings between the interviewer and interviewee (sometimes called ‘member
checking’). Finally, the use of a planning committee to assist in the design and administration
of the interview programme is another way that reliability can be achieved (Guba and Lincoln,
1994).
3 Documents
Lincoln and Guba (1985) defined a document as any written or recorded material not
prepared for the purposes of the evaluation or at the request of the inquirer. Creswell (2009)
added that the term ‘document’ includes not just texts, but also sound, photos, videos and
any materials that carry relevant messages. Guba and Lincoln (1981) suggested that documents
can be divided into two major categories: public records and personal documents.
61
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
Public records are materials created and kept for the purpose of attesting to an event or
providing an account (Lincoln and Guba, 1985). Public records can be collected from outside
(external) or within (internal) the setting in which the evaluation is taking place (i.e. through
an internal audit or by employing a more neutral organization). Examples of external records
in sport management are attendance and statistics reports, newspaper archives and records
that can assist an evaluator in gathering information about relevant trends in branding, ticket
sales, athletic performances and the like. Internal records include documents such as transcripts,
historical accounts, institutional mission statements, annual reports, budgets, reports, minutes
of meetings, internal memoranda, policy manuals, institutional histories, catalogues,
handbooks, official correspondence, demographic material, mass media reports and
presentations.
Personal documents are first-person accounts of events and experiences. These include
diaries, portfolios, photographs, artwork, schedules, scrapbooks, letters to the paper, etc.
Personal documents can help the evaluator understand how the participant sees the world
and what she or he wants to communicate to an audience. Collecting data from documents
is relatively invisible to, and requires minimal cooperation from persons within the setting
being studied. As such, the ethical issues around consent are usually handled by an ethics
committee instead of approaching the individual concerned.
The use of document collection has a number of advantages and disadvantages. Some of
these are outlined in Table 4.4.
Three distinctions among documents are usually made. The first distinction is made
between primary sources and secondary sources. Primary sources have a direct relationship with
those who are studied. They include letters, diaries and reports. Secondary sources are
transcribed or edited from primary sources and may include errors that the transcribing and
editing processes made.
Advantages
• Freely available in most circumstances
• Usually an inexpensive source of data
• Provide contextual background
• Provide opportunity for study of trends over time
• Unobtrusive
Disadvantages
• Documentation may be incomplete
• In some cases there may be inaccuracy and questionable authenticity of data
• Searching for documents may pose challenges
• Analysis of documents may be time consuming
• Access may be difficult
62
QUALITATIVE DATA COLLECTION
The second distinction is made between public and private documents. In a sport
organization public documents may include newsletters and minutes of meetings. Private
documents would include the details of tenders and commercial in-confidence documents.
The third distinction is made between solicited and unsolicited documents. Solicited documents
are produced with requests of the researchers. For example, researchers can ask participants
to keep diaries in which users write down reflective thoughts and comments. Unsolicited
documents are naturally produced and later taken by researchers; examples include personal
diaries and letters.
Like most research, qualitative document collection is not separate from data analysis. This
is an interpretive process. As part of the dual process of collection and analysis Altheide (1996,
pp. 23–44) developed a twelve step process model involving five stages of qualitative
document analysis, as follows:
format for easier search–find and text coding. Make appropriate adjustments to other data.
Complete data collection.
Shockley studied popular social networking sites such as ‘Twitter’ to argue that athletes no
longer communicate with the general public solely through traditional media outlets such as
newspapers. Social networking sites such as ‘Twitter’ allow athletes to directly communicate
with mass audiences. This direct communication raises several questions with regard to
dynamics of communication and uses of Internet portals. A content analysis examined
professional athletes’ ‘Twitter’ posts to help answer these questions.
Documents from photographs and video clips may be analysed using Collier and Collier’s
(1986) principles of critical analysis of visual documents. As Collier and Collier suggested,
these guidelines are provisional, and should fit to the needs of the researcher.
HYPOTHETICAL CASE
A recent trend in rugby union has been the increased globalization of professional rugby
contracts. Most rugby national governing bodies have had a policy of only selecting players
for the national team if they play in the domestic competition. The rationale for selecting
only domestic players is to keep the domestic competition at a high level in order to maintain
spectatorship, the main financial driver for professional rugby union governing bodies. With
countries such as France and Japan offering the highest wages, more and more players are
forgoing national team selection in order to make a better living overseas. This has caused
66
QUALITATIVE DATA COLLECTION
67
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
some national governing bodies to reconsider the domestic competition rule in order to stay
competitive in international competitions by selecting the top players available globally, and
not limiting selection to domestic players. One research question that may be addressed from
this growing trend is: to what extent do stakeholders value a national competition over
national team success (or vice-versa)?
Case questions:
1 What research method(s) could you utilize to answer that research question?
2 How might you focus the research question to enable easier data collection?
3 What other research questions come to mind under this scenario? Would answering
those research questions require the same data collection? How would they be different?
CONCLUSION
This chapter has examined the data collection methods that can be utilized to acquire data,
and to address the research aims. Four basic types of qualitative data collection: (a) observations
(ranging from nonparticipant to participant), (b) interviews (ranging from semi-structured
to open-ended), (c) documents (ranging from private to public), and (d) audiovisual materials
(comprising materials such as photographs, compact discs and videotapes) were discussed in
detail.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
Data collection is the process of collecting or gathering information pertaining to a specific
research topic that will be used by the sport management researcher in the later process of
analysis to formulate theories, produce recommendations or contextualize events and activities
in the sport management setting. With this in mind:
n Distinguish between the different forms of observation and interviews and how these
might be used by the sport management researcher.
n Discuss how documents can be used by the sport management researcher to collect
specific data. Provide examples of the documents a sport management researcher may
use in their research.
68
Chapter 5
LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of this chapter you should be able to:
KEY TERMS
Modes of analysis – the process by which the researcher reviews the data collected with the
aim of making sense of it so that evidence can be obtained to answer the research
question.
Triangulation – examining the consistency of information generated by different data
collection techniques, or examining different data gathered by the same collection
technique.
Coding – the organization of raw data into conceptual categories.
KEY THEMES
n What is coding?
n What is Computer Assisted/Aided Qualitative Data Analysis?
69
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
CHAPTER OVERVIEW
Qualitative data is mostly in the form of words, phrases, sentences and may include visual
images, audio and video recordings. Qualitative data is often a mass of words obtained from
recordings of interviews, field notes of observations and analysis of documents as well as
reflective notes of the researcher. This mass of information has to be organized, summarized,
described and interpreted. In sports management research, where the material of the most
interest is often not in the form of quantifiable numbers, but rather people’s opinions and
experiences, qualitative data may be extremely relevant and useful. This chapter discusses
qualitative data analysis (QDA) for the sport management researcher.
1 by establishing and applying a theoretical position or positions through which the data
is viewed and compared (deductive); and
70
QUALITATIVE DATA ANALYSIS
2 by creating ideal types or theoretical categories that provide a structure for analysis
(inductive) (Grbich, 1999, p. 149).
Analysis is usually seen as an ongoing process that begins from the moment research questions
are confirmed and secondary material sources directly related to the topic or issues are
reviewed. Analysis continues throughout the data collection phase until the presentation of
the findings.
71
Table 5.1 continued
Mode Description Uses
Typology A classification system, taken from These approaches allow a
patterns, themes, or other kinds of researcher to bring order and sense
groups of data. to an area or phenomenon that may
initially appear complex and chaotic.
Taxonomy The practice and science of
classification.
Constant Comparing codes to find consistencies These approaches are highly
comparison/ and differences. applicable as concepts begin to take
Grounded theory shape from the data, and require
you to try and propose how the new
concepts are linked, or relate to
each other.
Analytic induction Systematic examination of similarities
between various social phenomena in
order to develop concepts or ideas.
Content analysis Content analysis is a research
technique for making replicable and
valid references from data to their
contexts. The researcher searches for
structures and patterned regularities
in the text and makes inferences on
the basis of these regularities.
Logical analysis/ Uses flow charts, diagrams, etc. to
Matrix analysis pictorially represent the data, as well
as written descriptions to provide an
outline of generalized causation,
logical reasoning process, etc.
Quasi-statistics Counts the number of times something In some circumstances, the number
is mentioned in field notes as very of times a word or phrase is
rough estimate of frequency. mentioned may be a key issue, in
which case counting frequency
(or perhaps, in what context the
word/phrase is used) may be a
relevant approach.
Event analysis/ Emphasis is on finding precise In situations where a specific event
Microanalysis beginnings and endings of events by or story is of interest, often critical
finding specific boundaries and things moments, catastrophes or
that mark boundaries or events. ‘breakthroughs’, then analysing the
Specifically oriented towards film specific event may be highly
and video. informative.
PROCEDURAL RIGOUR
Two major trends have been identified in the debate about rigour and validity in qualitative
research:
n the exclusive trend, for which the qualitative paradigm is so radically different from the
quantitative paradigm that a new language must be used to express its rigour and
validity (Guba and Lincoln, 1981, 1982, 1989);
n the inclusive trend, which argues that the credibility of qualitative research can only be
widely accepted if the language of mainstream (quantitative) research is maintained,
although operationalized to meet the new conditions and circumstances (Yin, 1994;
Morse, Barret, Mayan, Olson, Spiers and Hon, 2002; Creswell, 2009).
The following discussion outlines both these trends and their applicability for Sport
Management Research.
Exclusive trend
The proponents of the exclusive trend claim that the terms ‘validity’ and ‘reliability’ from
quantitative research do not make sense in qualitative research, so they should be replaced.
Trochim and Donnelly (2008) described the belief of some researchers that a purpose of the
qualitative approach is to reject validity since no single reality exists. However, instead of
seeking objective reliability and validity, alternative criteria for validating qualitative research
may include ‘credibility, transferability, dependability and confirmability’ (p. 149). Table 5.2
compares these criteria against those most commonly used in quantitative research that are
discussed further in the next section.
Table 5.2 Criteria commonly used in validating qualitative and quantitative research
Trustworthiness
Trustworthiness is the umbrella term coined by Lincoln and Guba (1985). They use this term
to refer to a set of criteria that have been offered for judging the quality or goodness of
73
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
qualitative enquiry. Lincoln and Guba and subsequently many others have argued that these
criteria are more appropriate than the traditional quantitative criteria of validity and reliability.
There are four major components that comprise trustworthiness criteria, these are: credibility,
transferability, dependability and confirmability.
Credibility in qualitative research is like internal validity in quantitative research. Credibility
involves ensuring that the participants, setting and processes are accurately identified and
described for the research to be meaningful. Techniques for establishing credibility include:
prolonged engagement, persistent observation, triangulation, peer debriefing, negative case
analysis, referential adequacy and member checking. For example, a sport management
researcher investigating concussion policies in a football team may enhance credibility by
interviewing several people at different levels and positions in the organization to encompass
any different and consistent viewpoints.
Transferability exists when the results can be applied to other contexts. The researcher
describes in detail the context and underlying assumptions of the research (thick description),
so that transferability is possible, but the person who transfers the results to a different context
is responsible for the transfer. The notion of transferability raises the question, ‘can we apply
these findings to other contexts or groups of people?’ or, ‘will fans of one sport studied have
similar viewpoints or actions of fans in other sports?’
All steps of the methods used to collect and analyse data should be documented and traceable
in order to allow for auditability (Padgett, 2008). To reduce researcher bias, a process of
reflexivity, or a systematic self-awareness, where the researchers would reflect on their analysis
of the data and discuss the differences in coding after cross-checking, is important.
Dependability emphasizes the stability of the data over time. Dependability is often another
word for reliability. It is when the researcher attempts to account for changing conditions in
the phenomenon chosen for the study as well as changes in the design created by increasingly
refined understanding of the setting. Dependability in qualitative research is often achieved
by the researcher allowing cross-checking of codes (also known as inter-coder agreement or
inter-rater reliability) by other research experts to see whether these experts would code in
the same way as the researcher (Creswell, 2009); as a sport researcher, if you have coded
interviews with team trainers, coaches and athletes that reflect particular values over doping
allegations, by then asking an external expert to code segments of the interviews tests
dependability if those same particular values arise. The researcher must be able to account
for the permanently changing context in which the research takes place, describing any changes
that occur and how these changes affect the research.
Confirmability demonstrates that the inquiry is free of bias, values and prejudice, i.e. that
the data interpretations and outcomes are rooted in contexts and persons apart from the
researcher and are not mere products of the researcher’s imagination. The researcher must
document the procedures, so that others can check and recheck the data throughout the study.
Techniques that may be used to strengthen confirmability include: prolonged engagement,
persistent observation, peer debriefing, negative case analysis and triangulation. Continuing
the example above, if the researcher has a biased opinion of doping in sport and allows that
bias to creep into the coding process, they may ‘uncover’ values from the trainers, coaches
and athletes that match their own values. A first external expert may code the data to test
74
QUALITATIVE DATA ANALYSIS
dependability, and a second external expert may code portions of the data to confirm the
findings.
After the study, a data audit or external audit should be conducted by a researcher not
involved in the research process, to examine both the process and product of the research
study. This process ‘will ensure the truth value of the data’ (Creswell, 2009, p. 199).
Inclusive trend
Many interpretations exist within the inclusive trend. The approach discussed here is proposed
by Creswell (2009). According to Creswell, qualitative validity refers to the different procedures
the researcher employs to ensure findings are accurate, whereas qualitative reliability refers to
whether a particular research approach is consistent across different projects and different
researchers. Qualitative generalization is a term that is not often discussed in contexts of
qualitative research, since the findings achieved from qualitative research methods are normally
not intended for generalization (Creswell, 2009). The following discussion will outline this
trend.
QUALITATIVE VALIDITY
Creswell (2009) recommended the use of multiple strategies that enhance the researcher’s
ability to assess the accuracy of findings, as well as convince the readers of that accuracy.
According to Creswell, one advantage of qualitative research can be high validity. Validity,
in Cresswell’s interpretation means that ‘the researcher checks for the accuracy of the
findings’ (p. 190) by using multiple strategies to enhance the researcher’s ability to evaluate
the precision of findings. Creswell also suggested that ‘good qualitative research contains
comments by the researchers about how their interpretation of the findings is shaped by their
background’ (p. 192). Creswell specifically listed a series of steps to avoid validity threats for
qualitative research. He argued that it is a prime imperative to check for the ‘accuracy of the
findings’ (p. 196) and he listed eight strategies to avoid validity issues that should also improve
the researcher’s capability to evaluate the truthfulness of the given information. These are:
(1) triangulation; (2) member checking; (3) rich, thick description; (4) avoidance of researcher
bias; (5) negative case analysis; (6) prolonged engagement; (7) peer debriefing; and (8) external
auditing. These strategies are explained in the following passages using a sport management
context.
1 Triangulation
Triangulation can be achieved by collecting data using different sources, different settings and
at different times. Burns (1997) postulated that triangulation leads to verification and validation
of qualitative analysis in two ways: first, by examining the consistency of information
generated by different data collection techniques; and second by examining the consistency
of different information within the same technique. Triangulation is regarded as the best way
to reduce the likelihood of misinterpretation with the target to clarify meaning and verifying
75
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
When analysing data, ensuring that the triangulation methods above are covered will give the
researcher an added measure of validity in the final reporting of results.
Crystallization vs triangulation
Denzin and Lincoln (1994) indicate that ‘triangulation arises from the traditions of navigation
in which a point in space can be located precisely through three directions’ (p. 15). Richardson
(2000) argued the approach to research using triangulation assumes that ‘data are fixed objects
that can be understood precisely’ (p. 929). However, Richardson (2000) suggested that
postmodernism views the world from more than three sides and proposes the central imagery
for ‘validity’ is not the triangle but rather the crystal (i.e. more perspectives will offer more
insights). Cooky (2006, p. 66) postulated that ‘a postmodern epistemological perspective
rejects triangulation on the grounds that objective reality cannot be captured’ and proposed
‘inclusion of multiple data collection methods adds rigor, depth, complexity and richness to
any inquiry’. It has been suggested that using triangulation in a postmodern context does not
acknowledge that ‘human subjects and histories of their action and technologies are dynamic,
always in motion and always changing’ (Edwards and Skinner, 2009, p. 146).
Richardson (2000) viewed crystallization as ‘deconstructing the traditional idea of validity
and providing the reader with a deepened, complex, thoroughly partial, understanding of the
topic’ (p. 929). Crystallization, in this way refers to the material that is filtered through to
the researcher as a participant–observer and partial ‘insider’. This metaphor considers data
as both ‘fragmented and seen through the prism of perception as dispersed reflections of the
phenomena’ (Richardson and Lockridge, 2004, p. 240). Therefore, interpretation of data in
this approach depends upon the crystal or the lens that the researcher looks through at that
given time.
According to Richardson and Lockridge (2004, p. 240), ‘crystals and prisms . . . reflect
externalities and refract within themselves, creating different colors, patterns, arrays, casting
off in different directions. What we see depends on our angle of response.’ Furthermore,
76
QUALITATIVE DATA ANALYSIS
‘instead of locating the data precisely, recognition is directed towards methods that shape the
data that is perceived. What is perceived is not the “data” in any raw form, but the refractions
of that data’ (p. 240). They also explain that ‘crystallization, without losing structure,
deconstructs the traditional idea of “validity”’ (p. 240).
From this perspective the researcher adopts the metaphor of the ‘crystal’ as a more valid
approach to conceptualizing the fragmented ‘truth’ and contextualizing data. This approach
also recognizes that validity is less about questioning whether or not the study ‘measures what
was supposed to be measured’ or even that it ‘saw what was meant to be seen’ (Fine, 1994,
p. 72). Rather, Reinhartz (1992) believes that ‘as long as the researcher is self-aware,
whatever happens is useful data’ (p. 68). Therefore, it is the responsibility of the researcher
in any qualitative study to consider the filters, lenses and crystals surrounding their work,
and this can clarify the researcher’s understanding of the subject matter.
2 Member checking
Member checking is often viewed as an important procedure for verifying findings and
ensuring that they are valid and meet the trustworthiness criterion of confirmability. Member
checking is also referred to as respondent validation. Lincoln and Guba (1985) described
member checks as ‘the most crucial technique for establishing credibility’ (p. 314) in a research
study. In Sport Management Research, the validity process consists of taking data and
interpretations back to the participants in the study so that they can confirm the credibility
of the information and the researcher’s interpretations.
In member checking, researchers systematically check the data and the narrative account
with participants. This may involve, for example, a focus group of fans reviewing the findings
on season ticket purchase motivation, or those fans viewing the raw data (for example,
transcriptions or observational field notes) and commenting on their accuracy.
Throughout this process, the researchers ask participants whether the themes or categories
make sense, whether they are developed with sufficient evidence, and whether the overall
account is realistic and accurate (Creswell, 2009). In turn, researchers incorporate participants’
comments into the final narrative. In this way, the participants add credibility to the qualitative
study by having a chance to react to both the data and the final narrative.
This process has been criticized, first, on the grounds that it is not clear how the procedure
actually helps establish the truth of findings, and second, that implementing a member check
may introduce bias, leading to respondents changing their original opinions. For example,
fans may be swayed by other fans’ motivations to purchase after reading and reflecting on a
focus group transcript. Member checks are therefore valued just as much for their ethical
impact as for their epistemological contribution, wherein it is simply courteous to feedback
findings to those who have given their time and knowledge to the research project. The current
view is that member checking, like many of the other processes here, does not necessarily
lead to confirmation of the findings on its own, but is a useful way of generating more data
and insights.
77
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
refers to the process of testing out sampling strategies and/or analysis to look for alternative
explanations or different cases that are in contrast to the researcher’s own theories or
explanations. This is part of a well-established approach known as analytic induction.
Negative case analysis may involve a re-examination of every case, after the initial analysis
is completed, to see whether the characteristics or properties of the emergent themes were
applicable to all cases. It is argued that in addition to developing your explanation, if you
have explored any alternative explanations, your own explanation will have much wider
theoretical significance (Mason, 1996).
6 Prolonged engagement
Another validity procedure is for researchers to stay at the research site for a prolonged period
of time. Fetterman (1989) contends that ‘working with people day in and day out for long
periods of time is what gives ethnographic research its validity and vitality’ (p. 46 – noting,
of course, that not all research is ethnographic). During repeated observation, the sport
management researchers build trust with participants, find gatekeepers to allow access to people
and sites, establish rapport so that participants are comfortable disclosing information,
reciprocate by giving back to the people being studied, which allows the sport researcher to
challenge their own preconceptions of the research environment.
Being in the field over time solidifies evidence because researchers can check out the data
and their hunches and compare interview data with observational data. It is not a process that
is systematically established, but constructivists recognize that the longer they stay in the field,
the more the different perspectives will be heard from participants and the better the
understanding of the context of participant views. In practice, prolonged engagement in the
field has no set duration, but as an example, a sport management researcher could easily spend
from four months to a year with a team, incorporating an entire season and even the off-season.
7 Peer debriefing
A peer review or debriefing ‘is a process of exposing oneself to a disinterested peer in a manner
paralleling analytical sessions and for the purpose of exploring aspects of the inquiry that might
otherwise remain only implicit within the inquirer’s mind’ (Lincoln and Guba, 1985, p. 308).
A peer reviewer provides support, plays devil’s advocate, challenges the researchers’
assumptions, pushes the researchers to the next step methodologically, and asks hard questions
about methods and interpretations (Lincoln and Guba, 1985). In the peer debriefing strategy,
the lens for establishing credibility is someone external to the study, and a critical paradigm
is operating because of the close collaboration between the external reviewer and the
qualitative researcher. This procedure is best used over time during the process of an entire
study. Peer debriefers can provide written feedback to sport researchers or simply serve as
a sounding board for ideas. The ultimate purpose of peer debriefing, contended Lincoln and
Guba (1985), is to enhance the credibility, or truth value, of a qualitative study, by providing
‘an external check on the inquiry process’ (p. 301). Peer debriefing is particularly advisable
because of a distinctive characteristic of qualitative research: the researcher-as-instrument.
Individual researchers are the primary means for data collection and analysis. As such, each
79
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
researcher brings a different combination of subjective knowledge, skills and values to the
research endeavour. Researchers must come to know their unique characteristics as research
tools and to understand how their subjectivity affects the conduct and results of their research.
Researcher subjectivity is often equated with bias and seen as something to be avoided.
8 External auditing
The last method of verification employed is an external audit. In establishing an audit trail,
researchers provide clear documentation of all research decisions and activities. An audit trail
is established by sport management researchers documenting the inquiry process through
journaling and memoing, keeping a research log of all activities, developing a data collection
chronology and recording data analysis procedures clearly.
External auditing is a procedure that is useful for determining both dependability and
confirmability. It is a procedure whereby an independent third party can review the documents
and records of the process and activities of the research project. In doing so, the independent
third party is able to make a judgement about the dependability of procedures employed by
the researcher and the extent to which the findings are confirmable.
An external auditor examines both the process and the product, assessing accuracy and
determining whether the findings, interpretations and conclusions are supported by the data
(Creswell, 1998). The external auditor is usually skilled in qualitative research and is not
connected to the study in any way. The external auditor examines this documentation with
the following questions in mind: are the findings grounded in the data? Are inferences logical?
Is the category structure appropriate? Can inquiry decisions and methodological shifts be
justified? What is the degree of researcher bias? What strategies were used for increasing
credibility? (Schwandt and Halpern, 1988).
QUALITATIVE RELIABILITY
Reliability is commonly used in relation to the question of whether the measures devised for
concepts in the social sciences are consistent. Qualitative reliability differs from validity in that
reliability indicates the ‘researcher’s approach is consistent across different researchers and
different projects’ (Creswell, 2009, p. 190).
80
QUALITATIVE DATA ANALYSIS
Prolonged engagement Data was collected for over six months in the field from various
and persistent observation community sport groups.
Triangulation Data was used from documents, interviews and community focus
groups to assess the validity of findings.
Peer review and debriefing The researcher(s) should regularly reflect on the data and
discuss emerging propositions and interpretations from the data.
Researchers who are not engaged in fieldwork in specific settings
are able to adopt the role of ‘critical friend’, giving feedback
and probing for alternative interpretations.
Negative case analysis Community sport organizations were asked for disconfirming
evidence.
Clarifying researcher bias The researcher(s) should operate in a reflexive manner from the
project’s outset. Reports should clarify assumptions about the
research goals and about how support to community sport
groups should be organized.
Member checks The data collected, its analysis, the interpretations of it and the
conclusions drawn should be given back to research participants
so that they can judge the accuracy and credibility of the
accounts.
Rich, thick description Reports should be detailed descriptions of the research
settings.
External auditing An external auditor from a government agency could examine
the research process to determine whether the findings,
interpretations and conclusions drawn are consistent.
In order to do this, Creswell (2009) and Yin (2009) suggested documentation of as many
steps of the procedure as possible and other reliability procedures, including cross-checking
codes, checking transcripts and writing definitions of codes, and constantly comparing data
with those definitions of the codes. The following procedures can be used as a means of ensuring
reliability for single researcher studies: (1) ensure appropriate preparation (skill/knowledge
level) of the researcher; (2) ensure appropriate review of the literature; (3) ensure coding
reliability; and, (4) ensure transcripts do not contain obvious errors (Creswell 2009, p. 190).
Gibbs (2007) similarly suggests the following reliability procedures: (1) check transcripts for
mistakes; (2) check the persistence of the meaning of the codes; (3) coordinate communication
among coders; and (4) cross-check codes developed by different researchers.
Other reliability control measures used included having backup copies of both recorded
interviews and transcripts. In addition, repetition of certain questions may lead to
misinterpretation of the findings, and should be clarified during and after the interviews. This
probing is also a technique of getting a deeper understanding of responses.
81
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
QUALITATIVE GENERALIZABILITY
Generalizability is a term that is not discussed often in contexts of qualitative research, since
the findings achieved from qualitative research methods are normally not intended for
generalization (Creswell, 2009). Therefore ‘qualitative generalization is a term that is used in
a limited way . . . since the intent of this form of inquiry is not to generalize findings . . .
“particularity” rather than “generalizability” is the hallmark of qualitative research’ (pp.
192–193). Generalizability can also be referred to as external validity. Threats to external validity
occur if the researcher develops inaccurate inferences from the sample and generalizes these
findings to the larger population.
1 Transcription
Transcription is the process of converting audio recorded data or handwritten field notes
obtained from interviews and observations into verbatim form (i.e. written or printed) for
easy reading. After transcription, it is necessary to organize your data into sections that are
easy to retrieve.
2 Thematic labelling
Bogdan and Biklen (1982) defined qualitative modes of analysis as ‘working with data,
organizing it, breaking it into manageable units, synthesizing it, searching for patterns,
discovering what is important and what is to be learned, and deciding what you will tell others’
(p. 145). Qualitative researchers tend to use inductive analysis of data, meaning that the critical
themes emerge out of the data. Qualitative analysis requires some creativity, for the challenge
is to place the raw data into logical, meaningful categories; to examine them in a holistic
fashion; and to find a way to communicate this interpretation to others. This process is called
thematic labelling.
3 Coding process
Coding is the process of examining the raw qualitative data in the transcripts and extracting
sections of text units (words, phrases, sentences or paragraphs) and assigning different codes
82
QUALITATIVE DATA ANALYSIS
or labels so that they can easily be retrieved at a later stage for further comparison and analysis,
and the identification of any patterns. Strauss and Corbin (1990) identified the following types
of coding: open coding and axial coding. Coding will be discussed in more detail later in this
chapter.
CODING DATA
Codes are tags that categorize the data collected during a study to assign meanings to them.
Coding is the first stage to providing some form of logical structure to the data. Coding makes
it easier to search the data, make comparisons and identify patterns that require further
investigation. Codes can be based on themes, topics, ideas, concepts, terms, phrases or
keywords found in the data, but they can also correspond to passages of audio or video
recordings and to parts of images. Codes should be valid, that is they should accurately reflect
what is being researched, where possible they should be mutually exclusive (in that codes
should be distinct, with no overlap) and they should be exhaustive, that is, all relevant data
should fit into a code.
A suggested framework for undertaking coding includes:
1 The data is carefully read, all statements relating to the research question are identified,
and each is assigned a code, or category. These codes are then noted, and each relevant
statement is organized under its appropriate code, either manually or on computer, along
with any notes or memos that the researcher wishes to add of their own. This is referred
to as open coding (Strauss and Corbin, 1990). During open coding, the researcher must
identify and tentatively name the conceptual categories into which the phenomena observed
will be grouped. The goal is to create descriptive, multidimensional categories that form
a preliminary framework for analysis. For example, when working with transcripts from
interviews on sport for development in rural communities, some open codes might include
‘raising awareness’, ‘connection’, ‘driver of change’ and ‘quality of life’. Words, phrases
or events that appear to be similar can be grouped into the same category. These categories
may be gradually modified or replaced during the subsequent stages of analysis that follow.
83
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
As the raw data are broken down into manageable chunks, the researcher must also devise
an audit trail – that is, a scheme for identifying these data chunks according to their speaker
and the context. Qualitative research is characterized by the use of ‘voice’ in the text; that
is, participant quotes that illustrate the themes being described.
2 The next stage of analysis involves re-examination of the categories identified in stage 1 to
determine how they are linked, a complex process sometimes called axial coding (Strauss
and Corbin, 1990). The discrete categories identified in open coding are compared and
combined in new ways as the researcher begins to assemble the ‘big picture’. In the sport
for development example, open codes of ‘raising awareness’ and ‘driver of change’ may
be linked through common passages in the transcripts. The purpose of coding is to not
only describe but, more importantly, to acquire new understanding of a phenomenon of
interest. Therefore, causal events contributing to the phenomenon, descriptive details of
the phenomenon itself and the ramifications of the phenomenon under study must all be
identified and explored. During axial coding the researcher is responsible for building a
conceptual model and for determining whether sufficient data exists to support that
interpretation.
3 Once the first two stages of coding have been completed, the researcher should become
more analytical, and look for patterns and explanation in the codes. Questions should be
asked such as: Can I relate certain codes together under a more general code? Can I organize
codes sequentially? Can I identify any causal relations?
4 The fourth stage is that of selective coding. This involves reading through the raw data for
cases that illustrate the analysis, or explain the concepts. The researcher should also look
for data that is contradictory, as well as confirmatory. For example, selective coding can
include finding direct quotes from participants that relate how sport first raises awareness
of a development issue through meaningful gatherings, then is a catalyst for changing that
issue by ongoing education tied to the sport events.
Lewins, Taylor and Gibbs (2005) provide a detailed list of the kinds of things that can be
coded (see Table 5.4).
MEMOING
While coding data, the researcher can aid in the maximization of the validity and reliability
of the analysis process by writing memos. These are the ideas that occur to the researcher while
coding the data, for example, concerning explanation, theorizing or other ideas about the
data. They can be extremely helpful in trying to make sense of the data at a later date. Memos
can be written directly on the transcripts, or the researcher can keep a record of them
elsewhere. Making memos as detailed as possible can help with later analysis.
Recursive abstraction
Some qualitative datasets are analysed without coding. A common method here is recursive
abstraction, where datasets are summarized, those summaries are then further summarized,
and so on. The end result is a more compact summary that would have been difficult to
accurately discern without the preceding steps of distillation.
84
QUALITATIVE DATA ANALYSIS
A frequent criticism of recursive abstraction is that the final conclusions are several times
removed from the underlying data. While it is true that poor initial summaries will certainly
yield an inaccurate final report, qualitative analysts can respond to this criticism. They do so,
like those using coding method, by documenting the reasoning behind each summary step,
citing examples from the data where statements were included and where statements were
excluded from the intermediate summary.
Mechanical techniques
Content analysis is a procedure for the categorization of verbal or behavioural data, for purposes
of classification, summarization and tabulation. The content can be analysed on two levels.
The basic level of analysis is a descriptive account of the data: this is what was actually said
with nothing read into it and nothing assumed about it, e.g. ‘I would never pay to see a
WNBA (Women’s National Basketball Association) game.’ Some texts refer to this as the
manifest level or type of analysis. The higher level of analysis is interpretative: it is concerned
with what was meant by the response, what was inferred or implied, e.g. does this participant
not like basketball? Women’s sports? Or has a preference to spend money on other
entertainment options? Additional context may be required to interpret the original statement.
It is sometimes called the latent level of analysis.
Content analysis researchers frequently rely on computers to scan and sort large sets of
qualitative data. At their most basic level, mechanical techniques rely on counting words,
phrases or coincidences of tokens within the data. Mechanical techniques are particularly well
suited for a few scenarios. One such scenario is for datasets that are simply too large for a
85
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
86
QUALITATIVE DATA ANALYSIS
Theme 1 Theme 2
Social media marketing Sponsorship
Case 1 ‘Social media has changed the way we ‘The role of sport sponsorship has
function as sport marketers.’ changed since the Tiger Woods scandal.’
Advantages
• Efficient
• Uniform
• Prestige in using computing
• Allows for focused and detailed analysis
• Facilitates rigour and transparency
• Makes qualitative data more scientific
• Time-saving
• Ability to analyse larger sets of data
• More substantive analysis
• Data analysis remains the intellectual, interpretive and creative work of the researcher
Disadvantages
• Inflexible
• Not hands-on
• Distracts from ideas, emphasizes words
• Reification of the researcher and data
• Advocates the positivist or quantitative approach
• CAQDAS should support rather than replace manual data analysis
• Segments of text are removed from the whole, thus creating a loss of perspective
• Considerable time constraint in mastering the software in order to free the researcher to
perform in-depth analyses and interpretation of the data
• CAQDAS is for coding, not analysis
87
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
CAQDAS has also been criticized for favouring the grounded theory approach (Coffey,
Holbrook and Atkinson, 1996). In the grounded theory approach the process of coding is the
fundamental task that needs to be satisfied first before any further processes can be carried
out. Table 5.8 summarizes the various approaches to analysis.
Despite ongoing debate around the advantages and disadvantages of CAQDAS, many
researchers now use CAQDAS, but often only for the purpose of coding alone, and go back
to the manual methods for the theory-building stage; thus ensuring that the benefits of
automation are reaped and its shortcomings are avoided.
CAQDAS SELECTION
Weitzman and Miles (1995) classified this software into five categories. These are: (1) text
retrievers; (2) textbase managers; (3) code and retrieve programs; (4) code-based theory
builders; and (5) conceptual network builders. Fielding and Lee (2002) later identified three
generations of CAQDAS. First generation software consisted of word processing and database
software that allowed a researcher to search for specific text strings, but did not allow for
encoding the data. Second generation software provided additional capability to encode the data,
retrieve data by those codes and add memos to the encoded text. Second generation CAQDAS
is commonly referred to as code and retrieve software. Third generation CAQDAS has added
the ability to create complex families or networks of codes to support theory building. In
most cases, third generation CAQDAS packages are represented by the latest versions of the
industry leading products such as ATLAS.ti® and are classified as code-based theory builders.
Other prominent CAQDAS products, classified as conceptual network builders, provide
88
QUALITATIVE DATA ANALYSIS
linking and graphic capabilities, but may lack coding and database management features. Third
generation CAQDAS is very complex software and a significant learning curve is necessary
for mining its full potential for qualitative research.
The CAQDAS networking project lists the following tools a CAQDAS program should
have: content searching tools; coding tools; linking tools; mapping or networking tools; query
tools; writing and annotation tools. Selection of a suitable CAQDAS package requires the
researcher to understand the purpose of the study, expected results and the available timeline
in which to perform the study. Once CAQDAS becomes applicable to a particular study or
research problem, various packages must be evaluated and an appropriate CAQDAS package
selected. Selection criteria may be different depending on the group in which a specific
qualitative researcher resides. Students and other qualitative researchers may be directed to
use a particular CAQDAS package as part of a university’s standard software application suite.
Some researchers may require more than one CAQDAS package. Training on the software
is recommended. Appropriate usage of CAQDAS can then free the researcher from the burden
of managing the raw data and allow him or her time to delve into the data and observe emergent
themes and patterns as they develop.
There are a number of well-known CAQDAS packages. Some of the packages take some
time to learn, even with specialized instruction. The sport management researcher needs to
weigh up the pros and cons of taking the time to learn such a package before deciding on a
particular approach. The software packages range in the level of sophistication, and if intending
to utilize a CAQDAS package, the sport management researcher should seek a package that
has the tools that suit the research style, rather than just the package that offers the greatest
functionality. If a sport management researcher is likely to be undertaking a considerable
amount of qualitative research over a reasonable period of time, then it may be worthwhile
learning one of the packages. On the other hand, if the researcher is engaged in a one-off
piece of research, then we would recommend manual analysis. For a comprehensive overview
and comparison of different CAQDAS packages, visit the WinMax website: www.winmax.de/
english/linkse.htm
89
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
Crofts and Bisman (2010) claim ‘a distinct advantage for the researcher in using the
concept map, rank-ordered concept lists and text query options is the ability to read instances
of specific concepts to understand their relationships with one another’ (p. 319). An example
of a concept map from research by Franklin (2012) on sponsored female surfers is provided
as an example (Figure 5.1).
90
QUALITATIVE DATA ANALYSIS
couple
time things
role time
stuff
doing
surf
sponsors
clothes
surf look
different
contest remember
sponsor
girls travel top
people
year money
world sponsored
companies
year girls
win surfing sponsorship
obviously guys surfers
events men
sponsorship
women
best
best
tour
tour
womens
SUMMARY ON CAQDAS
The final decision on using Computer Assisted Qualitative Modes of Analysis Software
(CAQDAS) is left to the confidence and expertise of the sport management researcher. If a
researcher does reject the use of CAQDAS for analysis, then it should not immediately be
assumed that the quality of analysis is inferior. Provided the mode of analysis is carried out
correctly then there should be little difference in the quality of analysis.
91
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
Source: Adapted from Braun and Clarke (2006, p. 87) and Stewart (2010, p. 38)
HYPOTHETICAL CASE
1 Read the text below: ‘Tiger Woods apology transcript’.
2 Consider the research topic: ‘Sport celebrity bad behaviour effects on stakeholders’.
3 Consider the research question: ‘How can athletes mend the relationship with sponsors
in the wake of scandal?’
4 After reading the article once, go back and open the code to identify the main actors,
themes and key relationships.
92
QUALITATIVE DATA ANALYSIS
I want to say to each of you, simply, and directly, I am deeply sorry for the irresponsible
and selfish behavior I engaged in.
I know people want to find out how I could be so selfish and so foolish. People want to
know how I could have done these things to my wife, Elin, and to my children. And while I
have always tried to be a private person, there are some things I want to say.
Elin and I have started the process of discussing the damage caused by my behavior. As
she pointed out to me, my real apology to her will not come in the form of words. It will
come from my behavior over time. We have a lot to discuss. However, what we say to each
other will remain between the two of us.
I am also aware of the pain my behavior has caused to those of you in this room. I have
let you down. I have let down my fans. For many of you, especially my friends, my behavior
has been a personal disappointment. To those of you who work for me, I have let you down,
personally and professionally. My behavior has caused considerable worry to my business
partners.
To everyone involved in my foundation, including my staff, board of directors, sponsors,
and most importantly, the young students we reach, our work is more important than ever.
Thirteen years ago, my dad and I envisioned helping young people achieve their dreams
through education. This work remains unchanged and will continue to grow. From the
Learning Center students in Southern California, to the Earl Woods Scholars in Washington,
DC, millions of kids have changed their lives, and I am dedicated to making sure that
continues.
But, still, I know I have severely disappointed all of you. I have made you question who
I am and how I have done the things I did. I am embarrassed that I have put you in this
position. For all that I have done, I am so sorry. I have a lot to atone for.
But there is one issue I really want to discuss. Some people have speculated that Elin
somehow hurt or attacked me on Thanksgiving night. It angers me that people would fabricate
a story like that. She never hit me that night or any other night. There has never been an
episode of domestic violence in our marriage. Ever.
Elin has shown enormous grace and poise throughout this ordeal. Elin deserves praise,
not blame. The issue involved here was my repeated irresponsible behavior. I was unfaithful.
I had affairs. I cheated. What I did is not acceptable. And I am the only person to blame.
I stopped living by the core values that I was taught to believe in.
I knew my actions were wrong. But I convinced myself that normal rules didn’t apply. I
never thought about who I was hurting. Instead, I thought only about myself. I ran straight
through the boundaries that a married couple should live by. I thought I could get away with
whatever I wanted to. I felt that I had worked hard my entire life and deserved to enjoy all
the temptations around me. I felt I was entitled. Thanks to money and fame, I didn’t have
far – didn’t have to go far to find them. I was wrong.
I was foolish. I don’t get to play by different rules. The same boundaries that apply to
everyone apply to me. I brought this shame on myself. I hurt my wife, my kids, my mother,
my wife’s family, my friends, my foundation, and kids all around the world who admired me.
I’ve had a lot of time to think about what I have done. My failures have made me look
at myself in a way I never wanted to before. It is now up to me to make amends. And that
93
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
starts by never repeating the mistakes I have made. It is up to me to start living a life of
integrity.
I once heard – and I believe it is true – it’s not what you achieve in life that matters, it
is what you overcome. Achievements on the golf course are only part of setting an example.
Character and decency are what really count. Parents used to point to me as a role model
for their kids. I owe all of those families a special apology. I want to say to them that I am
truly sorry.
It is hard to admit that I need help. But I do. For 45 days, from the end of December
to early February, I was in inpatient therapy, receiving guidance for the issues I’m facing.
I have a long way to go. But I’ve taken my first steps in the right direction.
As I proceed, I understand people have questions. I understand the press wants me to –
to ask me for the details of the times I was unfaithful. I understand people want to know
whether Elin and I will remain together. Please know that as far as I’m concerned, every
one of these questions and answers is a matter between Elin and me. These are issues between
a husband and a wife.
Some people have made up things that never happened. They said I used performance-
enhancing drugs. This is completely and utterly false.
Some have written things about my family. Despite the damage I have done, I still believe
it is right to shield my family from the public spotlight. They did not do these things. I did.
I have always tried to maintain a private space for my wife and children. They have been
kept separate from my sponsors, my commercial endorsements, when my children were born,
we only released photographs so they . . . so that the paparazzi could not chase them.
However, my behavior doesn’t make it right for the media to follow my two and a half-
year-old daughter to school and report the school’s location. They staked out my wife and
pursued my mom. Whatever my wrongdoings, for the sake of my family, please leave my
wife and kids alone.
I recognize I have brought this on myself. And I know above all I am the one who needs
to change. I owe it to my family to become a better person. I owe it to those closest to me
to become a better man. That is where my focus will be. I have a lot of work to do. And I
intend to dedicate myself to doing it.
Part of following this path for me is Buddhism, which my mother taught me at a young
age. People probably don’t realize it, but I was raised a Buddhist, and I actively practiced
my faith from childhood until I drifted away from it in recent years. Buddhism teaches that
a craving for things outside ourselves causes an unhappy and pointless search for security.
It teaches me to stop following every impulse and to learn restraint. Obviously, I lost track
of what I was taught.
As I move forward, I will continue to receive help because I have learned that is how
people really do change. Starting tomorrow, I will leave for more treatment and more therapy.
I would like to thank my friends at Accenture and the players in the field this week for
understanding why I am making this – these remarks today. In therapy, I have learned that
looking at – the importance of looking at my spiritual life and keeping it in balance with my
professional life. I need to regain my balance and be centered so I can save the things that
are most important to me: my marriage and my children.
94
QUALITATIVE DATA ANALYSIS
That also means relying on others for help. I have learned to seek support from my peers
in therapy, and I hope someday to return that support to others who are seeking help.
I do plan to return to golf one day. I just don’t know when that day will be. I don’t rule
out that it will be this year. When I do return, I need to make my behavior more respectful
of the game.
In recent weeks, I have received many thousands of emails, letters and phone calls from
people expressing good wishes. To everyone who has reached out to me and my family, thank
you. Your encouragement means the world to Elin and me. I want to thank the PGA Tour,
Commissioner [Tim] Finchem and the players for their patience and understanding while I
work on my private life. I look forward to seeing my fellow players on the course.
Finally, there are many people in this room and there are many people at home who
believed in me. Today, I want to ask for your help. I ask you to find room in your hearts to
one day believe in me again. Thank you.
CONCLUSION
This chapter has explained the principles and techniques that should underpin qualitative
data analysis. It began by discussing the analysis of qualitative data and an appropriate
framework that can be used in organizing that analysis. It identified two major trends in
the debate about rigour and validity in qualitative research (exclusive trend and inclusive trend).
The stages in qualitative analysis were then discussed. Finally, Computer Assisted Qualitative
Data Analysis Software (CAQDAS) and how it can assist the sport management researcher
in the modes of analysis process was discussed.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
The process of modes of analysis aims to provide the sport management researcher with the
opportunity to make sense of the data so that evidence can be obtained that can then be used
to answer the research question. With a basic understanding now of the modes of analysis
process, attempt to answer the following questions:
n What are the three types of coding, and at what stage of the coding process would
they be employed?
n Identify some advantages and disadvantages to the use of CAQDAS over completely
manual modes of analysis processes.
95
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
96
Chapter 6
LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of this chapter you should be able to:
KEY TERMS
The Action Research cycle – the steps of plan, act, observe and reflect.
Emancipatory Action Research – seeks to bring together action and reflection, theory and
practice through a participatory democratic process aimed at developing practical
solutions to issues.
Participatory Action Research – involves the participation of those who may be affected by
the outcomes of research in decision making at all stages of the research process. It
is often used for liberationist inquiry or development research with disadvantaged
communities.
KEY THEMES
n How is Action Research self-reflective?
n What are the key differences between emancipatory and participatory Action Research?
97
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter explores a key qualitative methodology that can be utilized by sport management
researchers. Action Research is cyclic, or iterative, in nature and the researcher using this
methodology will generally be working from within the organization to continually plan, act,
observe and reflect, based on the outcome of the first cycle.
Action Research originated out of innovative work within The Group Dynamics movement in
social psychology in the 1940s; and in particular by Kurt Lewin (Carr and Kemmis, 1986;
Hart and Bond, 1995).
The process begins, according to Lewin (1948), with the researcher setting down a general
idea of what he or she wants to achieve. The next step involves gathering information about
the present situation, which allows the researcher to formulate ‘an “overall plan” of how to
reach the objective, and [to make] a decision in regard to the first step of action’ (p. 205).
This stage is followed by a series of phases, each involving ‘circles’ of action, evaluation,
reflection, fact-finding, modifying the original plan and planning the next action. Lewin likens
the process to a spiral staircase, where the steps ultimately lead to achievement of the desired
outcome.
MacTaggart (1991) identified Lewin’s work as first generation Action Research, which
developed through the late 1950s in the educational sphere in America. MacTaggart discusses
how the process evolved with second generation Action Research developing within Britain
from the 1960s through to the 1980s. The third generation originated in the 1980s with a
call for a more critical basis within Australia and Europe. Finally, the fourth generation emerged
in Australia with emancipatory Action Research as the culmination of the previous three
generations. It was here that the influences of the work of the German philosopher and
sociologist Jurgen Habermas began to filter into Action Research. The fourth generation of
Action Research owes much of its origins to the previous generations.
Throughout this period Action Research has not been without its criticisms. The most
significant being the challenge of defining the term and the lack of consistent approaches. The
lack of consistent methodology enables such a wide range of interpretations to be made that
it becomes difficult to evaluate and critique the rigour of an Action Research project.
Practitioners can have difficulties applying a methodology that can be used in a number of
different ways, which poses potential problems for the practitioner and may lead to lack of
confidence in the results by those who are interested in the outcomes.
Despite these criticisms it is now generally accepted that Action Research has a number
of key features, which are outlined in Table 6.1.
Feature Explanation
Problem-aimed Research focuses on a special situation in practice. Action Research is
aimed at a specific problem recognizable in practice.
Collective All participants (for instance the researchers and persons standing in the
participation practice) form an integral part of Action Research with the exclusive aim
to assist in solving the identified problem.
Type of empirical Action Research is characterized as a means to change the practice while
research the research is going on.
Outcome of Action Research is characterized by the fact that problem solving, seen as
Action Research renewed corrective actions, cannot be generalized, because it should comply
with the criteria set for scientific character.
99
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
100
ACTION RESEARCH
Conceptualization
The first stage in the Action Research process is conceptualization, which requires that the
specific process to study is selected. Furthermore, it is important to consider what results
are expected from the process, the outcome and how the input might promote the outcome.
In this perspective, Action Research is the process of determining whether the conceptual-
ization was achieved. McLean (1995) stressed that the process of carefully considering the
input and outcome brings up a clearer understanding that leads to new ideas of how the process
can be improved.
Implementation
The stage of implementation consists of three components: measurement of the outcomes,
identifying a standard of comparison and comparing current performance with the standard
(McLean, 1995). This is the most technical phase of the Action Research process; and through
the participation of the researcher, the implementation will be smoother.
Interpretation
Interpretation is the final stage in the Action Research process (McLean, 1995). In this phase
judgements are made about the effectiveness of the observed company. Here, findings of the
implementation stage are brought together with the findings from the conceptualization stage.
Furthermore, it is during the interpretation stage that judgements can be made about the
effectiveness of the practice and whether it produces better results than the theories involved
in the topic. In order to achieve the best results possible in the interpretation stage, it is
crucial that the research effectively evaluates the implementation phase.
Despite Action Research having three clearly defined stages, sport managers, however,
can have difficulties with Action Research because as a methodology it lacks a consistency
in its approach. Applying a methodology that can be used in a number of different ways
poses potential problems that may lead to lack of confidence in the results by those who
are interested in the outcomes. Sport managers therefore need to consider a raft of issues
before embarking on an Action Research project. An overview of these issues is presented
in Table 6.3.
101
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
Table 6.3 Issues of Action Research for the sport management researcher to consider
n A project takes as its subject matter a social practice, regarding it as a strategic action
susceptible to improvement.
n The project proceeds through a spiral of cycles of planning, acting, observing and
reflecting with each of these activities being systematically and self critically
implemented and interrelated.
n The project involves those responsible for the practice in each of the moments of the
activity, widening participation in the project gradually to include others affected by
the practice and maintaining collaborative control of the process.
Two criteria appear as fundamental to Action Research: the cyclic process and the research
partnership. Noffke and Stevenson (1995) discuss the cyclical nature of Action Research:
As a research method, Action Research is cyclical, that is, it does not progress from
an initial question to the formulation of data collection, analysis and conclusion
. . . The process does not end, as with traditional notions of research, with richer
understandings of education for others to implement; rather it aids in the ongoing
process of identifying contradictions which, in turn, help to locate spaces for ethically
defensible, politically strategic action. (pp. 4–5)
Action Research also emphasizes the concept of co-researchers and stresses the notion of
partnership as fundamental to achieving more democratic research processes and realization
of practical, relevant outcomes. Research is ‘done with’ not ‘done to’ participants. The
researcher does not presume a position of power nor participate as an expert, but rather as
an equal partner in a process of discovery. Knowledge and power is balanced; the sport
researcher may have knowledge of the process but the participants have knowledge of the
setting. Changes in position may occur as participants gain more understanding of the situation
102
ACTION RESEARCH
and participate in finding solutions. Action Research calls for reflection and analysis of
knowledge and action by all participants and, consequently, has an educational function.
In the cycle of ‘plan, act, observe and reflect’ of Action Research, reflection is a key
theoretical component. From an analytic perspective the methodology endorses a reflective
analytical approach. Gall, Borg and Gall (1996) note the analysis of data within an Action
Research or critical theoretical research approach is reflective, rather than structural or
interpretive. They state that, ‘Reflective analysis is largely subjective and it is not possible to
Plan
Reflect Act
Observe
Revised plan
Reflect Act
Observe
103
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
specify standard procedures for doing this type of data analysis’ (p. 571). Furthermore critical
researchers do not view data as something that contains facts that need to be ‘discovered’ or
‘uncovered’, but rather ‘data is constructed during research, and if reflected upon is somewhat
self-validating because it grasps and reflects reality’ (Reid, 1997, p. 56). Returning to an
earlier example, Action Research for concussion prevention and treatment is not about
discovering a link between head impacts and brain damage, but rather finding amicable solutions
to how concussions are perceived and implementing policy changes in dealing with concussion
injuries.
Reason (1990) describes a cycle or loop of reflective analysis as ‘moving to and fro
between reflection and experience’ (p. 45). This he suggests can be individually based, where
each person operates individually and reflects upon their individual experiences, with ideally
a group reflection at the very beginning or very end. Alternatively, it can be collective, where
the researcher and participants ‘always reflect together; and they always experience
together . . . interacting as a group . . . What is essential here is to ensure that each person
has a say in the reflective phase and is fully involved in the experience phase’(p. 45).
Reason (1990) suggests that the balance between reflection and experience be seen as critical
in relation to validity. Too much experience will result in a ‘supersaturated inquiry’ or too
much reflection can result in ‘intellectual excess’ (p. 48). After each experience phase, Reason
(1990) suggests three lines of thought for reflection: the descriptive, the evaluative, and the
practical. In the descriptive phase, the researcher describes ‘what went on, framing lucid
descriptions. When evaluating, they are judging how sound and well founded these descriptions
are; that is, how well they cohere with the recollected, presented content of the experience
phase’ (p. 49). The practical phase entails – in light of the description and evaluation – ‘what
sort of content to explore in the next experience phase’ (p. 50).
Streubert and Carpenter (1999, pp. 266–267) utilized five steps in the Action Research
process. These steps include planning, action, evaluation, reflection and conclusions. Within
each step are a number of stages the researcher must follow; these are identified below.
1 Planning
i) describe the procedures for selecting participants;
ii) describe the extent of collaboration between researchers and participants during
the analysis phase;
iii) describe strategies for data analysis;
iv) involve participants in the interpretation;
v) description should reflect understanding of the educational situation;
vi) action planning;
vii) describe the planned change in detail;
viii) describe the change implementation methods;
ix) describe the method to evaluate the planned change;
x) all participants should be included in the action planning.
2 Action
i) implement the change in the practice setting where the problem occurred;
ii) specify the implementation period.
104
ACTION RESEARCH
3 Reflection
i) specify methods for facilitating reflection;
ii) describe the results of reflection.
4 Evaluation
i) describe the strategies for evaluating the change;
ii) evaluate the process for implementing the change and the outcomes of the
change;
iii) evaluate the data evaluation methods for appropriateness to factors evaluated;
iv) include participants in the evaluation;
v) address the validity and reliability of quantitative findings and the trustworthiness
of qualitative findings.
5 Conclusions, implications and recommendations
i) conclusions must reflect the findings;
ii) formulate theory from the findings;
iii) describe findings in sufficient detail;
iv) discuss ethical and moral implications;
v) include recommendations for research, education and practice;
vi) describe the benefits participants gain from the study.
An alternative model of Action Research is provided by Dick (2000) who prefers the simple
approach of action, critical reflection, action, critical reflection. For Dick, these are the essential
features of Action Research. The reflection consists of a review of what has happened so far
and deliberate planning for what will be done next. These cycles occur over a variety of time
spans, ranging from entire programmes and beyond, down to moment-by-moment action.
Dick (2000) emphasizes that there are ‘cycles within cycles within cycles’. While the full
range of Action Research models cannot be discussed in detail here, those developed by Lewin
(1948), Greenwood and Levin (1998) and Gummesson (2000) are frequently referenced and
provide representative examples of different approaches.
n observing protocol;
n involving participants;
n negotiating with those affected;
n reporting progress;
n obtaining explicit authorization before observation starts;
n obtaining explicit authorization before files or data are examined;
n negotiating descriptions and others’ point of view;
n obtaining explicit authorization before using quotations;
105
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
They also offer a range of observations in getting started in Action Research, including:
Research on fair athlete recruiting practices in the NCAA, the researcher may need access to
private information on scouting at several institutions; and, if any foul play was occurring
then that information might be even more difficult to access. Second, the researcher’s abilities,
identities, theoretical orientations, demographics and other personal factors can influence the
research process. This includes the researcher’s prior knowledge of the group members and
degree of comfort with the people. Third, field researchers’ roles may be affected by changes
in the setting itself during the research period, including changes to group membership. Finally,
researchers may undergo changes within themselves and therefore seek out new ways of
collecting data (Adler and Adler, 1987).
There are also criticisms because a rigid methodology for Action Research does not exist.
Each unique setting or organization requires a unique research method utilizing the researchers
interpersonal and communication skills rather than a strict operationalized format. Other
common criticisms are outlined in Table 6.4.
representation of what was studied; second, how the researcher challenged and tested his or
her own assumptions and interpretations of what was happening continuously through the
project, by means of content, process and premise reflection; third, how the researcher
accessed different views of what was happening, which may have produced confirming and
contradictory interpretations; and fourth, how the researcher’s interpretations and diagnoses
are grounded in scholarly theory and rigorously applied.
This perspective is supported by Dick (2000) who also acknowledges that it is the balance
between critical reflection and flexibility that allows adequate rigour in Action Research to
be achieved. Dick (2000) emphasizes that the most important source of rigour in research,
including Action Research, is the vigorous and continuous search for disconfirming evidence.
If an Action Research project is attempting to shift physical education pedagogy from a
competitive sport platform to a theoretically ‘ideal’ participatory fitness platform, then the
researchers (including the participants) should actively seek evidence that supports the
competitive platform as ideal. Dick (2002) explains that there are several features of Action
Research that allow it to pursue rigorous understanding. First, there is the involvement of
all interested parties to provide more information about a situation. The information in the
physical education pedagogy study might come from parents, students, educators, policy
makers and academics, and no group should be treated with less regard than another. Second,
the critical reflection in each cycle provides many chances to correct errors, especially when
there are cycles within cycles. It should occur after initial interviews and conversations with
each group, during and after test cycles of both competitive sport and participatory fitness
platforms, and as a whole during the analysis of those tests. Third, within each cycle the
assumptions underlying the plans are tested in action, which adds to the achievement of rigour.
These cycles allow further opportunities to seek out disconfirming evidence. Dick (2014)
summarizes by stating that:
Reason and Bradbury (2001) have identified five choice points for assessing the rigour of
an Action Research. They are:
It should be noted however that Reason and Bradbury (2001) acknowledge that a given Action
Research project cannot address all these points.
Waterman, Tillen, Dickson and De Konig (2001) further suggest that Action Research
needs to be judged according to its own terms: participatory work, aimed at change, and
movement between reflection, action and evaluation. Badger (2000) claims that Action
Research is not amenable to critique by the strategies used for other methodologies. He
explains: ‘the design of Action Research is led by the research problem rather than the
requirements of a particular methodology, and may be affected by the dynamics of the situation
itself’ (p. 201).
Action Research seeks to construct an understanding of a dynamic, complex social world,
situation or agency and, being essentially qualitative and naturalistic, it reveals subjective
experiences of the participants and how they assess meaning in their world or situation. Taking
a set of criteria proposed by Lincoln and Guba (1985), Stringer and Genat (2004) suggest
validity is demonstrated through trustworthiness and is established by attaining credibility,
transferability, dependability and confirmability. Stringer and Genat (2004) view validity as
a question of quality and address issues of validity when they say: ‘the truths emerging from
naturalistic inquiry are always contingent (i.e. they are “true” only for the people, the time
and setting of that particular study). We are not looking for “the truth” or “the causes”, but
“truths-in-context”’ (p. 49).
They go on to explain that there are no objective measures of validity, so the underlying
issue is trustworthiness, ‘the extent to which we can trust the truthfulness or adequacy of a
research project’ (p. 50).
Coghlan and Brannick (2001, p. 10) have said that Action Research is evaluated within its
own frame of reference and that questions of reliability, replicability and universality do not
pertain to the Action Research approach. For them, an Action Researcher should be able to
answer three questions:
Table 6.5 looks at how the researcher determines the level of validity in their findings.
112
ACTION RESEARCH
An action research inquiry into the Saanich initiative: Leisure involvement for
everyone. Clarke, D. L. (2008). Unpublished doctoral thesis, Royal Roads University
(Canada). MR69171
The Leisure Involvement For Everyone (LIFE) initiative was created to assist the
economically disadvantaged residents of the Municipality of Saanich, British Columbia in
benefiting from recreation programmes and services. Through the principles of Action
Research, this project reviews LIFE and its current effectiveness and subsequently
recommends modifications to improve the success as defined by stakeholders. The data
analysis illustrates that there are currently many best practices, however looking to the future,
a number of recommendations are made. These include defining and measuring success,
considering new eligibility requirements, temporarily screening applicants, creating more
flexibility within the programme, increased marketing, programming changes, streamlining
of the application process and developing new ways to support staff.
113
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
HYPOTHETICAL CASE
Upon observing the media’s perception and promotion of women in sport, a researcher was
inspired to conduct a brief study on the public’s perceptions of women’s sports. She surveyed
a random sample to discover how many people watch women’s sport and why. She also looked
at secondary data for participation rates, revenues and expenses of men’s and women’s sports.
After interpreting the data, she noted a need to change these key areas:
How would you design an Action Research project based on all or some these initial
observations?
Which people or groups of people would you seek to participate in the study?
What outcomes would you expect?
What are some ways you might implement these outcomes?
How would you evaluate the results?
How would you know if the study was a success?
CONCLUSION
Conducting Action Research within a sport management organization can be seen as
problematic in relation to issues around conflict of interest, ethical considerations and the
positioning of the researcher in relation to membership of the organization. Despite this, there
is evidence to suggest that Action Research, by dealing with the realities of practice, is more
likely to represent the ‘truth’ as compared to other research methods. The emancipatory and
participatory models of Action Research would seem particularly applicable to the sport
management field.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
With a general understanding now of the emancipatory and participatory models of Action
Research:
115
Chapter 7
LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of this chapter you should be able to:
KEY TERMS
Case study – an empirical inquiry that investigates a contemporary phenomenon within its
real-life context.
KEY THEMES
n Do case studies have any practical relevance to Sport Management Research?
CHAPTER OVERVIEW
The case study method is the investigation of a phenomenon in its real-world context using
multiple empirical methods (Yin, 2003). Case studies are highly contextual in that they cover
a specific time period of the phenomenon and involve a small number of participants.
Researchers have typically used the case study method to analyse how and why particular
116
WHAT IS CASE STUDY RESEARCH?
events unfold or to compare how similar groups were impacted by a particular change. The
rationale behind using the case study method is that it allows the researcher to delve into a
real-life context and produce a rich description from which to understand the situation –
which then allows for the opportunity to build theory.
Case studies may be utilized for qualitative, quantitative and mixed methods research. This
chapter will focus on the application of case study to qualitative research, and in particular,
Sport Management Research.
1 To explain: (a) the causal links in real-life interventions that were too complex for the
survey or experimental strategies; and (b) the particular case at hand with the
possibility of coming to broader conclusions.
2 To describe the real-life context in which an intervention had occurred.
3 To evaluate an intervention in a descriptive case study.
4 To explore those situations where the intervention being evaluated has no clear, single
set of outcomes.
and seeks to use methods and analysis appropriate to that situation is highly applicable. In
sport management as a researcher you would use case study as a methodology as it allows
the researcher to provide a description of the complex environment within sport organizations
and an understanding of social phenomena and real-life events that occur.
Yin (1984) employs the terms exploratory, descriptive and explanatory. The similarities of
the terms may be grouped thus: intrinsic and descriptive; instrumental, interpretive and explanatory;
and exploratory and evaluative.
In essence, descriptive and intrinsic case studies describe in detail a particular case without
forming hypotheses, making judgements or pitting against a theory. As stated by Stake
(1995): ‘the study is undertaken because one wants better understanding of this particular
case . . . not because the case represents other cases . . . but because, in all its particularity
and ordinariness, this case itself is of interest’ (p. 88).
The descriptive case study can provide a basis for future comparison and theory building
but it is not the primary reason for the study, the narrative account is.
This case study’s purpose was to describe an intercollegiate athletic department’s risk
assessment policies and procedures, with the intent to demonstrate the effects on compliance
outcomes. The research utilized interview and document data, and concluded that the risk
assessment was successful and could be modelled at other institutions to protect against
NCAA compliance issues.
118
WHAT IS CASE STUDY RESEARCH?
Instrumental, interpretive or explanatory case studies are more about interpreting or theorizing
about the phenomenon (Merriam, 1988). The interpretive, explanatory or instrumental case
study is more likely to look at the ‘why’ question and contain a far greater level of analysis
and conceptualization than a descriptive case study.
More than basketball: Determining the sport components that lead to long-term
benefits for African-American girls. Olushola, J. O., Jones, D. F., Dixon, M. A.,
and Green, B. C. (2012). Sport Management Review, 16(2), 211–25.
This interpretive case study was conducted to examine a sport for development programme
targeted at African-American girls. The results were interpreted that sport was a vehicle in
increasing the educational attainment of the study participants.
Evaluative case studies, according to Merriam (1988), involve ‘description, explanation and
judgment’ (p. 28). Although Yin (1994) does not ascribe evaluation as a specific type of case
study, he does state the value and place of case study in evaluative research because case studies
can explain, describe, illustrate and explore to form judgements about a programme, event
or intervention.
This case study evaluated the impact of a physical education professional development
programme aimed at primary school teachers. The programme was found to have a positive
effect on the perceptions of physical education by the teachers, however had limited impact
beyond perceptions.
119
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
This is in accordance with Yin’s (1989, 1993) thinking, which confirms the importance that
the research question plays in the overall design of the research. However, what about the
role of a developed theory or the lack of one, within the research design?
While Eisenhardt (1989) is not wholly in favour of developing a theory prior to the data
collection phase, Yin (1989) argues that: ‘theory development prior to the collection of any
case study data is an essential step in doing case studies’ (p. 36). Yin highlights a number of
steps in the process, including: (1) developing a theory from the reviewed literature;
121
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
(2) defining the relationship between the variables within the theory; (3) defining the units
of analysis; (4) the process of analysis; and (5) the criteria for interpreting the findings
(pp. 33–35).
122
WHAT IS CASE STUDY RESEARCH?
Another typology of case studies is presented in Table 7.3, based upon the work of Roche
(1999) and Patton (1990).
The following sections outline the processes involved in conducting case study.
n an overview of the case study project (project, substantive issues, relevant reading);
n field procedures (how to gain access to interviewees, planning for sufficient resources,
providing for unanticipated events etc.);
n case study questions (about individuals, multiple cases, entire study, normative
questions about policy recommendations and conclusions).
123
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
n The first relates to the research questions, which are most likely to be ‘how’ and ‘why’
questions. For example, why are there not more women on boards of national sport
organizations?
n The second relates to the unit of analysis, which could be an individual, a group of
individuals, or an organization. Are you studying the effects of adding a woman on the
board? The woman herself? The governing body? An entire league?
n The third relates to linking the data collected with the research questions. Will the
interview questions actually answer your research questions? Will interviewing players
offer answers to why women are not equally represented on boards?
n The fourth relates to the interpretation of findings. A useful technique is ‘pattern-
matching’ where data collected from the case may be related to some theoretical
proposition. Will your findings corroborate or detract from gender equality theories?
How can those theories help to interpret your findings?
The following research process is based upon the steps recommended by Tellis (1997).
RESEARCH QUESTIONS
1 Propositions if any
2 Unit(s) of analysis
– If your questions do not lead to the favoring of one unit of analysis over another,
your questions are probably either too vague or numerous
– To compare findings – definitions should not be too idiosyncratic
– Do not consider closure permanent
– Technique: discuss with colleague
3 Logic linking data to propositions
– Currently there is no precise way of setting the criteria for interpretation
4 Criteria for quality
Yin (2003, 22–27)
124
WHAT IS CASE STUDY RESEARCH?
will be designed, conducted and publicly reported. Research does not occur in a vacuum and
it is the responsibility of the researcher to connect the research question to political, social,
historical and personal issues.
Step 2 Select the cases and determine data gathering and analysis
techniques
a) Selection of cases
The objective of case studies and qualitative research is not to be statistically representative
in the manner of the formal random samples typical of quantitative studies. Alternatively,
case studies ‘draw a purposive sample, building in variety and acknowledging opportunities
for intensive study’ (Stake 2000, p. 446). Purposive sampling, or criterion-based selection
(Maxwell 1996; Ritchie, Lewis and Elam 2003), bases the selection of study settings and
participants on features and characteristics that will enable the researcher to gather in-depth
information on the areas of research interest. This form of sampling is therefore purposeful
and strategic (Maxwell 1996), with considerations of convenience and ease of access to study
situations and participants given only secondary importance.
Researchers need to decide whether to:
n interviews: the interview is an important technique for data collection and there are
two forms of interview: closed or structured interviews and open-ended interviews.
Open-ended interviews allow subjects to express themselves more freely and provide
insight into events;
n observations: this could be direct observation of events and behaviours as well as
participant-observation where the researcher is an active participant in the events
being studied;
125
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
Tellis (1997) indicates that the researcher must make sure the data gathering tools are used
systematically and properly to ensure:
n construct validity
n internal validity
n external validity
n reliability.
The use of the terms validity and reliability is deemed by some researchers to be inappropriate
in case study research in the qualitative paradigm (Sandelowski, 1996; Bergen and While,
2000). Other researchers have attempted to overcome this criticism of case study as illustrated
in Tables 7.4 and 7.5:
126
WHAT IS CASE STUDY RESEARCH?
Based on field notes the researcher may be able to identify patterns emerging or, alternatively,
may need to reformulate or redefine the data collection strategy.
127
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
This process, although conducted independently, involves four steps. These are:
Step 1 The sport management researcher must immerse themselves in the data for the
case (interviews and journals) through numerous readings.
Step 2 The sport management researcher must commence data reduction through coding
emerging themes.
Step 3 Once the data is coded, the sport management researcher begins data
interpretation.
Step 4 Once all case studies are analysed and written up, they are then compared by the
sport management researcher for similarities and differences.
128
WHAT IS CASE STUDY RESEARCH?
Step 2: Select the cases and determine data gathering and analysis techniques
129
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
Table 7.6 Advantages and disadvantages of case studies for sport management researchers
Advantages
A single or small number of cases allows the sport management researcher to capture in-depth
understanding of a sport environment.
A diversity of data collection methods can be utilized to understand the complexities of the
sport environment.
The boundaries of the research such as time and context can be controlled by the sport
management researcher to gain a full understanding of the sport situation.
Greater research flexibility allows the sport management researcher to choose from a range of
research approaches.
The sport management researcher may use case study for a variety of purposes and for different
cases.
The results of a case study investigation can inform theory development in sport management.
Disadvantages
It can result in overly complex theories.
It can be difficult to ensure external validity.
It can be difficult to conduct, effectively and efficiently.
No single approach can be deemed sufficient for the development of a sound theory.
The high risk of researcher bias.
130
WHAT IS CASE STUDY RESEARCH?
1 Rigour
Case studies do not use standard methodologies; hence, they lack rigour.
Case studies use multiple sources of data collection such as observation, interviews,
archives and quantitative data. This ensures triangulation and provides stronger substantiation
of constructs and hypotheses (Eisenhardt, 1989).
2 Generalizability
Case studies are subjective, lack rigour and are not capable of arriving at generalization.
An investigator’s goal is to expand and generalize theories (analytic) and not to enumerate
frequencies (statistical) (Yin, 1984). For case studies generalizability is determined by the
strength of the description of the context. It is argued by other case study researchers that
generalization is a redundant concept for case study research and analysis is based on the
‘categorical aggregation of instances’ (Bergen and While, 2000). More is learned about the
‘particular’ and the interpretation of these particulars is through an analytical generalization.
3 Data overload
Case study involves collection of data from several sources. Thus, it accumulates a massive amount of
data. The researcher has to analyse this massive amount of data. Case research is time consuming and
may result in documentation overload.
Multiple data collection and analysis is the strength of case research as it helps in
understanding complex phenomena in their context. Case researchers always develop a
strategy of time management and documentation overload.
131
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
This article reports on 11 narrative-based case histories that sought to: (1) uncover the
attitudes of players and athletes to drugs in sport, and (2) explore contextual factors
influencing the formation of those attitudes as informed by social ecology theory.
CONCLUSION
The aim of case study research is generalizing to theoretical propositions but not to populations.
Sport management case studies may be epistemologically in harmony with experiences of
others, and a natural basis for generalization. Although the case study method is valuable to
sport management it is infrequently used as a method in Sport Management Research.
Encouragement for its use in Sport Management Research as a method is given in order to
investigate the day-to-day observations and interventions that constitute sport management
practice. The benefits of using case study include: the research can be conducted in the natural
setting, and because of this it is grounded or embedded and this allows for rich description
(Woods, 1997; Yin, 2003). Case study as a research method can and does provide rich narrative
data gathered by a variety of both qualitative and quantitative methods. Bounding or defining
the case strengthens the methodology, design and validity. Inherent in the characteristics of
case study is the sport management researchers’ depth of interest and focus on the specificity
or uniqueness of the case. This makes possible or allows for a detailed study of all aspects of
an individual case or cases.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
Case study as a method can be used to investigate the day-to-day observations and interventions
that constitute sport management practice. With this in mind:
132
WHAT IS CASE STUDY RESEARCH?
Merriam, S. B. (1988). Case study research in education: A qualitative approach. San Francisco,
CA: Jossey-Bass.
Ritchie, J., Lewis, J., and Elam, G. (2003). Designing and selecting samples. In J. Ritchie and J.
Lewis (eds), Qualitative research practice: A guide for social sciences students and researchers.
London: Sage.
Yin, R. K. (2003). Case study research, design and methods (3rd edn). Newbury Park, CA: Sage.
Yin, R. K. (2011). Applications of case study research (3rd edn). Newbury Park, CA: Sage.
133
Chapter 8
LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of this chapter, you should be able to:
KEY TERMS
Deconstruction – ‘involves the attempt to take apart and expose the underlying meanings,
biases, and preconceptions that structure the way a text conceptualizes its relation to
what it describes’ (Denzin, 1994, p. 185).
KEY THEMES
n Can deconstruction be used as a research methodology in Sport Management Research?
n What is deconstruction?
CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter explores Jacques Derrida’s strategy of deconstruction as a way of understanding
and critiquing sport management theory and practice. Deconstruction looks primarily at
existing literature as opposed to direct interaction with an organization. Deconstruction seeks
134
DECONSTRUCTION
to locate and identify multiple interpretations within texts and to then dislocate the dominant
discourse by examining the language and structure of the text – by what has been selected,
and not selected, to create the structure.
WHAT IS DECONSTRUCTION?
According to Saukko (2003) deconstruction is a theoretical perspective, a methodology and
a method. Deconstructionism is closely associated with the work of Jacques Derrida. Derrida’s
work demonstrates a constant critical interrogation of texts. As Denzin (1994) asserted,
deconstruction ‘involves the attempt to take apart and expose the underlying meanings, biases,
and preconceptions that structure the way a text conceptualizes its relation to what it
describes’ (p. 185).
Deconstruction is often associated with postmodernism. We argue that it is useful and
relevant as a way of challenging the dominant paradigm of any discipline, including sport
management. Because deconstruction is notoriously difficult to define, we offer a number of
examples of deconstruction in action.
Deconstructionist features include: (1) close reading of text to demonstrate that any given
text has irreconcilably contradictory meanings rather than a unified, logical whole; (2) the
aim of deconstruction is to criticize Western logic but it arose as a response to structuralism and
formalism; (3) seeing text as more radically heterogeneous than in a formalist way; (4) seeing
works in terms of their undesirability; (5) regarding language as a fundamentally unstable medium;
(6) the text is based only on the author’s intentions; and (7) language and logic always being
ruled by hierarchical oppositions.
In sport management deconstruction can facilitate further scholarly discussion by challenging
the legitimacy and validity of those precepts and ideas generally accepted within the sport
management academic community to be irrefutable. Think about Western culture’s
generalizable assumptions about women as sport fans and compare that to men as sport fans.
In practice and in academia, sport managers and/or sport management researchers often use
these stereotypes when exploring fan affiliation. These inherent attitudes and assumptions
can be isolated and inferred using deconstructionist methodologies.
DEFINING DECONSTRUCTION
One of the difficulties that many have with deconstruction is its unwillingness to be pinned
down and precisely defined. We can see its elusive nature in Derrida’s (1996) constant refusal
to offer a definition: ‘Deconstruction doesn’t consist in a set of theorems, axioms, tools,
rules, techniques, methods . . . There is no deconstruction, deconstruction has no specific
object’ (p. 218). Deconstruction challenges an author’s attempt to privilege a theory,
technique or model as a superior way to arrive at closure around knowledge. For example,
deconstructing institutionalism (a common organizational change theory used in Sport
Management Research) may reveal major limitations with an author’s attempt to explain a
national sport organization’s response to change in board members, thus finding that
institutionalism cannot explain the actions of the board to the extent the author argues.
Thus, deconstruction particularly holds nothing sacred, seeks to question every assumption
135
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
and presupposition offered under the rubric of ‘knowledge’, and, most importantly, challenges
any author[ity]’s claim to a ‘method’ of knowledge production that is privileged over
others.
As a method, however, it is not without its advantages and disadvantages. These are outlined
in Table 8.1.
136
DECONSTRUCTION
Advantages
• Subverts the privileged position of positivist theory
• Holds theory intellectually accountable
• Makes clear the fact that knowledge production is always a political act
• Examines silences – what is not said
Disadvantages
• Accusation of nihilism
• Derrida refuses to characterize deconstruction as a method
• Lack of definition
• Not a method of analysis
Interpreting policy language and managing organizational change: The case of the
Queensland Rugby Union. Skinner, J., Stewart, B., and Edwards, A. (2004).
European Sport Management Quarterly, 4(2), 77–94.
This article uses Derrida’s (1976, 1978, 1981, 1982) postmodern theories of deconstruction
and ‘differance’ to analyse organizational change in Queensland Rugby Union (QRU) during
the 1990s. Specifically, it aims to examine the ways in which internal policy and planning
documents produced by QRU were formulated, and subsequently interpreted by the many
volunteer officials at the local and community level. Derrida’s constructs provided a framework
within which to explain the potential for policy and planning documents to produce fragmented
organizational outcomes. This approach to the interpretation of texts proved a valuable tool
for exploring the paradoxes, biases and contradictions in social and organizational behaviour.
Data was collected through semi-structured interviews with individuals at differing functional
levels within the QRU hierarchy. The interview data was supplemented by content analysis
of policy and planning documents developed by the QRU. The results showed that policy and
planning documents were not only interpreted differently at the different functional levels
of the QRU, but when used to guide change, often met resistance that was not anticipated.
The ambiguity of these documents therefore complicated the organizational change process
because organizational sub-units frequently gave meanings to the text that were not intended
by senior management.
137
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
In his thesis Mandlis uses discourse analysis and specific Derridian deconstructive ideas to
examine different aspects of the representation of boxing and boxers. This study is an example
of the application of deconstruction to the study of sport. By extrapolation it demonstrates
one application of deconstruction to the field of Sport Management Research.
138
DECONSTRUCTION
White Black
Wealthy, privileged upbringing Poor, unprivileged upbringing
Well coached Genetically gifted
Educated Uneducated
Obedient Wayward
Leader Workhorse
As an introductory exercise into deconstruction, think about and discuss these questions:
1 Would you fit neatly into these categories? What about your friends and family?
2 Which side tends to be more glorified in our culture? Why?
3 Where do you see faults in these stereotypes?
CONCLUSION
By introducing deconstruction to sport management it is possible to subvert the pretensions
of positive theory as a theory of knowledge production. Therefore, by supporting
deconstruction it is possible to hold positive theory intellectually accountable and to make
clear the fact that knowledge production is always shaped by political, ontological and
epistemological assumptions. The challenge of deconstruction as a research approach is that
no one narrative is considered dominant or superior over another. As such, deconstruction is
often viewed as more a form of critique than of conclusive analysis.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
Deconstruction seeks to locate and identify multiple interpretations within text that challenge
meaning and identity. With a basic understanding now of deconstruction as an alternative to
the more traditional methodologies associated with Sport Management Research, attempt to
answer the following question:
139
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
140
Chapter 9
LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of this chapter, you should be able to:
KEY TERMS
Discourse – refers to the attitudes, rules, ‘ways of being’, actions and language used to
construct a particular knowledge. Language, power and knowledge are joined. Discourse
ultimately serves to control not just what a subject/phenomenon is but how they are
constructed.
Discursive practices – discursive practices are the translation of discourses into social action;
they are the enactment of discourse.
Ethnomethodology – a form of discourse analysis that aims to study, understand and
articulate how people make sense of themselves and each other in everyday life.
141
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
KEY THEMES
n Can discourse analysis be used as a research methodology in Sport Management
Research?
n What is ‘discourse’, ‘discourse analysis’ and ‘critical discourse analysis’?
n What is ethnomethodology?
n What are some of the implications of applying the analytic tools of conversation analysis
and member categorization devices to Sport Management Research?
CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter explores discourse, discourse analysis, critical discourse analysis, ethnomethod-
ology and how these can be applied to the field of Sport Management Research in useful and
practical ways that can facilitate the development of practices that enhance sport management.
142
DISCOURSE ANALYSIS AND ETHNOMETHODOLOGY
• Accusations of moral nihilism: unethical acts are dismissed as having no material reality.
• Countered by argument that discourse analysis does not deny material reality, but focuses on
the way our understandings of such practices are constructed through discourse.
• Voicing concerns for groups who do not consider themselves to be oppressed or
disadvantaged.
• Subversion of oppressive discourses may lead to alternative suppressive discourses for other
social groups.
• Difficulty of identifying interpretative repertoires when research is not independent of
linguistic resources needed to construct discourse.
Third, the means of bringing power relations into being that reveals surveillance systems,
threats and dismissals – a recent example could be ESPN’s influence in the collegiate sports
conference realignment in the USA, as colleges were under threat of losing media coverage
depending on what conference they participate in. Fourth, ‘forms of institutionalization’ such
as the bureaucratic structures ESPN engages sports properties in, pressuring textual conformity
to ESPN’s agenda. Finally, the degree of rationalization required to support power
arrangements. As more sports are contracted to the ESPN network, sport governing bodies
tend to rationalize that they need to be on ESPN in order to attain the desired coverage.
The process of a Foucaultian style discourse analysis involves careful reading of entire bodies
of text and other organizing systems (such as taxonomies, commentaries and conference
transcriptions) in relation to one another, in order to interpret patterns, rules, assumptions,
contradictions, silences, consequences, implications and inconsistencies. The product of a
discourse analysis shows how discourses are constructed, circulated and played out. Discourse
analysis includes a focus on oppression and also identifies potential discourses of resistance
through which people may construct subject positions that challenge the dominant discourses.
Discourse analysis may involve identification of several related discourses available to people
in a given social context at a given time.
Edwards and Skinner (2009) suggested that the potential contribution of a Foucaultian
style discourse analysis to the discipline of sport management is twofold: first, discourse analysis
would provide an approach suitable for addressing such notions as the taken-for-granted nature
of specific sport management practices; the history of sport management practices; the vested
interest of authorized voices; the rules of evidence used to formulate and structure discussions;
the rules of evidence used to produce explanations and the rules of which topics are dismissed
from inquiry. Second, from Foucault’s perspective, all discourses are merely perspectives.
The aim of Foucaultian analysis is to examine the legitimacy of claims to truth by such groups
as policy makers, editorial boards and researchers. Foucaultian discourse analysis constantly
asks questions about how and why knowledge is constructed and by whom. From this
perspective all sport management knowledge is under constant scrutiny. There are no absolute
truths that are above or exempt from examination.
discourse analysis that aims to systematically explore the often opaque relationships
of causality and determination between (a) discursive practices, events, and texts,
and (b) wider social and cultural structures, relations and processes; to investigate
how such practices, events and texts arise out of and are ideologically shaped by
relations of power and struggles over power; and to explore how the opacity of
these relationships between discourse and society is itself a factor in securing power
and hegemony (p. 135).
The theoretical underpinnings of CDA bring together a wide variety of critical social theories,
the Frankfurt school and other neo-Marxist scholars (Blommaert and Bulcaen, 2000).
144
DISCOURSE ANALYSIS AND ETHNOMETHODOLOGY
Collectively, these theories have influenced many facets of CDA including the way power is
conceptualized. Fairclough’s (1993) model focuses on discourse as text. It is centred on the
pivotal point that text is a concrete manifestation of discourse. Given this focus, Fairclough
analyses structural and stylistic aspects within documents (e.g. paragraphs, sentences, phrases,
clauses, grammar, speech acts and vocabulary) and their interactions and ties these discursive
constructions (or elements of orders of discourse) to social relations. Figure 9.1 provides an
overview of these aspects.
Fairclough (1992) believes there are three dimensions to a discursive event: ‘(1) it is spoken
or written language text, (2) it is an interaction between people involving processes of producing
and interpreting the text (discursive practice), and (3) it is part of a piece of social action (social
practice)’ (p. 10, emphasis in original). As such, he believes there should be three dimensions
to CDA ‘(1) description of the text, (2) interpretation of the interaction processes and their
relationship to the text, and (3) explanation of how the interaction process relates to the social
action’ (Fairclough, 1992, p. 11, emphasis in original).
The description dimension consists of examining the organization of the text, its structure
and vocabulary while ‘framing’ the language of the text within the other dimensions of the
analysis (since one cannot separate description and interpretation).
The aim in the interpretation dimension is to give a moment-by-moment analysis of how
the participants produce and interpret the texts by specifying the discursive practices that are
CDA
Analysis of
Textual analysis
social context
Linguistic Intertextual
analysis analysis
Macro-/micro-
level analysis
145
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
being used and in which combinations. This process relates the discourse event to the order
of discourse used.
The aim in the explanation dimension is to explain the properties of the interaction by
referring to its social context and assessing its contribution to social action (its effectiveness
in constituting or helping to reconstitute different dimensions of the social in the interpretation
phase). In this social action dimension, Fairclough’s (1993) focus is political and ideological:
political in that it establishes, sustains and changes power relations and ideological in that it
constitutes, naturalizes, sustains and changes significations of the world. The two are not
independent of each other ‘for ideology is significations generated within power relations as
a dimension of the exercise of power and struggle over power’ (Fairclough, 1993, p. 67). In
sum, he focuses on the discursive event within relations of power and domination. For a
summary of Fairclough’s three-dimensional analysis see Table 9.2.
1 Description of the text: examine the organization of the text, its structure and
vocabulary.
• Vocabulary – individual words
• Grammar – words combined into clauses and sentences
• Cohesion – how clauses and sentences are linked together
• Text structure – large scale organizational properties of texts
• Force of utterances – types of speech acts used (promise, request, threat)
• Coherence of texts – connections based on ideological assumptions
• Intertextuality – connections to other texts, may be explicit or implicit
2 Interpretation of the interaction processes and their relationship to the text: give a
moment-by-moment analysis of how the participants produce and interpret the texts by
specifying the discursive practices that are being used and in which combinations.
• Who is the producer (the animator, author and/or principal) of the text?
• What are the social constraints as to how it is produced?
• What aspects of members’ resources are used to understand the text?
3 Explanation of how the interaction process relates to the social action: explain the
properties of the interaction by referring to its social context and assess its contribution
to social action (its effectiveness in constituting or helping to reconstitute different
dimensions of the social in the interpretation phase).
• Ideology – how the text constitutes, naturalizes, sustains and changes significations of
the world
• Hegemony – the implicit practices that become naturalized or automated, and expose
the constant struggle
• Political – how the text establishes, sustains and changes power relations
146
DISCOURSE ANALYSIS AND ETHNOMETHODOLOGY
Strengths
• Links discourse to material relations
• It is political; it focuses on power relations
• Reveals the impact on social relations, not the ‘truth’
• Does not grant privileged status to the content of a discourse
Weaknesses
• Not specific enough in explaining how people reconcile contradictions by creating new
discourses
• Critical research projects develop a social critique without developing a theory of action that
people can draw upon to develop ‘counter-hegemonic’ practices in which dominant structures
can be challenged
Fairclough’s (1995) CDA is based on the premise that power operates through discourse
to structure social relations. This method analyses how stylistic properties of the text are
linked to material relations. For example, the method assists in examining how the
communications and organizational documents from an international sports federation
contribute to the power relationship with national sports federations. In this way, critical
discourse analysis moves beyond the content of a text to examine the effect of discourse on
reality. By firmly centring the analysis of discourse within the field of political action, CDA
does not reduce its analysis to ‘merely the markings of textuality’, but also examines the
physicality of its effects in the materiality of its practices (Foucault, 1981, p. 66; as cited in
Hook, 2001, p. 537). Fairclough’s method is also political for its goal is not only deconstruction
but also social change. The objective of his approach is to transform society by exposing how
material relations of force are linked to discourse. CDA is not without its critics. Table 9.3
indicates some of the strengths and weaknesses of this approach.
147
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
Key: Q – member of the public; BP – Bill Pulver, CEO of Australia Rugby Union
Q: I’d like to ask about junior development as an area of rugby growth in the heart of Sydney,
and the fact that rugby league is pillaging our youth. What are you doing to expand that
area and what are your plans for winning that back?
BP: That is such a good point and I mentioned, I think, in my comment that there were
three key drivers of the game: growth in participation, growth in elite talent and growth in
revenue. Unless we grow participation rates, the game is dead and it doesn’t matter how
well you play at the elite level, the game is dead and so you are absolutely right. And am I
nervous about it? Yes, I am. The last three weeks I’ve had meetings with headmasters and
sadly in Australia, rugby is known as a private school game and I want to change that and
sevens will help to change that. Sevens will collect a way more diversified audience for our
game.
But I’ve got two challenges in the short term. Put your hand up if you went to the last
Waratah’s game. [6 hands raised from 50+ in attendance] How pathetic is that? With respect,
I’m sorry but that is the point, we have a rusted on rugby community that don’t go and watch
the games. Now unless we start growing the number of people that love this game from the
grassroots level, we have a huge problem. I can go on forever about this because you’re spot
on strategically and I am very nervous about it. AFL and rugby league with their 1.2 and
1.3 billion dollar broadcasting relationships have just money to burn. When I go and talk
to the headmasters of these schools, the AFL have already been there with grounds lined up,
coaches lined up, all the gear they want and putting in place programmes for seven, eight,
nine, ten, eleven year olds. And to me, strategically, the AFL are this train that is lined up
with its headlight right between my eyes that’s going to hit me in ten years that I’m standing
here going I can’t do anything to stop it. So we need initiatives at the grassroots level to
deal with it, strategically it’s a huge issue.
I’ve just announced a new structure at the ARU. I’ve got to try and get cost out of the
ARU and we’ve done that to a large degree. There’s one position I’m aiming to fill and we’ve
got these state community programmes. This position is someone who is going to be the
general manager of participation. That’s all I want, participation. One objective: we have
320,000 participants today and the objective is to get it to 500,000 within a reasonable
window. How do we do that? We just have to redirect some investment, money we don’t
actually have today, but we’ve got to find a way to do this and re-energize the younger age
brackets of getting back involved in the game.
One of the problems with participation with junior level is mums are worried about the
physicality of the game. I would love ultimately to see the game as being the 15-man game,
sevens and touch. If you can create a non-contact form of this game, you could actually
148
DISCOURSE ANALYSIS AND ETHNOMETHODOLOGY
attract every single sporting enthusiast to become a potential participant. So it’s a huge
strategic issue, you are spot on. There is a lot of creative talk that’s got to go into fixing it
and we’re going to dive in and try and address it.
Q: I’d like to come back to the sevens as well. What is being actively done to encourage
people to engage more in sevens because it’s not that popular, and what’s with Fox Sport
[broadcast partner of rugby] not showing it, what’s the future there because you can easily
claim, you have full stadia, you have people dressing up, you have exciting tournaments . . .
but with Australian men possibly not even qualifying for the Olympic Games, the women I
think are OK, but the Australian men might not even qualify, how can you engage the
Australian public to be passionate about sevens and then the Commonwealth Games is the
next question.
BP: You guys are all explaining why I have a very difficult job in everything but you’re spot
on. So what have we done?
Step 1: I’ve appointed somebody nationally accountable for sevens rugby. Anthony Eddy
will have a dedicated executive focused exclusively on sevens rugby.
Step 2: And sevens has actually developed at the international level. There are nine
tournaments played around the world. One of those is ours. On 12 and 13 October in the
Gold Coast is a phenomenal tournament that I would ask you to support and get up there
and have a fun weekend. If any of you have ever been to Hong Kong or any of these
tournaments, they’re great fun. You can dress up, you can do whatever you like. It’s a party,
but it’s a party with great rugby so please get there and support it.
We need to put sevens competition structure all the way down through the age groups
from juniors to seniors, to schools to a national . . . I would like to see Super Rugby sevens.
I’m already talking to Super Rugby chief executives about Super Rugby competitions,
topping and tailing the current XVs. So you’re going to see an infrastructure put in place.
One of the other issues with sevens, I’ll ask you and it’s interesting, because Greg’s [Greg
Clarke commentator on Fox Sports, and on the panel] son is actually part of the Australian
sevens, so apart from him, can anyone name another Australian men’s sevens player? [three
people shout out a couple names] Some of you are rusted on rugby fans, which is good. But
by and large we don’t have profile names in sevens and there’s a bit of a policy issue that
Australian Rugby is deciding you’re a XVs player, you’re a sevens player. Well I’m going to
mix that up and in June basically in a couple of days they’re going to Moscow for the World
Cup of sevens. Bernard Foley is going, Matt Lucas is going and there’s a third, Luke Monahan
[three Super Rugby players] is going and guys like Israel Folau, guys like James O’Connor
[National 15 squad member], they want to play sevens so we need to find an approach where
you can mix between sevens and XVs.
And again I wish I had 50 million bucks sitting in the bank to invest in all this stuff,
which I don’t. But there will be a lot more time and effort going into it. The same on
the women’s side and really we need to put a competition structure right down through the
game. The Olympics will help enormously. You touched on a really serious point we’ve got
to qualify, speaking of the pain of the qualification process but there’s a lot to do. We will
get there.
149
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
One area in which CDA could have particular relevance within the Sport Management
Research domain is sport policy. Policies can be broadly defined and include directives for
action, or the responsibilities for action and the processes guiding the implementation of action.
Critical discourse analysis aims to expose sources of domination, repression and exploitation
that are entrenched in, and legitimated by policy. Thus a policy analysis goes beyond analysing
the content and implementation of policies to examine how those policies reflect certain
understandings of reality in the first instance.
150
DISCOURSE ANALYSIS AND ETHNOMETHODOLOGY
Yao Ming and masculinity in Middle America: A critical discourse analysis of racial
representations in NBA game commentary. Lavelle, K. L. (2006). Unpublished
dissertation. Wayne State University.
Lavelle studied the rhetorical construction of Yao Ming (7 foot 6 inches tall Chinese
basketball player), specifically how representations of him function as a clash of cultures
and a statement on notions of masculinity, where race is one element, in the National
Basketball Association. This study was derived from the literature that talks about how race
and ethnicity can shape how players are rhetorically constructed during game commentary.
Lavelle utilized critical discourse analysis to examine 15 game commentaries quantitatively
and qualitatively. The qualitative analysis data consisted of a thematic analysis of players,
focusing on a comparison of how players were described. Lavelle concluded that the depictions
of Yao reinforce his role as a model minority.
WHAT IS ETHNOMETHODOLOGY?
Garfinkel (1967) coined the term and was the founder of ethnomethodology. In his text
discussing Garfinkel’s work, Heritage (1984) defined ethnomethodology as:
the study of . . . the body of common-sense knowledge and the range of procedures
and considerations by which the ordinary members of society make sense of, find
their way about in, and act on the circumstances in which they find themselves.
(p. 4)
The ethnomethodological perspective views social actors as accomplishing their social worlds
through interaction, by means of a continuous process of intersubjective adjustment. Social
realities are, therefore, regarded as action in process (Garfinkel, 1967). Ethnomethodological
studies investigate social life in situ, in ordinary settings, examining ‘the most routine, every-
day, naturally occurring activities in their concrete details’ (Psathas, 1995, pp. 1–2). Lee
(1991) has outlined five axioms that characterize the way that an ethnomethodological
approach gives a new orientation to the study of social life and social activity. The axioms
are:
151
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
Ethnomethodology studies the specific interactions among participants and acknowledges that
interactions are actually agents for constituting social order and reality. Gubrium and Holstein
(2000) suggest that ethnomethodologists focus on how members actually ‘do’ social life, aiming
in particular to document how they concretely construct and sustain social entities, such as
gender, self and family.
Five concepts are central to ethnomethodology; these are shown in Table 9.4:
Process Description
Indexicality The meaning of a word – indeed of all words – is dependent on its context of
use.
Reflexivity This is the process in ordinary conversation by which we build up meaning,
order and rationality by both describing and producing action simultaneously.
The documentary The meaning of a word is indexical, but at the same time we seek patterns
method of to compensate for this indexicality of language that make sense.
interpretation
The notion of The term member is used in ethnomethodology to describe a member of a
member group who has mastered the natural language of that group and does not
have to think about what he or she is doing as the routines of everyday social
practice are known.
Accountability Accountability means that the activities whereby members produce and
manage settings of organized everyday affairs are observable and reportable.
152
DISCOURSE ANALYSIS AND ETHNOMETHODOLOGY
METHODOLOGY
According to Schegloff (1991), the basic task of the ethnomethodologist is ‘to convert
insistent intuition, however correct, into empirically detailed analysis’ (p. 66). Lee’s (1991)
five principles of ethnomethodology summarize the analyst’s position. First, an ethnomethod-
ologist suspends belief or acceptance of social relationships between categories of people.
An ethnomethodologist understands that members continually display the ‘lived’ reality of
their relationships and their world to themselves and to others (Schegloff, 1991). Second, the
ethnomethodologist’s task is to treat interactive situations as scenes that are jointly and
sequentially produced by all participants. Third, the ethnomethodologist sets aside formats of
talk or interaction that given participants would or should use in favour of the structures of
talk and interaction that they do use. Fourth, the assumption that the orderliness of social
structures and social organization is achieved in the day-to-day ordinary activities of members
and will, therefore, be available in the details of everyday events, is maintained by the
ethnomethodologist. Finally, the ethnomethodologist understands that, for members of a
society, that society’s traditions, customs and mores are not sequestered from the talk and
interaction, nor do they limit and constrain what those members do and say.
The distinctions between discourse analysis and conversation analysis are identified in
Table 9.5.
153
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
The MCD is an analytic tool or device that describes the culturally available sets of categories
into which we commonsensically divide persons. These categories are fundamental sense-
making resources for members in everyday interaction.
A summary of the terminology used in MCD is highlighted in Table 9.6.
It is not argued in this book that all the approaches to textual, conversational and pictorial
analysis are, in fact, similar or interchangeable. Indeed, there are certain ways in which they
are divergent. Silverman (1993), for example, argues that discourse analysis (DA) and critical
discourse analysis (CDA) are different from ethnomethodology and conversation analysis (CA)
in that the former two analytic approaches possess the following three features:
1 They are concerned with a far broader range of activities, often related to more
conventional social science concerns (e.g. gender relations, social control, etc.).
2 They do not always use analysis of ordinary conversation as a baseline for
understanding talk in institutional settings.
3 Discourse analysis (and CDA) work with far less precise transcripts than CA (p. 121).
154
DISCOURSE ANALYSIS AND ETHNOMETHODOLOGY
QUALITY CRITERIA
The quality criteria for carrying out research using CA are set out in Table 9.7 (see p. 156).
The criteria for quality investigation (assumptions) have been adapted from a number of
authoritative sources (Boden, 1994; Have, 1999; Heritage, 1997; Hutchby and Wooffitt, 1998;
Psathas, 1995; Silverman, 1998). The right-hand column shows, for each of the criteria, how
the methods of CA were put into practice in a research study.
Ethnomethodology is offered as a contribution to an emerging body of scholarship that is
directed at promoting a more rigorous and theoretically informed understanding of the conduct
and reporting of ethnographic fieldwork. It clearly has unexplored potential in the field of
Sport Management Research.
The following article is an example of how ethnomethodology has been used in the past by
researchers in Sport Management Research. The interested reader may wish to find/download
and read the article for further insights.
Toward an alternative theory of self and identity for understanding and investigating
adherence to exercise and physical activity. McGannon, K. R. (2002). Doctoral
thesis, University of Alberta.
McGannon developed an alternative theory of self and identity grounded in a view of language
that prioritizes the process and outcome of language and how it is tied to discursive, cultural,
social and institutional practices. Feminist post-structuralism ‘ethnomethodology’, and
narrative psychology were combined to theorize women’s self and identity (i.e. who they are)
and implicitly, exercise behaviour as a collection of conversations they have with themselves
and others or more specifically as narratives/stories spoken from subject positions within
larger discourse(s).
CONCLUSION
The application of discourse analysis as a methodology for Sport Management Research
provides the discipline with the opportunity to construct alternative perspectives on power
and knowledge. Ethnomethodology, a form of discourse analysis, is an emerging form of
scholarship that promotes a more rigorous and theoretically informed understanding of the
conduct and reporting of ethnographic research. It has unexplored potential for the field of
Sport Management Research.
155
Table 9.7 The methodological perspective of conversation analysis
REVIEW QUESTIONS
Discourses are conversations and the meanings behind those conversations. Ethnomethodology
is a form of discourse analysis that aims to study, understand and articulate how people make
sense of themselves and each other in everyday life. With a basic understanding now of
discourse analysis, critical discourse analysis and ethnomethodology, attempt to answer the
following questions:
n Identify two key features of critical discourse analysis that would have particular
relevance for Sport Management Research.
n What factors should the sport management researcher take into consideration before
deciding to adopt ethnomethodology as a research approach?
n How can ethnomethodology be applied to Sport Management Research?
157
Chapter 10
LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of this chapter you should be able to:
KEY TERMS
Participant observation – the researcher is immersed in the day-to-day lives of the people,
or conducts one-on-one interviews with members of the group.
Critical ethnography – a perspective that allows a qualitative researcher to frame questions
and promote action. Critical ethnography goes beyond a description of the culture to
action for change, by challenging the false consciousness and ideologies exposed through
the research.
Postmodernism – term applied to a wide-ranging set of developments in fields of research
that are generally characterized as emerging from, in reaction to, or superseding,
modernism.
158
EMERGING ETHNOGRAPHICAL APPROACHES
Netnography – a written account resulting from fieldwork studying the cultures and
communities that emerge from online, computer mediated or Internet-based
communications.
Ethnodrama – a process to transform data into theatrical scripts and performance pieces.
Phenomenography – a process that is concerned with identifying people’s ideas about a
phenomenon, rather than proving that the actual phenomenon exists.
KEY THEMES
n What is ‘ethnography’?
n What are the implications for applying critical and postmodern theories to ethnographical
research processes being undertaken in the field of sport management?
ETHNOGRAPHIC CONCEPTS
n culture
n holistic perspective
n contextualization
n an emic perspective
n thick description
n member checking
n a nonjudgmental orientation
CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter examines the qualitative research approach of ethnography. For many years
traditional ethnography has been applied to the field of sport. From the late 1990s sport
researchers began to embrace ethnographic frameworks underpinned by critical and
postmodern theories. The advantage for sport management researchers in applying critical
and postmodern thought to ethnographic approaches is that it strengthens their own critical
consciousness. This chapter will provide an introduction and overview to the concepts of
ethnography, and provide some examples of critical and postmodern frameworks from which
ethnographic researchers can approach the field of sport management. In addition, this chapter
will highlight some emerging ethnographical methodologies and demonstrate how they can
be situated in the sport management research field. Netnography, ethnodrama and
phenomenography may appear on the surface to have little relation to Sport Management
Research; however, this chapter will briefly cover each of these methodologies and discuss
their potential applications to the field of sport management.
159
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
WHAT IS ETHNOGRAPHY?
Ethnographic studies involve the collection and analysis of data about cultural groups.
Ethnography means: ‘to write about people or cultures’ from the Greek words ‘ethnos’ (people)
and ‘graphein’ (write). It is influenced by other theories such as, phenomenology, feminism,
grounded theory and postmodernism.
According to Leininger (1985), ethnography can be defined as: ‘the systematic process of
observing, detailing, describing, documenting, and analysing the lifeways or particular patterns
of a culture (or subculture) in order to grasp the lifeways or patterns of the people in their
familiar environment’ (p. 35). Hammersley and Atkinson (1995) indicate that:
ORIGINS OF ETHNOGRAPHY
Ethnography has its roots in social anthropology and launched in the late nineteenth and
twentieth century. It was the result of famous anthropologists such as Malinowski (1922),
Boas (1928) and Mead (1928), while seeking cultural patterns and rules, exploring several
non-Western cultures and the lifestyles of the people within them. Sociologists and the Chicago
School of Sociology also had an influence on ethnographic methods, immersing themselves
in the culture (LeCompte and Preissle, 1993). From the pioneering beginnings at the Chicago
School of Sociology in the 1920s and 1930s a division occurred between ethnography as
practised by social scientists and ethnographic methods used by anthropologists.
FEATURES OF ETHNOGRAPHY
Hammersley (1990) identified that the term ethnography typically relates to social research,
which consists of most of the following characteristics: (1) people’s behaviours are studied
in an everyday context, rather than under experimental situations developed by the
investigator; (2) data is collected from various sources, with observation and interviews being
the primary aspects; (3) data is gathered in an ‘unstructured’ manner in that it does not follow
a plan. This does not imply that the research is unsystematic, rather data is collected in as
raw a form, and on as wide a front, as feasible; (4) the focus is commonly a single setting or
group and on a small scale; and (5) data analysis entails interpretation of the meanings and
functions of human actions and is primarily conducted in the form of verbal descriptions and
explanations (p. 1). These features make ethnography very applicable to many Sport
Management Research contexts or settings. Tables 10.1 and 10.2 show characteristics and
applications of ethnographic research, respectively.
160
EMERGING ETHNOGRAPHICAL APPROACHES
Ethnographic research
• Conducted in a natural context
• Involves intimate face-to-face interactions with participants
• Reflects participants’ perspectives and behaviours
• Uses inductive, interactive and recursive collection of unstructured data
• Data is collected primarily through fieldwork experiences
• Uses multiple data sources including both quantitative and qualitative
• Frames all human behaviour and beliefs within a socio-political and historical context
• Uses the concept of culture as a lens through which the results are interpreted
• Places an emphasis on exploring the nature of particular social phenomena
• Investigates a small number of cases in detail
• Uses data analyses that involve the explicit interpretation of the meanings and functions of
human actions that are presented through the description of themes and interpretations
within the context or group setting
• Offers interpretations of people’s actions and behaviours that are uncovered through the
investigation of what they actually do and the reasons for doing it
• Offers a representation or interpretation of people’s lives and behaviours that is neither the
researcher’s or the participants’ but is built on the points of understanding and
misunderstanding that occur between the researcher and participants
• Is necessarily partial, bound by what can be handled within a certain time, under certain
specific circumstances, and from a particular perspective
161
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
DEVELOPMENT OF ETHNOGRAPHY
Traditional ethnography has been a research tool used for many years and emerged from a
close relationship with anthropology to study traditional and non-Western societies (Chambers,
2000). Early studies associated with traditional ethnography were the work of ‘Malinowski
and Evans-Prichard in social anthropology and with the classic Chicago studies in urban
sociology’ (Chambers, 2000, p. 406). Chambers (2000) claimed the usefulness of ethnographic
data grasped what is sometimes called ‘the native point of view’ (p. 853) with an emphasis
on the ‘slice of life approach’ (Atkinson, Coffey and Delamont, 1999). American ethnography,
however, was derived largely on the understanding of events whereas the use of ethnography
in Britain was associated more with anthropology. Skinner and Edwards (2005) purported
that: ‘in this tradition, emphasis has been more about understanding relationships rather than
activities, and research has been based more explicitly on sociology theory’ (p. 407).
Regardless of its theoretical origins, ethnography is used to understand the culture of a
particular group from the perspective of the group members (Tedlock, 2000; Wolcott, 1995).
Tedlock described ethnography ‘as an attempt to place specific encounters, events and
understandings into fuller, more meaningful context’ (p. 455). Many researchers portray
ethnographic fieldwork involving living both with and like those who are being studied – taking
part or being in a group’s activities, problems, language, knowledge, rituals and social rela-
tions (Hammersley, 1992; Pedersen, 1998; Tedlock, 2000; Van Maanen, 1988): for example,
volunteering in a sport franchise for several months, or long enough to understand how the
sport managers, athletes, coaches, and other staff interact and behave. Ethnography provides
the opportunity for exploration and investigation of the data via progressive focusing (Burns,
1997) and allows for the ‘development of theory’ (Hammersley and Atkinson, 1983, p. 23).
Critics of traditional ethnography (Edwards and Skinner, 2009; Fay, 1975; Habermas, 1978)
are concerned about the exclusion of power from the field of study and lack of theoretical
relationship that may bring about liberation of the people being investigated. It is also argued
that conventional ethnography contains a certain element of neutrality in that a sport
management researcher may only observe behaviours in the sport franchise, and not attempt
to challenge, change or fix issues uncovered in the observation. Tedlock (2000) denotes that
interpretive ethnographers deny the voice of the researcher-as-author. Moreover, the tenets
of traditional ethnography have been brought into question for their validity and worth hence
the emergence of other forms of ethnographic research such as critical ethnography (Skinner
and Edwards, 2005).
162
EMERGING ETHNOGRAPHICAL APPROACHES
163
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
POSTMODERN ETHNOGRAPHY
The idea of a ‘postmodern’ ethnography is a hotly debated one. Denzin (1997) dismisses
critics who claim that, because of their inherent narrative and cohesive features, ethnographies
can never be effectively fragmented while still telling the story of a culture. According to
Lindlof and Taylor (2002), a postmodern ethnography is one that blurs genres of writing and
embraces marginalized voices through a disruption of institutional narratives. Denzin and
Lincoln (2000) deem that ‘the emergence of postmodernism in ethnographic research was
useful in adding greater theoretical weight to the ethnographic research because epistemologies
from previously silenced groups emerged to offer solutions to representational concerns’
(p. 17). Fay (1975) agrees that there is a need for a theory that would lead people to seek to
change the way they think about what others are doing (p. 91). Skinner and Edwards (2005)
concur that such a theory would ‘contribute to the interrelationship between knowledge as
beliefs and attitudes, actions, and power relations, and by doing so offer a social rather than
individualistic approach to the study of sport and sport organizations’ (p. 408).
Gottschalk (1998) argues that a postmodern ethnography is more or differently demanding
because, in addition to the essential tasks of collecting, organizing, interpreting, validating
and communicating ‘the data’, the author needs to remain constantly and critically attentive
to issues such as subjectivity, rhetorical moves, problems of voice, power, textual politics,
limits to authority, truth claims and unconscious desires. A sport management researcher
might alleviate this demand by paying attention to all levels and groups within a sport
organization under investigation, actively seeking to empower those with the smallest voice.
Postmodern researchers are interested ‘in pointing out signs of postmodern changes in the
world that is still largely under modern influences’ (Markula, Grant, and Dennison, 2001,
p. 260). Markula et al. (2001) agree with other postmodernists’ argument that ‘today’s society
is constituted of multiple meanings and prefers qualitative research that allows multiple voices
to emerge from the research text’ (p. 260). An important aspect in incorporating postmodern
ethnography as a methodology for this thesis was that it ‘favors social analyses that incorporates
practical or moral interests with local narratives being preferred to grand narratives’, for
example telling local stories of female surfers, ‘as opposed to general stories’ (Edwards and
Skinner, 2009, p. 267). Skinner and Edwards (2005) believe that the researcher in postmodern
ethnography also becomes ‘encapsulated in the research, not only in the research process but
also in the empowerment of the research participants’ understanding of the research issue
under investigation’ (p. 412).
A review of sport research by Sparkes (cited in Skinner and Edwards, 2005, p. 405)
suggested that ‘it was only in the 1990s that the influence of critical and postmodern
ethnographic frameworks began to touch on the sub-disciplines of sport’. Packwood and Sikes
(1996) believe that:
postmodernism not only focuses on the narrative of the individual but breaks down
the meta-narratives into micro-narratives. This serves to allow the voices denied in
meta-narrative to be heard, and the taken-for-granted truths and realities of the meta-
narratives to be made problematic and thereby verified. (p. 337)
164
EMERGING ETHNOGRAPHICAL APPROACHES
This also permits others’, for example, the sponsored female surfers, voices and opinions to
be heard, not just those of the surfing industry. Packwood and Sikes (1996) summarize the
underlying assumptions of postmodernism by Docherty (1993) and Smart (1992) as follows:
This means that texts do not have absolute meaning in postmodern research. Rather their
meanings reside in the reality that the interpreter brings to the text by which it is read.
Packwood and Sikes (1996) believe this type of research results in a ‘deep reading of the text
context rather than merely accepting what it is saying’ (p. 343). Semerjian and Waldron (2001)
agree and state that there is ‘more than one way to tell a story about what we see in the world
and a number of possible perspectives’ (p. 440).
As critics of traditional ethnography, Edwards and Skinner (2009) were ‘concerned about
the exclusion of power from the field of study’ (p. 262). The application of postmodern theory
within an ethnographic framework in a study by Dunbar (2003) demonstrates the successful
use this approach has in highlighting contradictory images of masculinity. Both these studies
enable the researcher to question and disrupt taken-for-granted notions of masculinity,
empowering the research participants in both studies to revisit their understanding of ‘what
it means to be masculine through critical reflection’ (cited in Skinner and Edwards, 2005,
p. 412). Another ethnographic study about senior rugby managers underpinned by ethno-
graphic principles by Skinner (2001) allowed for a ‘critical examination of values, beliefs,
and practices being promoted by senior rugby union managers as reflective of all organizational
members to be challenged’ (cited in Edwards and Skinner, 2009, p. 267).
165
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
166
EMERGING ETHNOGRAPHICAL APPROACHES
Types of data
a) emic data (data supplied by the participants);
b) etic data (ethnographer’s interpretation of participants’ perspectives);
c) negotiation data (information participants and researcher agree to use in a study).
There are two main methods of collecting data through ethnographic research:
a) interviewing is the most important tool;
b) participant observation is crucial to effective fieldwork, which requires an
immersion in the culture:
n field notes are used to check the accuracy of an ethnographer’s observations;
n other forms of writing used are field jottings, field diary, and field logs.
Spradley (1980) suggested a checklist:
a) extensive fieldwork by the researcher;
b) rich, detailed description – does not attempt to summarize, generalize or
hypothesize. The notes capture and describe what happened to permit
interpretations, and most of all, to later convey cultural meaning.
8 Describe appropriate strategies for the analysis and interpretation of data.
The data analysis follows many of the processes recommended previously for
qualitative research:
a) triangulation (checking the validity by comparing sources of information);
b) patterns (checking reliability by revealing consistencies and describing matches);
c) key events (a lens through which to view a culture);
d) visual representations (maps, charts, sociograms);
e) statistics (use of non-parametric techniques);
f) crystallization (when everything falls into place);
g) ethnographic saturation;
h) managing the process.
9 Write the ethnographic account.
The written account can follow a number of forms similar to that discussed in the case
study chapter (Chapter 7).
As with other methods ethnographic approaches have advantages and disadvantages. Table
10.4 outlines some of these advantages and disadvantages.
Validity in ethnography
According to Burns (1997), the data collection and analysis strategies used by ethnographers
in ethnographic studies maintain high internal validity for a number of reasons. First, the
long-term living relationship with participants in the setting allows continual data analysis
and comparison to ‘refine constructs and to ensure the match between scientific categories
and participant realities’ (p. 324). Second, interviews with informants, which constitute a
primary ethnographic data source, must be solely derived from experience or observation
and ‘are less abstract than many instruments used in other research designs’ (p. 324). Third,
the researcher’s role as participant–observer, in order to acquire the reality of life experiences
of participants, is found in the natural settings. Finally, ethnographic analysis embodies a process
of ethnographer self-monitoring known as disciplined activity, in which the researcher
continually questions and re-evaluates information and challenges his/her own opinions or
biases.
Reliability in ethnography
The scale of reliability in ethnographic research is based on replication of the study, and that
two or more individuals can have comparable explanations by conforming to categories and
Advantages
• Provides the researcher with a much more comprehensive perspective than other forms of
research
• Appropriate to behaviours that are best understood by observing them within their natural
environment (dynamics)
• Looks at the situation holistically
• May arrive at greater understanding of the problem than other research processes
• Can generate theories
Disadvantages
• Highly dependent on the researcher’s observations and interpretations
• No way to check the validity of the researcher’s conclusion, since numerical data is rarely
provided
• Observer bias is almost impossible to eliminate
• Generalizations are almost non-existent since only a single situation is observed, leaving
ambiguity in the study
• Researcher’s familiarity with the field site may have an impact
• Researcher needs to be familiar with cultural jargon/language
168
EMERGING ETHNOGRAPHICAL APPROACHES
procedures in the study (Burns, 1997). Despite replication in social sciences not always being
achievable (due to changes in the setting or behaviours of members), the possibility to
replicate ethnographic findings does not undermine assessments of their validity, though it
may make the task more difficult.
Ethical principles
It is important to note that informants are human beings who have interests, concerns and
problems and researchers’ values are not necessarily similar to those of informants. Fieldwork
is an essential component of ethnography and researchers in the field frequently confront
conflicting values and a broad range of possible choices. To illustrate: ‘How will I use the
data collected and will I tell the informants how it will be used?’ (Spradley, 1979, p. 79). As
a result, it is important for ethnographers to protect the physical, social and psychological
welfare and to honour the dignity and privacy of their informants. Ethnography also entails
interaction with other people such as sponsors and gatekeepers, who may have the power to
grant or withhold permission to conduct interviews. The researcher must also safeguard the
artefacts that are collected. Ethical questions the researcher must ask include:
n How will the researcher handle a situation where they are asked to take sides?
n How will the researcher manage situations where antagonistic views, violence, racism
or sexism threaten their presence/values?
n How will results be disseminated?
The history of association soccer dates back to the 1800s, and all indications are that
prospects for the female athlete were scarce in all sports. The researcher arranged an
environment where young females could train with males in a soccer setting that has all the
necessary elements for the athletes to learn, improve and compete with their own gender as
well as the opposite gender. The female group were noticeable underachievers in this sport
and were not aware of their potential. The research methodology employed was ethnographic.
The method stressed the importance of reproducing procedures that were taught to the
researcher.
EMERGING ETHNOGRAPHIES
This section will highlight some emerging ethnographical methodologies and demonstrate
how they can be situated in the Sport Management Research field. Autoethnography,
ethnodrama, and phenomenography may appear on the surface to have little relation to Sport
Management Research; however, the following discussion will cover each of these
methodologies and identify their potential applications to the field of sport management.
Autoethnography
This section explores the emerging ethnographic research approach of autoethnography. One
way of understanding autoethnography is to deconstruct the components of the word. In this
fashion auto refers to the self or the autobiographical (Reed-Danahay, 1997), ethno to a social
group, and graphy to the process of researching and writing (Ellis and Bochner 2000; Reed-
Danahay, 1997; Whitmore, 2003).
In an autoethnography the observer is part of the subculture studied. For example, a coach
may conduct an autoethnography of the coaching culture in a local basketball league. Van
170
EMERGING ETHNOGRAPHICAL APPROACHES
Maanen (1995) states that this type of research is carried out by a native who reveals his or
her own group. Autoethnography has close ties to phenomenology and hermeneutics. Ellis
(2004) describes a more specific placement of autoethnography as a form of impressionistic
or interpretive ethnography. Indeed, autoethnography may be viewed as both, with narrative
being the more general description.
As an outgrowth of the interpretive turn (postmodernism), autoethnography is considered
a form of autobiographical narrative combining evocative writing and research that display
multiple levels of consciousness, generally written in first-person (Denzin and Lincoln, 1994;
Ellis, 2000, 2004). Autoethnography has been acknowledged as a method of inquiry since
the mid 1970s and was shaped by the ideas of feminism, post-structuralism and postmodernism
(Ellis and Bochner, 2000). Much like hermeneutics, autoethnography circles among the social
and cultural aspects of personal experience; and the inner self, feelings, emotions and
experience, with the primary purpose of understanding a singular or multiple self, through
lived experience (Ellis and Bochner, 2000).
Ellis and Bochner (2000) have advocated the use of autoethnography suggesting personal
experience as an opportunity to move beyond a passionless and objective authoritative voice;
autoethnography presents an opportunity to connect the personal to the cultural. The research
becomes a personal account (e.g. coach) of experiences within and in relation to a particular
culture (e.g. local basketball coaches) that also draws on others’ lived experiences (e.g. other
coaches in the league); the completed text seeks to engage the readers and draws them into
the experiences of the author and other participants. The coach has the opportunity to relay
both his/her personal feelings and experience as part of the local basketball culture and other
coaches’ perspectives through discussions and interviews. Ellis and Bochner have also suggested
that autoethnography asks readers ‘to become co-participants, engaging the storyline morally,
emotionally, aesthetically, and intellectually’ (2000, p. 745). Other scholars have also
suggested that autoethnography must be considered a valid form of reporting the social (Denzin
and Lincoln, 2002); this same plea has been made specifically within the study of sport (Denison
and Rinehart, 2000; Holt, 2003; Sparkes, 2000). Spry (2001) writes that: ‘Autoethnography
can be defined as a self-narrative that critiques the situatedness of self with others in social
contexts’ (p. 710).
Blurring the distinction between self and other, autoethnography is a form of research that
provides opportunity for the researchers to incorporate their own life experiences with the
experiences of those being studied (Reed-Danahay, 1997). Autoethnography moves beyond
self-reflexivity within an ethnographic study, encouraging researchers to write about their
own experiences of the social phenomena and not solely their experiences of recording the
culture. As Reed-Danahay (1997) argues:
Autoethnography emerged in the 1980s in the social sciences and more recently in the study
of sport and physical education (Holt, 2003). Many evolving research methods fall under the
171
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
umbrella of autoethnography: personal narratives, narratives of the self and ethnographic short
stories (Ellis and Bochner, 2000). While providing unique opportunities to share personal
experiences, autoethnography can be extremely difficult to undertake for a number of reasons
not the least of those being the willingness of the researcher to self-analyse. As Ellis and Bochner
(2000) state: ‘The self-questioning autoethnography demands is extremely difficult. So is
confronting things about yourself that are less than flattering . . . Honest autoethnographic
exploration generates a lot of fears and doubts – and emotional pain’ (p. 738).
Sparkes (2002) has suggested that in autoethnography, ‘it is made clear that the author
“was there” in the action, that the story is based on “real” people, “real” events, and “data”
that were collected in various ways’ (p. 3). Furthermore, a critical analysis of one’s own
experiences of the social phenomenon under study works to locate the writer/researcher as
a living and breathing participant, a researcher that physically coached in the local basketball
league under investigation.
One goal of autoethnography is to bring forward conversations through stories about
personal, emotional experiences. What distinguishes autoethnography from other types of
narratives is the intent to write about self (or multiple selves in the context of culture) (Ellis,
2004; Richardson, 2000).
Sparkes (2002) argues that alternative representation practices, such as autoethnographies,
poetic representations and ethnodramas, offer insight into sport and physical activity by
privileging the lived body.
Methodology
There is much debate regarding the methodology of autoethnography and whether it constitutes
scientific research. The use of self as the only data source can be problematic in this regard.
Ellis (1995) argues that a story could be considered scholarly if it makes the reader believe
that the experience is authentic, believable and possible. The intended purpose of autoethnog-
raphy is to provide the opportunity for the reader and author to become co-participants in
the recorded experience. There are also multiple warning signs, skills and difficulties that are
experienced or needed in writing ethnography (Ellis and Bochner, 2000). Researchers must
be adept at identifying pertinent details, introspection, descriptive and compelling writing,
and confronting things about themselves that may be less than flattering. What if the coach,
as the researcher, discovers they are a source of oppressing minority coaches in the same
league? Will he or she be completely forthcoming in the write-up? Also, the researcher must
handle the vulnerability of revealing oneself to a greater audience. The use of self as the source
of data can be restrictive, yet a powerful aspect of unpacking the many layers involved in the
study of a particular culture or social context. Tierney (1998) explains that autoethnography
is intended to confront dominant forms of representation and power in an attempt to reclaim
marginalized representational spaces.
Data collection
Autoethnographic data collection subscribes to the dualistic nature of exploring oneself within
culture, and then reflective introspection of the expressed embodiment of that culture in
172
EMERGING ETHNOGRAPHICAL APPROACHES
oneself (Foley, 2002). In autoethnographic research, the researcher may begin with the
question, what is it that I really want to know and why? This framework provides a more
concise description and direction for the type of data to collect, where to collect it, and whom
to collect it from. In autoethnographic data collection, all of the considerations of ethnographic
fieldwork are applicable as long as it adds useful information to the study (Nilan, 2002).
Interviews, artefacts, sketches, field notes and photographs can all be part of autoethnographic
research (Tomaselli, 2003).
The ultimate goal of self-study research is to produce literary representations and to add
value to readers of our research. With this in mind, data collection tools vary greatly in self-
narrative research and autobiographical studies. To ensure proper validity in an
autoethnography, Feldman (2003) has developed four criteria upon which data collection are
based:
1 Provide clear and detailed description of how we collect data and make
explicit what counts as data in our work.
2 Provide clear and detailed descriptions of how we constructed the
representation from our data. What specifics about the data led us to make
this assumption?
3 Extend triangulation beyond multiple sources of data to include explorations
of multiple ways to represent the same self-study.
4 Provide evidence that the research changed or evolved the educator and
summarize its value to the profession. This can convince readers of the
study’s significance and validity. (pp. 27–28)
Data analysis
In autoethnography, reflective analysis is an ongoing part of the data collection process (Ellis,
1999). The lived experience of the researcher is fundamental to understanding the experience
as lived. The difficulty with this ‘anything goes’ approach to data analysis fuels the ongoing
debate between traditional positivistic qualitative inquiry and postmodern, contemporary
qualitative research. Other methods of data analysis specifically useful in autoethnography
include collaboration, emotional recall and reflective field notes.
The analysis of data begins the moment the researcher perceives the information. In an
autoethnography the analysis of data is an ongoing event, developing and crystallizing over
time. With each rereading of the personal reflexive journal, each examination of a written
artefact, and with further introspection and self-analysis, the process and clarity of the
research is enriched. These processes form the analysis of data in a qualitative study of an
autoethnographical nature. The gathering and analysis of data go hand in hand as theories and
themes emerge during the study. The reflection involved by the researcher consistently shapes
and forms the articulation of the experiences of the researcher in a self-study.
Ellis and Bochner (2000) assert that the analysis of data in a personal narrative involves a
process where the researcher emotionally recalls the events of the past. The researcher looks
back on specific, memorable episodes and experiences paying particular attention to the
emotions and physical surroundings during the recollection. Emotional recall is expressed
173
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
through writing that includes thoughts, events, dialogue and physical details of the particular
event. Methods of data analysis specifically utilized in autoethnography include collaboration,
emotional recall and reflective field notes. Collaboration in autoethnographic research relates
to understanding the phenomenon studied by those involved. Reflective journals are also a
key element.
Table 10.5 outlines some of the advantages and disadvantages of autoethnography.
evokes in readers a feeling that the experience described is lifelike, believable, and
possible. . . [Validity might also be judged by] whether it helps readers communicate
with others different from themselves, or offers a way to improve the lives of
participants and readers, or even [the researcher’s] own. (p. 751)
Advantages
• Rather than maintain a disconnected objective position, the narrative and subjectivity of the
researcher fashion autoethnographic writing as ‘creative non-fiction’ (Richardson, 2000)
• The reader is granted permission into the intricate life of another and in adding their own
life experience the study becomes more personal and effective
• In autoethnographic research, the author commits to researcher subjectivity and uses an
introspective lens in writing personal narrative history, often confronting hidden emotional
content
Disadvantages
• The author must skilfully capture and communicate narrative voice
• Shallow introspection will directly influence the impact and persuasiveness of the narrative
and can undermine the credibility of proposed conclusions
• Narcissistic use of ‘I’ in social science discourse
• Difficulty in any autoethnographic study lies in the attempt to reclaim or recollect self and
story reflexively
• Autoethnography is still a contested methodological approach
• Autoethnographic study is more fiction than fact
• Autoethnography is self-indulgent, narcissistic and academic ‘navel-gazing’
174
EMERGING ETHNOGRAPHICAL APPROACHES
Reliability within an autoethnographic study can be sought through feedback from the other
participants included in the research: for example, the coach sharing the field notes with other
coaches and allowing them to provide input. Ellis and Bochner (2000) have suggested that
‘[w]hen other people are involved, you might take your work back to them and give them a
chance to comment, add materials, change their minds, and offer their interpretations’ ( p.
751). With inclusion of the ‘self’ in the research, reliability is unorthodox as compared to
traditional, positivist definitions that have previously been applied to qualitative research. To
a certain degree, there must be some ‘letting go’ of traditional, evaluative approaches to the
notions of validity and reliability. As Holt (2003) has argued:
Ellis (2004, 2005) suggested that validity is still important in interpretive ethnography,
and requires some conceptual reframing for autoethnographic inquiry. For her, the question
is how to judge interpretive or impressionist inquiry. She suggests several questions for assessing
quality including:
Autoethnography is not concerned with generalizability, but rather with understanding the
unique experiences of cultural groups or members.
175
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
Sport management, gender and the ‘bigger picture’: Challenging changes in Higher
Education – A partial auto/ethnographical account. Humberstone, B. (2009). Sport
Management Review, 12, 255–262.
This article focused mainly on the author’s experience of Higher Education and of a module
concerned with gender, difference, sport and leisure made available to students studying for
sport and leisure management degrees. It reviews the changed nature of the curriculum in
the shifting socio-economic climate, suggesting that the neoliberal turn influencing Higher
Education in the UK is reinforcing an organizational (university) culture that is counter-
productive to fostering critical gender and race awareness in both staff and students within
restructured sport management programmes. The approach adopted in this paper is partly
auto/ethnographic and as such, on occasion, it looks at the previous research and current
experiences through the eyes and emotions of a senior woman academic located within a
changing ‘new’ university culture. Auto/ethnography as research approach and autobiography
as learning medium are considered.
Netnography
Netnography is defined by Kozinets (1998) as:
a written account resulting from fieldwork studying the cultures and communities
that emerge from online, computer mediated, or Internet-based communications,
where both the field work and the textual account are methodologically informed
by the traditions and techniques of cultural anthropology. (p. 6)
A main difference between netnography and traditional ethnography is that netnography ‘is
based primarily upon the observation of textual discourse, an important difference from the
balancing of discourse and observed behaviour that occurs during in-person ethnography’
(Kozinets, 2002, p. 7). This raises some significant issues, mainly: how does the netnographer
determine the trustworthiness – not to mention the age, gender, race, true sport team
affiliation, etc. – of their informants?
In essence, this approach turns a potential problem of netnography (lack of access to
informants’ non-verbal cues, including their physical appearance) into a potential asset. If, as
mentioned above, ethnographic studies always reflect ‘differences and similarities between
participants and scholars in terms of class, gender, race, culture or subculture, educational
176
EMERGING ETHNOGRAPHICAL APPROACHES
background, age, etc.’ (Seiter, Borchers, Kreutzner, and Warth, 1989, p. 227), then
netnography’s tendency to obscure these variables may produce research uncomplicated by
issues of class, gender and race. Most Internet and Usenet posts betray no information about
the poster’s age, gender or race.
Therefore, the focus of netnography is on what is written, not on who does the writing.
It is suggested that one way for dealing with netnography’s reliance on textual discourse
as opposed to observed behaviour is simply to develop an understanding of the online
community and its leaders, its rank-and-file members, its rhetorical style and its codes and
mores. After extensive exposure, a netnographer will develop a sense of whether a particular
posting is valid and reliable. As Kozinets (1998) suggests, netnographers must always be
aware that:
He adds that in the end, good netnography is built on the same foundation as good ethnography:
‘persistent observation, gaining rapport and trust, triangulating across sites and sources, using
good interview techniques, and researcher introspection’ (p. 7).
Table 10.6 outlines some of the advantages and disadvantages of using netnography.
177
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
Advantages
• Large sample possible quickly
• Less obtrusive compared to surveys, focus groups and personal interviews
• Performed using observations in a context that is not fabricated by the sport management
researcher
• Less costly and timelier than focus groups and personal interviews
• It is a naturalistic and unobtrusive technique
• Immediate analysis
• Transcripts easily available
• Sensitive topics can be researched
Disadvantages
• The lack of informant identifiers present in the online context that leads to difficulty
generalizing results to groups outside the online community sample
• Narrow focus on online communities
• Inability to offer the full and rich detail of lived human experience
• The need for researcher interpretive skills
• Loss of non-verbals
• Loss of intangibles (silence, tone of voice)
• Compensate with emoticons :-)
• Cookies controversy
• Reliability and integrity of information
• Shoulder surfing distortions
• Information overload
• Netnography is still in its infancy
• Ethical concerns
Wrestling with the audience: Fan culture on the Internet. Weisberg, D. (2005).
Unpublished dissertation. Northwestern University. 3177825
This study considers the culture of the ‘Internet Wrestling Community’, a segment of the
professional wrestling audience that pursues an aspect of its fandom online. The study uses
178
EMERGING ETHNOGRAPHICAL APPROACHES
What is ethnodrama?
The term ethnodrama refers to a recent trend in ethnography that presents research as a
performance text. This ethnographic genre is also known as ethnoperformance, and
performance and reflexive anthropology (Denzin, 1991). Ethnodrama employs traditional
techniques to mount a performance event as an alternative mode of research representation,
with actors portraying actual research participants.
The purpose of an ethnodrama is not to entertain, but to encourage critical thinking and
questioning. Denzin (1991) outlines five forms of performance text:
SCRIPTING AN ETHNODRAMA
The process of scripting an ethnodrama involves including as much verbatim narrative as
possible (Mienczakowski and Morgan, 1993). This allows the performance text to attempt
to create a high degree of ‘vraisemblance’ or ‘semblance of truth’ (Mienczakowski, 2001).
By inviting ‘informants’ to validate the research by attending scripting sessions, rehearsals,
group readings and preview performances, Mienczakowski used feedback from the ‘informants’
to edit and rewrite the script.
Post-performance discussions with the audience also allow the researcher to ‘renegotiate’
the ethnodrama’s meaning after every performance. According to Mienczakowski (2001),
this high level of communication and cooperation between researcher, informant and audience
make an ethnodrama approach reflexive, polyvocal and accessible to a broad audience.
179
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
The purpose of this study was to examine the perceptions and reactions of students as they
participated in an ethnodrama that was based on a lecture about ethics in sport manage-
ment. Twenty-two undergraduate sport management students discussed and journaled their
reactions, feelings and experiences as they participated in writing an ethnodrama on the
topic of ethical behaviour. Results of this study showed that the use of ethnodrama in lectures
can be a catalyst for both student voice and the development of ethical standards.
180
EMERGING ETHNOGRAPHICAL APPROACHES
What is phenomenography?
Phenomenography is a method that identifies people’s ideas about a phenomenon, as opposed
to proving that the actual phenomenon exists. Instead of proving that some fans have
unrelenting loyalty to a certain team, phenomenography may seek to understand why fans
identify themselves with a certain team. Through this approach the researcher begins to
formulate an understanding of the specific ways in which these understandings form similarities
and differences among people. Phenomenography attempts to identify and describe, as
faithfully as possible, the individual’s conceptions of some aspect of reality (Sandberg, 1995).
In this way, it attempts to bring all conceptions to light and tries to describe them. The
phenomenographer seeks to understand, systematize and order these conceptions in relation
to each other, thus arriving at a view of the whole picture of the phenomenon, by describing
the range of variation among its subjects (Svensson, 1994).
Phenomenographic research
Phenomenographic research is centred on the variation in experiencing phenomena, and
describing phenomena as others see them (Hasselgren and Beach, 1996). The variations in
experiences are teased out from individual conversations, and used to exemplify different
‘categories of description’, which are collectively expressed as ‘conceptions’. Conceptions
have been variously described as a ‘way of seeing something, a qualitative relationship between
an individual and some phenomenon’ (Johansson, Marton and Svensson, 1985, p. 236), as
the ways in which individuals experience the meaning of something (Svennson, 1994), and
as ‘people’s ways of experiencing a specific aspect of reality’ (Sandberg, 1997, p. 203). The
central aim of phenomenographic research is its attempt to uncover and describe qualitatively
different ways people perceive, experience and understand various aspects of phenomena in
the world as they see it. Phenomenography is therefore primarily concerned with identifying
and understanding the relationship between the person and the phenomenon being studied.
n How does the sport manager perceive their organization’s performance in the hosting
of a major sporting event?
n How does the sport manager evaluate their performance as manager of a major
sporting event?
181
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
n Did the sport manager identify problems in the event that were not recognized
elsewhere?
Phenomenographic approaches are appropriate for research in the field of sport management;
however, to date they have not been applied. The challenge for sport management researchers
is to engage with the method and demonstrate that new sport management knowledge can
be generated from this approach.
CONCLUSION
Traditional ethnography’s approach to such areas of study as sport management has a number
of criticisms and weaknesses. More recent discourses such as critical and postmodern theories
can be applied to the ethnographic method to broaden the field of ethnography by accentuating
awareness of research practices, drawing attention to the role of power relations in the
construction of reality, problematizing the role of the researcher as subject and providing
the potential to empower the research participants understanding of the research issue under
investigation. In endeavouring to emulate rigorous standards of research, sport management
researchers should be encouraged to take more methodological ‘risks’ and embrace more
eclectic research approaches. Critical and postmodern research approaches offer these
opportunities. Moreover, if sport management researchers embrace critical and postmodern
thought it provides them with a theoretical framework to question the social, historical and
political forces that play a role in shaping social reality.
The three emerging research methodologies discussed in this chapter may have different
output and appearance, but they are related in their connection to ethnography and its focus
on the experience of the research participant. In many ways these are research approaches
that will be taken on by the next generation of sport management researchers. The discipline
can only benefit by sport management researchers embracing these new and emerging
ethnographies to understand sport management practice.
182
EMERGING ETHNOGRAPHICAL APPROACHES
A Decide what type of non-verbal behaviour you would observe: use of space, colours, types
of clothing, gestures, facial expressions, manner of greeting, vocal qualities, touch, etc.
B Watch the fans at the sport event and record all observations of non-verbal behaviour
of your choosing. You should only observe the non-verbal communicative behaviour you
have chosen. Try not to let the verbal communication interfere with your observations
of the non-verbal communicative behaviour. (You might want to watch how they work
to complement or contradict the other.)
C Take notes on your observation, recording different and similar behaviours and the
frequency of their occurrences. Remember while observing to vary from a wide angle
to a narrow angle focus.
D When the event has ended, look over your field notes. Think about what you have observed
and what your interpretations are of your findings. Be as descriptive as possible, and
then infer meaning or interpret what the nonverbal communicative behaviour might mean
in this particular context.
E Get together with other people to discuss their findings and interpretations.
F Answer these questions:
1 What is the meaning within the context?
2 Can you see any patterns of behaviours?
3 Are there any themes or categories you can classify the behaviours into?
4 What do these say about the organization and its culture?
5 Discuss what are the limitations to this type of research procedure?
6 What is your reaction to the experience?
a) Were you surprised at your findings?
b) Or were they expected?
REVIEW QUESTIONS
Ethnography is a qualitative research methodology aimed at describing and analysing the
practices and beliefs of cultures and communities. With a basic understanding now of
ethnography, attempt to answer the following questions:
n Is there any place within Sport Management Research for ethnography underpinned by
critical and postmodern theories?
183
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
Each of the emerging ethnographies discussed in this chapter embraces this as a basic tenet
while adopting a unique methodological approach that has significant relevance to Sport
Management Research. With a basic understanding now of these emerging ethnographies,
attempt to answer the following questions:
184
Chapter 11
Gender as a methodology in
Sport Management Research
LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of this chapter, you should be able to:
KEY TERMS
Feminism – theories and philosophies concerned with issues of gender difference and which
advocate women’s rights and interests.
Queer theory – calls into question ‘essential’ sexed, gendered and sexual identities, striving
to destabilize discursive constructions of sexuality that come to be accepted as ‘natural’
and that maintain a dominant/subordinate power relationship.
KEY THEMES
n Is there a distinctive feminist methodology?
n What is queer theory?
185
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter explores gender research methodologies and their application to sport
management, in particular feminist and queer theories. The first section argues that feminist
methodologies offer the sport management researcher scope to investigate issues specifically
related to gender, and the impact these issues may have on the sport management environment.
The second section of this chapter discusses how queer theory has the potential to be utilized
in Sport Management Research.
FEMINISM DEFINED
Doering (1992) defines feminism as ‘a world view that values women and confronts systematic
injustices based on gender’ (p. 26). Feminist theory and research are focused on women with
a major emphasis on class and race bias. Feminist theories have progressed by placing gender
first, by including women in the dialogue of social and political theory and by raising awareness
of women’s needs and the oppression of women. The purpose of feminist research is to create
a social system that represents equality.
186
GENDER AS A METHODOLOGY
feminist methodologists do not use or prescribe any single research method; rather,
they are united through various efforts to include women’s lives and concerns in
accounts of society, to minimize the harms of research and to support changes that
will improve women’s status. (p. 29)
Feminist research has thus evolved along with feminism to be characterized by diversity
and complexity with no specific methodological or research orthodoxy prevailing. It is,
however, marked by a number of fundamental precepts. Of fundamental importance in
feminist research is a direct engagement with the question of gender such that research
phenomena are ‘studied in a “gendered”, rather than a gender-blind or gender-neutral
perspective’ (Lundgren, 1995, p. 3).
Fine (cited in Gatenby and Humphries, 1996, pp. 77–78) details five epistemological and
methodological commitments of feminist research. The first of Fine’s precepts was labelled
‘women’s problematic’ by which she means that for research to be considered feminist it
must not only focus on gender but it must make women’s experiences central to the research
and seek to understand the way in which women make sense of concepts relevant to the
research. For example, taking women’s perspective when investigating the portrayal of
women in sport media. The second of Fine’s precepts for feminist research is ‘women’s ways
of knowing’, which is a twofold process. In the first instance the research must value women’s
ways of knowing by encouraging women to describe their own experiences and must respect
their truths. Asking woman sport figures their opinion on how they are perceived and how
they perceive other women in sport media helps to satisfy this precept. But second, researchers
must address their own experiences and knowledge, and as van Zoonen (1994) terms it,
radically politicize the research process by reflexively interrogating their own role, standpoint
187
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
There are a number of key areas of the research process in which we think precepts
drawn from feminist epistemology need to be integrated: in the researcher/
researched relationship; in emotion as an aspect of the research process that,
like any, other aspect, can be analytically interrogated; in critically unpacking
conceptualizations of ‘objectivity’ and ‘subjectivity’ as binaries or dichotomies; in
the processes by which ‘understanding’ and ‘conclusions’ are reached; in the existence
and management of the different ‘realities’ or versions held by researchers and
researched and in issues surrounding authority and power in research, but also and
perhaps more crucially in written representations of research. (p. 189)
188
GENDER AS A METHODOLOGY
Can gender equity be more equitable?: Promoting an alternative frame for sport
management research, education, and practice. Shaw, S. and Frisby, W. (2006).
Journal of Sport Management, 20(4), 2–24.
189
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
Shaw and Frisby suggest that gender research in sport management has been dominated by
liberal feminist theory, which does little to challenge or alter dominant gendered discourses
and power structures within sport organizations. In their paper, the limitations of three
existing conceptual frames for understanding gender equity are discussed. A fourth frame is
proposed that builds on the work of Ely and Meyerson (2000), Meyerson and Kolb (2000),
and Rao, Stuart, and Kelleher (1999). The authors argue that the fourth frame, based on
post-structural feminist theory, provides an important alternative, addressing the complexities
of gender relations in sport organizations through the processes of critique, narrative revision
and experimentation. They extend the fourth frame by considering two additional elements:
(a) the intersection of gender with other aspects of diversity and (b) a deconstruction of the
traditional discourses that pit gender equity against organizational effectiveness using
Bauman’s (2001) concept of moral sensitivity. The implications of the fourth frame are then
discussed in relation to sport management teaching, research and practice.
fluid, dynamic term. Beemyn and Eliason (1996) write that queer theory must ‘be flexible
enough to accommodate all people who identify as queer’ (p. 3). Beemyn and Eliason (1996)
go on to argue, ‘queer theory has the potential to be inclusive of race, gender, sexuality, and
other areas of identity by calling attention to the distinctions between identities, communities,
and cultures, rather than ignoring these differences or pretending that they don’t exist’
(p. 165). Krane (2001) argues that queer theory has moved beyond lesbian and gay studies
because, ‘queer theory seeks to avoid privileging one component of identity over another’
(p. 404).
This may also be the opinion of Tierney (1997) who sees queer theory as seeking ‘to
interrogate terms such as gender and race so that the norms of our lives are reconfigured’
(p. 37). Table 11.2 lists some of the generally accepted features of queer theory.
Queer theory calls into question understandings of identity categories and operations of
power; it seeks to destabilize accepted gender and identity constructs through individual acts
of resistance/subversion. Queer theorists raise questions that other researchers may not about
identity categories. Examples of these types of questions are presented in Table 11.3.
Queer theory
• Gender and sex are socially constructed
• Deconstructs gender and sexuality/gender norms
• Rejects biological theories of sexual identity
• Questions the usefulness of sexual and gender categories
• Challenges the taken-for-granted binaries of gender and sexuality
• Opens up for debate and discussion the very notions of what constitutes maleness and
femaleness as well as sexualities
• Gender and sex binary serves to acknowledge sexual differences and also operates to contain
and regulate these identities
• Once such categories are formulated, various institutions – parents, families, medicine,
social work, the law, mental health and criminal justice systems – regulate and police them
• Identity politics and social movements
191
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
it remains politically necessary to lay claim to ‘women’, ‘queer’, ‘gay’, and ‘lesbian’,
precisely because of the way these terms, as it were, lay their claim on us prior to
our full knowing. Laying claim to such terms in reverse will be necessary to refute
homophobic deployments of the terms in law, public policy, on the street, in
‘private’ life. (p. 229)
192
GENDER AS A METHODOLOGY
Gender, sexuality, and the body: Exploring the lived experiences of gay and queer
marathoners. Bridel, W. (2006). Doctoral dissertation. University of Ottawa
(Canada).
Bridel’s study explored the experiences of 12 gay and queer males within the sport of
marathoning. Working within an anti-positivist paradigm that draws on queer and post-
structuralist gender theories, as well as a Foucaultian perspective of the body, Bridel
investigated subjects’ discursive constructions of sexuality, gender and the body within the
context of this individual sport milieu. In focusing specifically on an individual sporting space,
this study added a unique perspective to the growing body of knowledge related to gay men
in sport.
1 What other groups/people’s view point did you consider when analysing the story? Is
the regeneration a good thing for all groups/people?
193
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
2 What experiences, values and beliefs that you hold led to uncovering any bias the
organizing committee may have towards certain groups?
3 Choose one marginalized group, and outline a version of the story from their point of
view.
CONCLUSION
Gender approaches have much to offer the sport management researcher. The overarching
goal of this form of research is to identify the ways in which multiple forms of oppression
impact the lives of women and those of alternate sexual orientation.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
With a basic understanding now of feminist and queer theories, attempt to answer the following
questions:
194
Chapter 12
LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of this chapter, you should be able to:
KEY TERMS
Narrative – the consciously formulated, premeditated and coherent account of an experience.
KEY THEMES
n What are the implications for utilizing narrative in the field of Sport Management
Research?
195
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter suggests that narrative is a useful way of approaching the world of Sport
Management Research. It suggests that, in combination with the process of reflection,
narrative inquiry as a qualitative research methodology has the capacity to bring to the field
of Sport Management Research an understanding of the unique experiences of sports managers.
DEFINING NARRATIVE
There appears to be some disagreement about a precise definition of narrative (Riessman,
1993). There are those who suggest that narratives are simply stories about past experiences;
for example, Labov (1972) described it as a partial reliving of past experiences – ‘We define
narrative as one method of recapitulating past experiences’ (p. 359). Notably, Labov made
a point of bringing his narratives to life and not allowing his audience to question his
interpretation of the story. Perhaps the most concise definition of narrative research is that
proposed by Smith (1981): narratives are ‘verbal acts consisting of someone telling someone
else that something happened’ (p. 228). Polkinghorne (1988), while acknowledging that the
term narrative generally can refer to any spoken or written presentation, confines his usage
to the kind of organizational scheme that is expressed in story form. He uses the term to
describe the process of creating a story, the internal logic of the story (its plot and theme),
and also the product – the story, tale or poem as a unit.
The key element is that meaning resides within the individual, capturing and recognizing their
meaning. Some will do this in chronological order, some will do it by themes. Similarly,
Gartner, Latham and Merritt (2003) propose that: ‘Narrative inquiry, gives permission to
learners to tap into the tacit knowledge embedded in their experience as well as to learn from
196
NARRATIVE INQUIRY
each other in the process. It serves as a springboard for dialogue about the deeper issues
of their professional discipline that may not be easily illuminated through other methods’
(p. 2).
In narrative research, researchers describe the lives of individuals, collect and tell stories
about people’s lives and write narratives of individual experiences. As a distinct form of
qualitative research, a narrative typically focuses on studying a single person, gathering
data through the collection of stories, reporting individual experiences and discussing the
meaning of those experiences for the individual (Creswell, 2003). For example, a narrative
inquiry on Tiger Woods might reveal his perceptions and meanings of his quick rise to the
top of golf, his transgressions and their personal effects on himself, and his rise back to
the top.
Researchers draw upon many techniques and sources for the collection and analysis of
narrative data. For example, the Internet, autobiographies, letters, journals, ethnographic
field notes, diaries, obituaries, photograph albums, poetry, newspapers, magazines, television
and participant observation can be used. However, undoubtedly the most pervasive source
of data is the interview. Reissman (1987) distinguished several genres in interviews: among
these, she includes habitual narratives (events happen over and over, and consequently, there
is no peak in the action) such as the routine of team practice; hypothetical narratives (which
depict events that did not happen) such as what would have happened if a championship was
won or lost; and topic-centred narratives (snapshots of past events that are linked thematically)
such as a player switching teams several times over his or her career. Table 12.1 lists some
of the advantages and disadvantages of narrative inquiry.
Advantages of narratives
1 Through narratives individuals connect experiences in a meaningful way via temporal
ordering, emplotment and evaluation
2 Through narratives people share experience because they are built on the basis of social
dialogue (they are always produced for an audience)
3 Because narratives are a natural and common way to construct experience they are seen
as useful to:
• facilitate empathy between interviewers and interviewees
• allow interviewees to find their voice through a dialogue with the interviewer that is
largely based on the interviewees’ own experience
Disadvantages of narratives
1 Very little safeguard against bias
2 Rigorous appraisal methods are not used
3 Analysis of collected information is often subjective
4 Researchers’ opinions may be mixed together with evidence
197
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
Process Description
Individual experiences Interested in exploring the experiences of an individual
Chronology of the Researcher analyses and writes about an individual life using a
experiences time sequence or chronology of events and then orders these events in
a way that makes sense to a reader
Collecting individual A story in narrative research is a first-person oral telling or retelling
stories of an individual, which has a beginning, middle and end. These involve
a predicament, conflict, or struggle; a protagonist or character; and a
sequence with implied causality (a plot) during which the predicament
is resolved in some fashion. Like a novel, stories have time, place, plot
and scene and use varied sources of data to comprise the data base
Restorying During restorying the researcher gathers stories and analyses them for
elements of the story. During this phase the researcher rewrites the
story to place it in a chronological sequence so as to provide a causal
link among ideas. This information includes interaction, continuity and
situation. The process involves:
• transcription: researcher conducts the interview and transcribes the
conversation from an audiotape
• retranscription: identifying the key elements of the story; codes
used by the researcher to identify setting, characters’ actions,
problem and resolution in the transcript
• restorying: organizing the key codes into a sequence
Coding for themes Themes provide the complexity of the story and add depth to the
insight about understanding an individual’s experiences
Context or setting Describes the context or setting for the individual stories:
• includes the people involved in the story
• includes the physical setting
• setting may be described before events or actions, or can be woven
throughout the study
Collaboration with During this phase the inquirer actively involves the participant in the
participants inquiry as it unfolds. The strategies include:
• negotiating relationships
• involving participants in the process of research
• negotiating transitions in the research process
198
NARRATIVE INQUIRY
Mishler (1995) has organized narrative studies according to three types of central research
issues. First, reference and temporal order refers to the relationship between the order in which
events actually happened and the order in which they are told in narration. Second, textual
coherence and structure concerns the linguistic and narrative strategies on which the story is
constructed. Finally, narrative functions deals with the broader place of the story within the
greater society or culture.
According to Creswell (2008), there are key characteristics of narrative design, these are
identified within Table 12.3.
Labov (1972, 1982) suggested that a ‘fully formed’ (narrative) includes six common
elements: (1) an abstract (summary of the substance of the narrative); (2) orientation (time,
place, situation, participants); (3) complicating action (sequence of events); (4) evaluation
(significance and meaning of the action, attitude of the narrator); (5) resolution (what finally
happened); and (6) coda (returns the perspective to the present). With these structures a
teller constructs a story from a primary experience and interprets the significance of events
in clauses and embedded evaluation (Reissman, 1987, p. 19).
Identify a phenomenon
Validate the accuracy
that addresses an
of the report
educational problem
199
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
Validating narratives
Riessman (1993) acknowledged that there is no single way of evaluating narrative research.
She wrote: ‘There is no canonical approach in interpretive work, no recipes and formulas,
and different validation procedures may be better suited to some research problems than
others’ (p. 69). Even so, she offered a few criteria for evaluation. First, she suggested that
validation be conceived of as trustworthiness of the text. If the reader finds the text to be
honest (perhaps no elaborations or misguiding in telling the story of Lance Armstrong’s doping
scandal), it is a starting point for a positive evaluation. Riessman further noted the
persuasiveness, coherence and the pragmatic usefulness of the text as standards for evaluating
the research. Noting the difficulty of establishing criteria for evaluating qualitative work,
Sparkes (2002) recommends verisimilitude, rather than validity, as a starting point. The extent
to which a story evokes a sense of truth within its readers is the foundation for the story’s
worth. Sparkes reviewed other scholars’ views on evaluation as well, and included in his list
of possible evaluative criteria items such as coherence, insightfulness, parsimony (Lieblich,
Tuval-Mashiach, and Zilber, 1998); fairness and authenticity (Lincoln and Guba, 2000);
substantive contribution, aesthetic merit, reflexivity, impact and expression of a reality
(Richardson, 2000). A summary of other criteria to evaluate narrative research is provided
in Table 12.5.
Process Description
Telling It is essential for the researcher to provide a facilitating context to encourage
those who are interviewed to tell complete stories about important moments in
their lives. Open-ended questions allow respondents to construct answers.
Riessman (1993) advises a mixture of open-ended questions (to elicit
narratives) and closed-ended questions or self-administered questionnaires (for
later quantification).
Transcribing Riessman (1993) advises that the researcher begin by getting the entire
interview, including both words and selected features (crying, long pauses,
laughter), on paper in a first draft. Then portions can be selected for
retranscription.
Analyzing Upon looking at different possibilities for reading, interpreting, and analyzing
life stories and other narrative materials, two main independent dimensions
emerge—those of (a) holistic versus categorical approaches and (b) content
versus form.
200
NARRATIVE INQUIRY
Reliability
In narrative studies, reliability usually refers to the dependability of the data, and careful,
systematic procedures to ensure the closest possible representation from the raw data stage
through that of analysis and the written report are indeed necessary criteria for judging narrative
work. A criticism that is launched against narrative studies on the issue of dependability –
that of the truthfulness of the original narrative – however, deserves some attention.
Lysaght (2001) captures the fundamental place of the narrative in our society, saying
‘narratives are said to fashion our lives, providing the structure for our day-to-day existence
and they propel us into a future that is shaped by our lived experiences of them’ (Lysaght,
2001, p. 64). While narratives are the fundamental means of making ourselves intelligible to
one another, they provide the framework by which humans convey valuable cultural
information. Values and norms on doping, cheating and other sport scandals can be passed
on to future generations by storytelling or narratives. Barthes (1996) summarizes this state
of affairs thus:
The narratives of the world are without number, the narrative is present at all times,
in all places, in all societies; history of narrative begins with the history of mankind,
there does not exist, and never has existed, a people without narratives. (p. 1)
Narratives therefore, bind the facts of our existence together, to enable people to find meaning
and continuity in seemingly complex lives (Beattie, 2000).
201
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
Rinehart argues for the use of personal narrative and personal storytelling in Sport
Management Research methodology, which might result in the asking of different
questions and in write-ups that could serve to invigorate sport management studies. He adds
that this method of research answers different, interactionist-based questions for researchers
delving into how sport management affects people and how sport managers interact with
others.
The possibilities for use of personal narrative within sport management are expanding
all the time, as formerly discrete academic disciplines borrow from one another,
creating new forms and new uses for old forms. As was pointed out earlier, sport
management scholars and practitioners might gain knowledge and understanding from
personal experience narratives. This type of research can provide deep understanding
that could lead to structural changes in human resource management, marketing,
advertising, policy studies, and leadership training for practitioners of sport
management. (p. 517)
Smith and Weed (2007) propose the following orienting propositions for narrative
inquiry in general, and for sport and tourism research in particular: (1) meaning is central to
being human, and being human entails actively construing meaning; (2) meaning is created
through narrative, and thus is a storied effort; (3) narratives are created within relationships,
and thus storytelling relations are a vital condition for making narrative meaningful;
(4) narratives are constructed within relationships as a result of human agency; and (5)
narratives are a constitutive force. These propositions could be similarly applied to the sport
management context.
202
NARRATIVE INQUIRY
The potential of narrative research in sports tourism. Smith, B. and Weed, M.,
(2007). Journal of Sport and Tourism, 12(3–4), 249–269.
Narrative inquiry, as one way of theorizing and conducting qualitative research, has not been
considered by researchers interested in the relationship between sport and tourism, although
there is an increasing debate about the greater use of interpretive qualitative research in
this area. In a modest effort to galvanize researchers and offer a direction for scholarship,
this article seeks to explore narrative as one form of interpretive research. They argue an
understanding of what narrative inquiry can be by laying out a theoretical basis for this kind
of research, and making a case for the relevance of narrative as an alternative methodology.
Next, consideration is given to conducting narrative research in sports tourism. The article
closes by suggesting that narrative inquiry is a germane way of theorizing and doing research
within sports tourism.
Derek recalled:
Everything I had worked for was finished. I hated everybody. I hated the world. I
hated hamstrings. I hated it all. I felt so bitter that I was injured again. I told
myself I had to finish. I kept hopping round. Then, with 100 metres to go, I felt
a hand on my shoulder. It was my old man. (The Guardian, 1992)
Derek’s father, Jim, had attended almost every race, and avoided security to run on the track
to assist Derek to the finish line. Jim supported Derek all the way to the last few steps, where
Derek hopped on one leg through the finish line. He finished.
203
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
Derek’s official time was ‘DNF’ (did not finish) because he was aided to the finish line.
Nevertheless, the 65,000 fans in attendance gave them a standing ovation in appreciation
of their true Olympic spirit.
Derek won many races, but he is remembered most for his DNF.
QUESTIONS
1 How can this short story be used as a basis of a narrative inquiry? What steps would
you take to expand the story into a narrative inquiry?
2 What cultural norms and values (themes) can be extracted from this story? To what
other contexts or settings can these themes be transferred?
CONCLUSION
Narrative inquiry as a research methodology has the potential to engage the sport management
researcher in the reflective practice of lived experiences. This then allows the researcher to
understand the complex nature of the sport practitioner, or sport management practitioner’s
world. The narrative process of writing, sharing, reflecting and then analysis can work to
improve sport management knowledge and practice.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
With a basic understanding now of the key elements of narrative inquiry, attempt to answer
the following questions:
n Identify two ways in which narrative inquiry can be used in Sport Management
Research.
n Discuss the importance of critical reflection to the narrative inquiry process.
204
NARRATIVE INQUIRY
Gudsmundsdottir, S. (1991). Story maker, story teller: Narrative structures in the curriculum.
Journal of Curriculum Studies, 23(3): 207–218.
Richardson, L. (2000). Writing: A Method of Inquiry. In N. K. Denzin and Y. S. Lincoln (eds.),
Handbook of qualitative research (2nd edn, pp. 923–948). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Rinehart, R. E. (2005). ‘Experiencing’ sport management: The use of personal narrative in sport
management studies. Journal of Sport Management, 19(4), 497–522.
Sparkes, A. C. (2002). Telling tales in sport and physical activity: A qualitative journey. Champaign:
Human Kinetics.
205
Chapter 13
LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of this chapter, you should be able to:
KEY TERMS
Hermeneutic phenomenology – a phenomenological interpretation that seeks to unveil hidden
meanings in phenomena.
Theory – a well-substantiated explanation of some aspect of the natural world; an organized
system of accepted knowledge that applies in a variety of circumstances to explain a
specific set of phenomena.
KEY THEMES
n Can phenomenology be used as a research methodology in Sport Management Research?
n What are some of the uses of phenomenology for Sport Management Research?
206
PHENOMNOLOGY AND THE LIVED EXPERIENCE
CHAPTER OVERVIEW
Phenomenology aims to investigate and comprehend the lived experience of its participants.
In sport management literature, phenomenology offers researchers a different perspective
while providing the opportunity to explore previously unchartered waters. This chapter will
provide an introduction and overview to the major concepts of phenomenology, as well as
provide some suggestions as to possible frameworks from which to apply the phenomenological
methodology to Sport Management Research.
INTRODUCTION
Defining phenomenology is complex. Phenomenology is a method of philosophical inquiry
that lays stress on the impressions of a reader. The reader is the main figure to determine the
meanings of a given text. The name Husserl (1931) gave to his philosophical method is
phenomenology. As a methodology, phenomenology has become increasingly employed in
social science research, and has the potential to be used with great effectiveness in the field
of Sport Management Research.
WHAT IS PHENOMENOLOGY?
Phenomenology describes ‘how one orients to lived experience’. From a phenomenological
point of view, to do research is always to ‘question the way we experience the world, to
want to know the world in which we live as human beings’ (Van Manen, 1990, p. 5).
Phenomenology as a philosophy
Phenomenology derives from the Greek word phainomenon, which means ‘to show itself’
(Husserl, 1931) or ‘what shows itself; the self-showing; the manifest’ and is ‘thus the totality
of what lies in the light of day or can be brought to light’ (Heidegger, 1977, pp. 74–75).
Phenomenology is a philosophy, or a variety of distinctive yet related philosophies. However,
it is also concerned with approach and method. Husserl (1931) considered phenomenology
to be all three, philosophy, approach and method. As a philosophy, phenomenologists hold
differing views on epistemological and ontological questions and therefore on the way
phenomena may reveal themselves through the phenomenological process. Thus, the character
of phenomenology is diverse, and the assumptions inherent in the various phenomenological
approaches to understanding, and the methods they advocate, differ greatly. Three main
approaches have been identified in phenomenology. The key features and researchers in these
areas will now be discussed briefly.
Phenomenology as a philosophy/history
This can be viewed as three forms: transcendental, hermeneutic and existential. Transcendental
phenomenology as methodology began with Husserl (1931) who presented an alternative way
of thinking offered by positive philosophy. Instead of trying to explain minds in terms of
207
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
matter, or vice versa, Husserl demanded that each experience must be taken in its own right
as it shows itself and as one is conscious of it. Husserl reflected that to truly understand a
phenomenon one needed to bracket oneself or suspend all biases and assumptions. He used
the term Epoche to describe this bracketing of prior assumptions. In Husserl’s conception,
phenomenology is primarily concerned with making the structures of consciousness, and the
phenomena that appear in acts of consciousness, objects of systematic reflection and analysis.
Such reflection was to take place from a highly modified ‘first person’ viewpoint, studying
phenomena not as they appear to ‘my’ consciousness, but to any consciousness whatsoever.
For example, examining values associated with youth sports (competitiveness, sport for all,
optimal development, etc.) from as many viewpoints as possible to encompass all readers’
viewpoints. Husserl believed that phenomenology could thus provide a firm basis for all human
knowledge, including scientific knowledge, and could establish philosophy as a ‘rigorous
science’.
Husserl (1931) hoped to develop a philosophy that would deepen our understanding of
how objects, or phenomena, are experienced and present themselves to our consciousness.
He looked to answer the question ‘how do we know?’ by examining and describing the world-
as-experienced by the participants of the inquiry. Husserl referred to this world of lived
experience as the life-world (Lebenswelt) (Spiegelberg, 1982). It is in this world that much is
considered commonplace and taken for granted. Husserl believed that we need to explore
the ‘essential’ features of this experienced world. He argued that lived experience should be
used as a tool to gain access to experiences of phenomena in their original form, as part of
an individual’s everyday physical reality.
Heidegger’s existential phenomenology reinterpreted phenomenology and its methods. His
phenomenology is existential, a perspective that insists that the observer cannot be separated
from the world, and that an understanding of the person cannot occur in isolation from the
person’s world. Heidegger (1962) saw humans as beings that experience objects in particular
and individual ways, and proposed a particular form of hermeneutic phenomenology in his
pursuit of the meaning of being. This new approach had a considerable influence on the
development of existential phenomenology. In his hermeneutical work, Heidegger employed
two notions, the hermeneutic circle and historicity of understanding. Heidegger’s emphasis
is on being-in-the-world (dasein) and how phenomena present themselves in lived experience,
in human existence (van Manen, 1990). Heideggerian phenomenology asks ‘what does it mean
to be a person?’ and holds that the answer to this is found in dasein or being already in the
world. As such, it deals with questions of human existence by seeking the meaning of being.
Heidegger was concerned with what he considered the essential philosophical (and human)
question: what is it ‘to be’?
Hermeneutic phenomenology concerns how one orients to lived experience, and van Manen
(1994) suggested that it is, in a broad sense, a philosophy or theory of the unique. Van Manen
was strongly influenced by Merleau-Ponty’s philosophy. He explains how phenomenology
differs from almost every other science in that it attempts to gain insightful descriptions of
the way we experience the world. How do sport fans from all over the world each experience
a World Cup? Max van Manen (1990) proposed:
208
PHENOMNOLOGY AND THE LIVED EXPERIENCE
phenomenology does not offer us the possibility of effective theory with which we
can now explain and/or control the world but rather it offers us the possibility of
plausible insight, which brings us in more direct contact with the world. (pp. 37–38)
Rather than seeking a judgement about facts or reality, the aim of phenomenology is to gain
people’s understanding, opinions and expressions of feelings. In other words, rather than
generating theories or general explanation, phenomenology aims to describe the experience
as it exists. And the World Cup experience will likely exist differently for different people,
based on their cultural and personal experiences and interpretations of those experiences. It
is about expressing thoughts and perceptions of phenomena in the form of language in speech
or writing (van Manen, 1990). It is about describing the essence of the experience and a fuller
understanding of the nature of the experience.
Max van Manen (1990) uses an eclectic approach that he calls ‘hermeneutic phenom-
enology’. Based on the philosophical works of Heidegger, hermeneutic phenomenology, as
outlined by van Manen (1990), is a process of exploring one’s interests and understandings
of a phenomenon, uncovering the essence of that phenomenon by gathering and interpreting
‘raw data’ from those living it, and offering implications for practice. The ‘raw data’ of a
phenomenological study are personal experiences, often complemented with poetry,
biography, art or literature. Hence the remark that hermeneutic phenomenology is ‘both
descriptive and interpretive’ (p. 180).
Van Manen (1990) outlined the essentials of phenomenological research as: the study of
lived experience; the explication of phenomena as they present themselves to conscious-
ness, rather than as conceptualized, categorized or theorized; the study of essences of
experience that asks, not ‘how’, but rather, what is the ‘nature’ of the experience; the
description of experiential meanings we live as we live them, examples of which are designed
to enable us to see the structure or the deeper significance of the experience being described;
the human scientific study of phenomena in that it is systematic, explicit, inter-subjective,
self-critical and examines structures of the lived, human world (rather than the natural world);
the attentive practice of thoughtfulness whose language awakens a person to the meaning of
the experience; a search for what it means to be human, which may be achieved by more
deeply understanding human experience; and a poetizing activity insofar as its language
reverberates in the world rather than speaking ‘of’ it, and so the poem itself is the result
rather than a conclusion or summary of the phenomenological study. Table 13.1 outlines
what phenomenologists ‘do’.
Phenomenology in the field of sport management serves as a theoretical framework that
privileges participants’ lived experience. As such, phenomenological sport management
researchers seek to learn what is central to the phenomena being studied. Research conducted
from a phenomenological perspective allows participants to communicate their experience
without the meaning being significantly altered by the sport management researcher, and can
aid in the empowerment of participants by encouraging them to speak about their own
experiences.
In general it is proposed that there are a number of strengths and weaknesses associated with
phenomenological research. Some of these have been summarized in Table 13.2 (p. 211).
209
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
Phenomenologists
• REJECT scientific realism (objects exist independently of our knowledge of their existence).
• DISAGREE that the empirical sciences are better methods to describe the features of the
world.
• DESCRIBE the ordinary, conscious experience of things.
• OPPOSE the acceptance of unobservable things.
• REJECT naturalism and positivism.
• BELIEVE objects in the natural world, cultural world, and abstract objects (like numbers
and consciousness) can be made evident and thus known.
• RECOGNIZE the role of description prior to explanation by means of causes, purposes, or
grounds.
• DEBATE whether Husserl’s transcendental epoche and reduction is useful or even possible.
• STUDY the ‘life-world’ (the taken-for-granted pattern of everyday living).
Descriptive phenomenology
Descriptive phenomenology emphasizes descriptions of human experience. It insists on the
careful description of ordinary conscious experience of everyday life – a description of
‘things’ as people experience them. These ‘things’ include hearing, seeing, believing, feeling,
remembering, deciding, evaluating, acting, etc. A descriptive phenomenology of a participant’s
experience in a charity marathon may detail as many ‘things’ as possible in order to provide
a holistic capture of the experience.
210
PHENOMNOLOGY AND THE LIVED EXPERIENCE
Interpretive/hermeneutic phenomenology
Interpretive phenomenology stresses the interpretation and understanding, and not just
description of, human experience. An interpretive phenomenologist would go beyond
describing the ‘things’ of the marathon participant, and elaborate on the meanings and
connections of certain ‘things’ (e.g. the importance of seeing family members cheering along
the course).
n Hermeneutic generally refers to the art and philosophy of interpreting the meaning of
an object.
n The goals of interpretive phenomenology are to enter another’s world and to discover
the practical wisdom, possibilities and understandings found there.
211
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
This phenomenology attempts to interpret the perceptions we have of the human body as it
relates to the sporting experience. It discusses the embodiment of physical skills through
repetitive engagement of the living world (ground, air, objects, etc.) specific to each athlete
and sport.
Table 13.3 lists some of the contrasts between descriptive and interpretive phenomenology.
Kerry and Armour (2000) argue that researchers who choose to employ an existential
phenomenological research approach must provide sound conceptual rationale for using this
specific method of inquiry. Existential phenomenological research consists of a sequence of
interrelated steps.
Descriptive Interpretive
Believe it is possible to suspend personal opinion There are endless numbers of realities
to arrive at a single, essential, descriptive
presentation of a phenomenon
Think that if there is more than one reality, that Interpretations are all we have, because
leaves doubt, ignorance, and a lack of clarity description IS an interpretive process
Husserl followers Heidegger followers
212
PHENOMNOLOGY AND THE LIVED EXPERIENCE
to sharpen this focus, a bracketing interview is conducted. During this interview the primary
investigator is interviewed by another researcher familiar with the phenomenological research
process.
The goal of the bracketing interview is for the primary investigator to identify his or her
presuppositions from the very outset of the research project (Dale, 1996). Does the sport
phenomenologist have biases towards certain sports, teams, competitions, etc. that may tarnish
the investigation? By making biases visible, the researcher is positioned to be a good listener
during the interview process and is less likely to mix his or her own beliefs with the experience
of the participant.
contrast to the ‘idiographic’) level of hermeneutic analysis (Pollio, Henley, and Thompson,
1997). During this step the researcher attempts to develop a single general or overall thematic
structure for all of the interviews.
PHENOMENOLOGICAL ‘TRADITION’
In contrast to both Husserl and Heidegger, van Manen (1990) spoke of there being no ‘method’
as such if this is understood as a set of procedures, but rather of ‘ways’ or ‘paths’ leading to
‘clearings’. These paths cannot be determined by fixed signposts – they need to be discovered
or invented as a response to the question in hand. He spoke, however, of a ‘tradition’ – a
set of guides and recommendations that form the basis of a principled form of enquiry. This
tradition is presented as ‘methodological structure’ in which hermeneutic phenomenological
research is seen as a dynamic interplay among six research activities. Van Manen lists these
six activities as:
From this perspective the source of phenomenological research is the life-world. The aim is
to create a dialogue between practical concerns and lived experience through engaged
reasoning and imaginative dwelling in the immediacy of the participants’ worlds (van Manen,
1990).
RESEARCH ISSUES
Data saturation
Many qualitative researchers use the term ‘data saturation’ to suggest when enough data have
been collected. Saturation is a term that refers to the repetition of discovered information
and confirmation of previously collected data. ‘An inquirer does not involve an exhaustive
number of participants, but identifies when the data has revealed itself to be rich, diverse and
significant enough to illuminate for readers an experience that leads to a deeper understanding
214
PHENOMNOLOGY AND THE LIVED EXPERIENCE
of the phenomenon. The phenomenologist knows that one’s own experiences are also the
possible experiences of others’ (van Manen 1990, p. 54).
Phenomenological sampling
In phenomenological inquiry, purposeful sampling is commonly used. This method of sampling
selects individuals for study participation based on their particular knowledge of a phenomenon,
for the purpose of sharing that knowledge: for example, asking athletes on a championship
winning team to describe that experience over asking any athletes (winners or not) to describe
the experience.
215
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
enhancement of sport management knowledge, and stimulate changes in the sport management
process.
Phenomenological research is seen as a co-creation between researcher and participants
rather than an observation of objects or behaviours. It is also said that phenomenology strives
to bring language, perceptions and descriptions of human experience, with all types of
phenomena, to enhance understanding.
Sports management researchers have already effectively utilized the phenomenological
hermeneutic research method when studying human experiences. For example McAllister
(2006) utilized phenomenology to explore how women administrators perceive the benefits
of competitive sport experiences. Edwards and Skinner (2009) provide additional information
on the application of phenomenology to sport management.
The purpose of this qualitative phenomenological research study was to examine the lived
experiences and perceptions of 25 former National Football League (NFL) players regarding
the financial decisions they made when active as players for information that could lead to
an appropriate model for making good financial decisions. Determined in the qualitative
phenomenological study were the influential factors identified by the participants in the study
that focused on financial decisions made by former NFL players. The study revealed five
themes: (1) wealth enablers, (2) wealth killers, (3) challenges, (4) attitudes and (5) wealth
weak spots.
CONCLUSION
This chapter has explored and examined the concepts and methods of phenomenology. With
the aim of studying and understanding the ‘lived experience’, phenomenology offers sports
management researchers the opportunity to delve into previously under-researched
phenomena. A phenomenological research approach has value in that it critically analyses
phenomena as they present in sport and sport management for deeper understanding of the
universal meanings of the phenomena that occur in these fields. Phenomenology can be used
to address some of the more under-explored areas in Sport Management Research such as
the lived experiences of athletes attempting to excel in a non-traditional gender-specific
sport, or the daily experiences of a sport manager operating at an elite level in a worldwide
216
PHENOMNOLOGY AND THE LIVED EXPERIENCE
sporting event, where the sport management researcher seeks to understand the human
condition as much as the lived experience of the phenomenon itself. For this reason, such
research can lead one in the direction of uncovering the meaning of lived experience from
the subjective perspectives of the persons who participate. This approach therefore has the
ability to foster understanding of many of the complex and perplexing conditions in which
sport managers find themselves.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
Phenomenology seeks to identify and understand the lived experience of individuals. With a
basic understanding now of phenomenology, an alternative to the more traditional
methodologies associated with Sport Management Research, attempt to answer the following
questions:
n Is there any place within Sport Management Research for phenomenology? Explain
your reasons.
n Identify those key features of Husserl’s and Heidegger’s approach to phenomenology
that you believe would enable an effective analysis of the lived experience of a sport
manager.
217
Chapter 14
Emerging qualitative
approaches for the sport
management researcher to
consider
LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of this chapter you should be able to:
n recognize some key features of social network theory, whiteness studies, race/critical
race theory, disability studies, visual sociology and participant authored audiovisual
stories;
n distinguish between these different emerging methodologies;
n identify some applications of these methodologies to Sport Management Research;
n understand the concepts of postcolonialism and globalization;
n identify some implications of the application of postcolonialism and globalization
approaches to research in sport management;
n distinguish between postcolonialism and globalization;
n reflect on how the process of globalization has impacted on world sport.
KEY TERMS
Social network – is a social structure made of nodes (which are generally individuals or
organizations) that are tied by one or more specific types of interdependency, such as
values, visions, ideas, financial exchange, friendship, kinship, dislike, conflict or trade.
Race/critical race theory – investigates the social constructions of race and discrimination
that are present in society.
Disability studies – an interdisciplinary field of study that is focused on the contributions,
experiences, history and culture of people with disabilities.
Visual sociology – a research approach concerned with the visual dimensions of social
life.
218
EMERGING QUALITATIVE APPROACHES
Participant authored audiovisual stories – deal with qualitative research methodology based
on sound and image data, in particular with audiovisual stories authored by the research
participants.
Postcolonialism – challenges Western science as the unique source of knowledge production
and uncovers inequities related to gender, race and class resulting from the process of
colonization and post-colonization.
Globalization – in general terms it is a means to explain the intricacy and variability of the
ways in which the world is restructuring.
KEY THEMES
n What is social network theory?
n What is whiteness studies?
n What are race theory and critical race theory?
n What is disability studies?
n What is visual sociology?
n What are participant authored audiovisual stories?
n What are postcolonialism and globalization?
n What are the potential benefits from applying these research designs to sport
management contexts?
n What are the implications for applying postcolonialism and globalization theories to
Sport Management Research processes?
CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter provides an outline of some emerging issues for future Sport Management
Research and demonstrates how they can be situated in the Sport Management Research field.
Social network theory, whiteness studies, race and critical race studies, disability studies,
visual sociology, participant authored audiovisual stories; postcolonialism and globalization
are research methods that need to be considered for future research projects. Each in its own
way presents opportunities for sport management knowledge to be extended through its
application. This chapter briefly outlines the basic principles that underpin these approaches
and suggests how they might be applied in the field of sport management.
INTRODUCTION
Research in the field of sport management is still perceived as neutral and apolitical, which
explains why sensitive issues related to race, gender and class need to evolve. A diversity of
219
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
perspectives such as those outlined in this chapter equip us to meet the epistemological
imperative of giving voice to subjugated knowledge and the social mandates of uncovering
existing inequities and addressing the social aspects of sport.
To varying degrees, sport management researchers have been slow to embrace approaches
utilized in the social sciences. However, these research approaches have the potential to become
acceptable forms of research within sport management.
220
EMERGING QUALITATIVE APPROACHES
networks, (also known as egocentric networks) the ties that specified people have, such as
their ‘personal communities’.
The analytic tendencies that distinguish social network analysis are identified as follows:
n There is no assumption that groups are the building blocks of society: the approach is
open to studying less-bounded social systems, from non-local communities to links
among web sites.
n Rather than treating individuals (persons, organizations, states) as discrete units of
analysis, it focuses on how the structure of ties affects individuals and their
relationships.
n In contrast to analyses that assume that socialization into norms determines behaviour,
network analysis looks to see the extent to which the structure and composition of ties
affect norms.
The shape of a social network helps determine a network’s worth to its individuals. Networks
that are smaller can be less useful to their members than networks with lots of loose
connections (weak ties) to individuals outside the main network. On the other hand, more
open networks with many weak ties and social connections, are more likely to introduce
new ideas and opportunities to their members than closed networks with many redundant
ties. In other words, a sport organization that discusses things with each other or hires
from the same network of people already shares the same knowledge and opportunities.
A sport organization with connections to other social worlds is likely to have access to a
wider range of information. A sport organization may be more successful if they have
connections to a variety of networks rather than many connections within a single network.
Similarly, individuals can exercise influence or act as brokers within their social networks by
bridging two networks that are not directly linked. This process is known as filling structural
holes.
The power of social network analysis stems from its difference from traditional social
scientific studies, which assume that it is the attributes of individual actors that determine
whether they are friendly or unfriendly. Social network analysis produces an alternate view,
where the attributes of individuals are less important than their relationships and ties with
other actors within the network. This approach has turned out to be useful for explaining
many real-world phenomena, but leaves less room for individual agency, the ability for
individuals to influence their success, because so much of it rests within the structure of their
network.
Social networks have also been used as a method for exploring ways in which organizations
interact with each other, characterizing the many informal connections that link sport
executives together, as well as associations and connections between individual employees at
different sport organizations. To illustrate, power within sport organizations often comes
more from the degree to which an individual within a network is at the centre of many
relationships than an actual job title. Social networks also play a key role in recruiting in
sport organizations, in business success and in job performance. Networks also provide ways
for organizations to gather information, deter competition and collude in setting prices or
policies.
221
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
by providing analytical tools for overturning some of the under-socialized and over-
socialized limitations of the more conventional research methods, social network
techniques may indeed prove to be a valuable methodological approach for
investigating even more diverse topics and domains in the field of sport management.
(p. 11)
222
EMERGING QUALITATIVE APPROACHES
The works of Kuhn (1996) and other scholars on the social construction of knowledge suggest
that great insight can be gained about an academic field of study by investigating interaction
patterns between and among scholars. Using a social network perspective, the intent of this
study was to empirically explore the social interaction patterns among scholars in the field
of sport management. A network model of co-authorship was generated using several rounds
of sampling of scholars in the field and archival data collection from relevant journals. The
derived network structure was then explored both visually and quantitatively for meaningful
patterns. The results of the study essentially tell a story of the evolution and current state
of the field’s collaboration structure. Drawing on propositions from the literature on the
sociology of scientific knowledge generation, the findings are discussed relative to what the
obtained network structure might hold for sport management scholarship.
223
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
Reality bites? The cultural politics of Generation X and youthful white masculinities
in sport and popular culture in 1990s America. Kusz, K. W. (2003). Unpublished
doctoral dissertation. University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign. 3086108
In this dissertation, Kusz produces a critical conjunctural analysis of the themes and meanings
articulated with a number of youthful white masculinities throughout the 1990s in American
sport and popular culture that are simultaneously constituted by, and constitutive of, the
Generation X discursive formation of this era. He highlights how 1990s American popular
culture offers images of white males as different, victimized, marginalized, unprivileged and
as both hyper-masculinized and feminized. According to Kusz, such images of white
masculinity are best understood as instruments and effects of a white male backlash politics
that seeks to disavow and deny the privileged position of white masculinity in order to re-
secure its central, privileged and normative position within a historical conjuncture of social,
cultural, political and economic changes that have threatened it. He proposes that his
investigations of these various cultural productions of youthful white masculinity within
American sport and popular culture during the 1990s are grounded in the ideas of the British
cultural studies tradition and the relatively new field of whiteness studies.
224
EMERGING QUALITATIVE APPROACHES
225
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
CRT thought has been applied in a variety of contexts where socialized and institutionalized
oppression of racial minorities has been litigated in the courts. Football (soccer) players from
many countries have been the subject of racist chants and comments. Despite FIFA’s attempts
to develop policies to rid this racism from the game, particular problems remain. In a non-
sporting context Delgado and Stefancic (1993) draw on CRT in calling for tort action for
racial insults, looking to the historical action of speech and the serious psychological harm
inflicted on its victims as just measure for evaluating hate speech. The application of this type
of research would be useful to sport administrators.
White eyes on Black bodies: History, performance, and resistance in the National
Basketball Association. Griffin, R. (2008). Unpublished doctoral dissertation.
University of Denver. 3320573
226
EMERGING QUALITATIVE APPROACHES
From this perspective, sport managers may investigate the influence of specific ethnic groups
and their position in sport within defined cultural contexts: for example, the influence of
Latino players in US baseball, African football players, sport in ethnic groups and the problems
of integration.
This study posed two questions: first, are there any significant differences related to ethnicity
in the five social cognitive career theory factors? Second, is there a significant difference
between an athlete’s interest and intention in the coaching career based on the ethnicity of
his position as coach or coordinator? A sample of student-athletes (N = 134) who were
members of the football team at three Division I institutions in the South-east were targeted.
The results indicated differences between black and white athletes for both self-efficacy
(p = .009) and barriers (p < .0005).
Cultural identity: Sport, gender, nationalism and the Irish diaspora. Black, M. F.
(1997). Unpublished doctoral dissertation. University of California, Berkeley.
9803128
227
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
This ethnography is based on fieldwork carried out in the San Francisco Bay Area between
1992 and 1996. The research was conducted on two groups of Irish-born immigrants. One
group of men were part of a Gaelic football team, and the other group of women played on
a soccer team. This work explores issues of cultural identity and examines how identity is
invented, reinvented, negotiated and changed. The study lends support to the notion that
identity is dynamic, always ‘in process’ (Hall, 1993). It notes how identity is mediated by
sport, nationalism, gender and globalizing forces and effects. This research also demonstrates
how myths of national and ethnic identity are subject to manipulation and revision. All involved
struggled with the ‘doubleness’ of the diasporan experience, which both weakened and
strengthened their sense of connection to the homeland. In leaving their homeland their Irish
identities were modified or ‘translated’ (Hall, 1993). They forged new identities in the US
without simply assimilating and losing their ‘Irish’ identities completely. They could no longer
associate with one particular ‘home’ as they were now part of several ‘homes’. For the men
in this study Gaelic games, masculinity and nationalism were all interwoven. Although they
made conscious efforts to renew and intensify their Irishness in the US, their experience in
the Bay Area had changed them in that they now considered Ireland with some ambivalence.
This study also indicated how the context of sport was an ideal site for examining the
renegotiation of identity.
228
EMERGING QUALITATIVE APPROACHES
Disability studies
• should be interdisciplinary/multidisciplinary
• should challenge the view of disability as an individual deficit or defect that can be remedied
solely through medical intervention or rehabilitation by ‘experts’ and other service providers
• should study national and international perspectives, policies literature, culture and history
with the aim of placing current ideas of disability within their broadest possible context
• should actively encourage participation in disabled students and faculty, and should ensure
physical and intellectual access
• should make a priority to have leadership positions held by disabled people, at the same
time it is important to create an environment where contributions from anyone who shares
the above goals are welcome
Research in this area is urgently needed. The Special Olympics and Paralympics provide
important fertile ground for research as opposed to ploughing back over the same farrowed
fields of professional sport. Gilbert and Schantz (2008) have added to this area of Sport
Management Research on disability through their publication of an edited book on the
Paralympics.
This study uses content analysis of newspaper articles and athlete biographical/
autobiographical sources to examine the constructions of masculinity of male and female
athletes at the 2008 Paralympic Summer Games in Beijing, China. Based on the socially
constructed tension between disability and masculinity and the connections between sport
and masculinity, this study sought examples that support or challenge the portrayal of
Paralympic athletes in hegemonic masculine terms. This study finds that in the majority of
cases, both sets of data sources reflect and/or reinforce the association between sport and
hegemonic masculinity. This public display of masculinity indicates the athletes’ attempt to
attain mainstream acceptance and legitimacy as ‘real’ athletes as much as it does a rejection
of a collective disability identity.
229
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
sociological research itself. The research brief below is a sport example of this form of visual
sociology research. In a sport management context researchers could, for example, use a
combination of narrative and photographs to seek a more effective way of understanding just
how facility managers see and experience their environment on game day. The importance
of subjecting routine understandings and practices to detailed analysis in this way allows the
lives of these ‘social actors’ to be analysed in a unique way and provide new understanding
of their ‘lived experiences’.
Seeing the way: Visual sociology and the distance runner’s perspective. Hockey,
J. and Collinson, J. A. (2006). Visual Studies, 21(1), 70–81.
Employing visual and autoethnographic data from a two-year research project on distance
runners, this research examined the activity of seeing in relation to the activity of distance
running. One of its methodological aims is to develop the linkage between visual and auto-
ethnographic data in combining an observation-based narrative and sociological analysis
with photographs. This combination aimed to convey to the reader not only some of the
specific sub-cultural knowledge and particular ways of seeing, but also something of the
runner’s embodied feelings and experience of momentum en route. Via the combination of
narrative and photographs the authors sought a more effective way of communicating just
how distance runners see and experience their training terrain.
and image data open up a vast field of opportunities, one that is rapidly capitalizing on many
of the twists and turns of societal change: from the fast development of audiovisual
technologies, and the improvements in digital communications, to the growing case made in
the social sciences against the hegemony of the written text and the incorporation of audiovisual
languages into our everyday lives (p. 3). Ramella and Olmos go on to describe the process
in the following way:
Described in a nutshell, research participants create their own stories around a more
or less determined problem. For this purpose they utilize audio-visual media, that
is, video cameras or photo-cameras or a radio, just to cite some. Further, they draw
on a variety of genre to organize their stories, for example, an autobiography, a
documentary or a drama. According to the genre selected, stories may include
personal testimonies, or fictional enactment of life episodes; they may also include
stories by other people (e.g. street interviews by research participants to lay people).
Here the list can be limitless. Also, being in possession of the audio-visual media
provide participants ample latitude to situate themselves, and importantly, their
stories. Situating a story should not be restricted to a physical location; it also means
situating it socially (who else is there?), and culturally (what is in it?). (p. 3)
PAAS has been successfully utilized in many projects and offers in particular the potential for
research participants to own the story, to express it and articulate it in close relation to their
everyday life social and cultural context (Ramella and Olmos, 2005).
232
EMERGING QUALITATIVE APPROACHES
Defining postcolonialism
Postcolonialism challenges Western science as the unique source of knowledge production
and uncovers inequities related to gender, race and class resulting from the process of
colonization and postcolonization. This discourse is especially pertinent to sport management
233
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
as it brings to the forefront these issues and makes explicit how these socially constructed
categories have been used in the colonizing process, and the effect that this has had on people’s
lives and life opportunities.
Colonization is defined by Said (2000) as: the expansive force of a people; it is its power
of reproduction; it is its enlargement and its multiplication through space; it is the subjugation
of the universe or the vast part of it to that people’s language, customs, ideas and laws.
Postcolonialism is the process of postcolonializing. Quayson (2000) suggests that to understand
this process (postcolonializing), it is necessary to disentangle the term, postcolonial, from
its implicit dimension of chronological supersession, that aspect of its prefix that suggests that
the colonial stage has been surpassed and left behind. It is important to highlight instead a
notion of the term as a process of coming into being and of struggle against colonialism and
its after-effects.
More specifically, the postcolonial approach is directed at uncovering the exclusionary
effects of dominant ideologies in ‘Othering’ other forms of knowledge – the subjugated
knowledge. Foucault (1980) defines subjugated knowledge as a whole set of knowledge that
has been disqualified as inadequate to its task or insufficiently elaborated: naïve knowledge,
located low down in the hierarchy, beneath the required level of cognition or scientificity.
According to Quayson (2000), postcolonialism focuses on dominant discourses and
ideologies that shape the social world to look at the material effects of subjugation. Subjugation
is the process by which imperialism and colonialism impose a condition of positional superiority
over the colonized (Said, 2000). The process is to ground contemporary world phenomena
such as immigration, unemployment, health problems, into the real world to unmask the
interrelations between these phenomena and new colonial ideologies. Consequently, the
researcher’s aim is to ‘relate modern-day phenomena to their explicit, implicit, or even
potential relations, to the heritage of colonialism’ (Quayson, 2000, p. 11) while decolonizing
methodologies and methods (Tuhiwai Smith, 1999), aim to critique the marginalizing effect
of Western science on subjugated knowledge.
Applying postcolonialism to Sport Management Research unveils the reductionist Western
discourse of essentializing the ‘Other’ in a unique, crystallized, neutral, rational and objectivist
cultural entity. As well, ‘decolonializing’ methodologies and methods are directed at disrupting
the power relations to voice subjugated knowledge. According to Hall (1997) subjectivities
emerge from: ‘the different constellation of social, cultural and economic forces . . . since
we are, in part, constructed as subjects through the particular layering of historical discourses,
which we inhabit, then new kinds of sensibilities begin to be clearly discernible’ (p. 247).
Postcolonial scholarship in Sport Management Research is limited; however, important work
has been produced in which issues and concerns of postcolonialism and sport are discussed.
intolerance, the harmful effects of racial, gendered and social discrimination on sport
management must be recognized. Postcolonial research is a theoretical perspective that
moves us away from the shortcomings of cultural essentialism, since culture cannot be
isolated from the broader social context within which it comes into play together with a
constellation of other structural factors. This theoretical approach provides the analytic lens
to examine the extent to which Sport Management Research and practice perpetuate
dominance through our everyday practice. However, it should be remembered that research
cannot be neutral, apolitical or ahistorical since sport management is governed by normalizing
discourses and practices.
Furthermore, there is the complex question of political commitment and its relation to
scholarly inquiry. Undoubtedly, it is a core issue to be addressed in sport management, and
postcolonial research provides the analytical framework to perform such reflection.
Nevertheless, postcolonial research warns us to distance ourselves from the expert role in
acknowledging the anthropological construction of sport. Democratization of Sport
Management Research can be realized by recognizing ‘subjugated knowledge’ as a legitimate
source of theorization, adapting sport management interventions to meet the needs of people
located at the margins of pluralist societies. If social justice is ever to be achieved in the sport
system, voices of the subaltern have to be heard. In this sense, postcolonialism questions the
appropriateness of culturist theories to correct such issues as managerial imbalances stemming
from social discrepancies and neocolonial ideologies.
Finally, postcolonialism is not specifically directed at developing knowledge for the sake
of knowledge. Giroux (2002) describes this strategy as the ‘most retrograde academic use’
(p. 98) of knowledge since it evacuates the possibilities of challenging the status quo. Anderson
(2000) emphasizes that deconstructing and rewriting ‘taken-for-granted’ knowledge, and
redefining relations of power and privilege is a step towards achieving social justice.
This study aimed to understand and to explain how television broadcasting’s political and
technological changes in the late 1990s induced electronic colonialism in francophone
Africa. This qualitative study was conducted in Senegal, Côte d’Ivoire, Benin, Burkina and
Cameroon. It constituted at first the goal to achieve an understanding of the intricacies of
football television broadcasting by public, private and transnational television broadcasters.
The in-depth interviews, documents analysis and field observations provided required data
to analyse transnational television broadcasting in francophone Africa within the theoretical
framework of Thomas McPhail’s (2006) electronic colonialism.
235
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
Giving voice
The third feature of a postcolonial research method suggested is the deliberate decentring of
dominant culture so that the worldviews of the marginalized become the starting point in
knowledge construction. A postcolonial commitment results in the weaving of the perspectives
and experiences of those marginalized in our society into the very fabric of sport management.
Core to the postcolonial movement is the question raised by Gayatri Chakrovorty Spivak’s
(1988) ‘Can the Subaltern speak?’ At its most basic level postcolonialism demands the right
236
EMERGING QUALITATIVE APPROACHES
to speak rather than being spoken for, and to represent oneself rather than being represented
or, in the extreme cases, rather than being erased entirely.
A further opportunity for giving voice to previously subjugated voices is the liberal use of
poly-vocality in research through strategies such as purposive sampling from diverse groups
of participants with a range of experiences, listening carefully to the accounts of these
participants, and liberally using their verbatim stories in written reports.
A basic question in postcolonial research has been posed as to whether or not white
researchers can truly understand the experiences of issues such as racialization and racism.
Some have argued that postcolonial studies in the field are best undertaken by minority scholars;
others have argued that such matching of researchers with the researched results in
marginalizing certain types of research, making, for example, racism only a concern for
racialized groups. We take the position that rather than pursuing the legitimacy of our roles
as sport management researchers based on one aspect of one’s social identity (e.g. whiteness),
one’s legitimacy as a sport management researcher is based on one’s ability to explicate the
ways in which marginalization and racialization operate. Furthermore, acknowledging the
interrelatedness of race, class and gender provides important insights for postcolonial sport
management inquiry and guards against incomplete and simplistic analyses.
Emancipatory intent
The final feature of a postcolonial research method is its open commitment to critiquing the
status quo and building a more just society. We make the case for emancipatory intent. Praxis-
oriented research is research committed to social change. Thus, sport management inquiry
within the larger genre of an emancipatory research paradigm is committed to moving beyond
the description of what ‘is’ to providing prescription for what ‘ought’ to be, and raises our
level of investigation from matters of the individual to consideration of larger sociopolitical
forces impacting on the common good. The goal of emancipatory sport management
researchers is to foster self-reflection and deeper understanding on the part of the researched
at least as much as it is to generate empirically grounded theoretical knowledge.
Method
An important distinction of a postcolonial perspective is that there are no prescribed techniques
for data collection or data analysis. In this research approach, different techniques can be
drawn on depending on the focus of the inquiry, as long as they meet the criteria for scientific
adequacy and rigour.
The hallmark of postcolonial scholarship is a strong research-theory dialectic that brings
a particular interpretive lens to the Sport Management Research that recognizes that each life
is shaped by history. This lens frames how questions are formulated, who is included in the
study, how data are interpreted, the meanings derived from the data, and how research findings
are communicated and applied. While we are not limited in the kinds of questions we ask,
our questions are framed from a particular epistemological perspective. That is, the postcolonial
lens always takes into account the context in which each life is situated, and analyses how
237
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
gender, race, class and historical positioning intersect at any given moment to organize
experience in the here and now.
The postcolonial methodology sketched out here promises us new and important tools for
forms of transformative knowledge that have been largely overlooked within sport management
scholarship and practice. With such a commitment, postcolonial sport management scholarship
will permit more thoughtful attention to the issues of equity and social justice.
Presently the literature available on women’s cricket is very limited. This thesis attempts to
redress this gap by telling a story about the experiences of women’s club cricket in Toronto
and Victoria. The players’ social spaces were examined, as were the intersections of gender,
race and culture. Using qualitative methods, narratives were interpreted and analysed using
postcolonial, spatial and feminist theoretical frameworks.
What is globalization?
Globalization research can be classified in a number of ways. Specifically, it can be characterized
based on its focus on specific phenomena of globalization, i.e. economic, political or social.
It is, however, important to note that in each of these categories, there are different
perspectives, such as neoliberalism, Marxism, neo-Marxism, etc. Sklair (2002) identified that
research on globalization can be categorized into four broad approaches: the global polity and
society; the world systems; the global capitalism; and the global cultural approaches.
The global polity and society approach maintains that global polity and society can be
achieved only in the modern age with the advancement of science, technology and industry.
This body of literature is filled with discussions of the decreasing power and significance of
the nation-state and the increasing significance, or actually power of, super-national and global
institutions and systems of belief and value (Sklair, 2002). Global sport federations and
governing bodies, such as the Internatonal Rugby Board, have existed for over a hundred
years, but have increased their power and influence over national governing bodies as the
desire for global competitions (e.g. Rugby World Cups) has skyrocketed. The most desirable
future, according to those theorists, is the organization of global governance through some
global civil society, while globalization is the most potent and necessary drive for that future.
238
EMERGING QUALITATIVE APPROACHES
Anthony Giddens (1990) is one of the principal voices of such arguments. Giddens characterizes
globalization in terms of four dimensions: the nation-state system, the world military order,
the international division of labour and the world capitalist economy. He believes globalization
is a consequence of modernity itself because ‘modernity is inherently globalizing’ (p. 63).
The philosophical assumption of this approach is essentially neoliberalism.
The next approach to globalization study is the world-systems perspective (Sklair, 2002). This
approach is based on the distinction between core, semi-peripheral and peripheral countries
in terms of their positions in the international division of labour demanded by the capitalist
world-system. Based on the work of Immanuel Wallerstein (1974), social scientific research
on world-systems has been developed since the 1970s. Unlike other approaches in which
writers are grouped based on the tenets of their work, the world-systems school is a highly
institutionalized academic enterprise. This school of thought has been the most systematic
available for the analysis of the global system for more than 20 years. The world-system theory
closely resembles dependency theory.
An approach that is more sophisticated than the world-system approach is the global capitalism
approach (Sklair, 2002). For these theorists, the main driving force of globalization is the structure
of the ever-more globalizing capitalism (e.g. Robinson, 1996; Ross and Trachte, 1990; Sklair,
2002). In contrast to the world-system approach that focuses on nation-state centred
economics, the global capitalism approach strives toward ‘a concept of the global that involves
more than the relations between nation-states and explanation of national economics
competing against each other’ (Sklair, 2002, p. 46). Similarly, many national governing bodies
cannot thrive on their own, and rely on the economic value of international competition.
The final approach to globalization research is the global culture approach (Sklair, 2002).
Placing culture at the centre is inspired by Marshall McLuhan’s (1964) notion of ‘the global
village’, the very rapid growth of the mass media in scale and scope that has taken place over
the last few decades. As sociologist John Tomlinson (1999) puts it, ‘Globalization lies at the
heart of modern culture; cultural practices lie at the heart of globalization’ (p. 1). Huntington
(1993, 1996) predicts that the source of future international conflicts lies in the cultural,
rather than the political and ideological. Appadurai (1996) developed a fivefold conceptual
framework of empirical research on global cultural flows. His categories include ethnoscapes
(flows of people), mediascapes (flows of images and information), technoscapes (development
and flows of technology), finanscapes (flows of global capital) and ideoscapes (flows of
ideologies and movements).
The most widespread form of research within sport and cultural studies as well as sociology
is identified as the global culture approach. We have suggested that this is a self-limiting form
of research inquiry (Edwards and Skinner, 2006) and have explored the conceptions of a new
world order and implications for sport management in our book entitled Sport Empire. In this
work we explored some of the concepts in this new and controversial form of globalization
research.
Globalization: decentred?
Michael Hardt and Antonio Negri (2000), in their influential work, Empire, argue that we
experience the irresistible and irreversible globalization of economic and cultural exchanges.
239
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
These researchers suggest that with the development of a global market and global circuits
of production, we also see the materialization of a global order or a new form of sovereignty.
Together with the processes of globalization, sovereignty of nation-states has weakened. Now,
the money, technology, people and goods move easily across national borders and the nation-
state has less power to regulate these flows. It is more and more common for athletes to seek
work in overseas professional systems, and harder for domestic sport organizations to retain
their services.
The governing terms of Hardt and Negri’s (2000) discussion are ‘Empire’ and ‘Multitude’.
It is suggested that along with the global market and global circuits of production a new global
order has emerged, a new form of sovereignty based on a new logic and structure of rule.
Empire is the political subject that effectively regulates these global exchanges, the sovereign
power that governs the world.
Empire does not refer to imperialism; it has no territorial centre of power and does not
depend on fixed boundaries. The divisions among three Worlds (First, Second, and Third)
have been unclear. It is a decentred and deterritorializing apparatus of rule that progressively
incorporates the entire global realm with its open, expanding frontiers. Empire manages hybrid
identities, flexible hierarchies and plural exchanges through modulating networks of command
(Hardt and Negri, 2000, p. xii).
Multitude is opposed to Empire. Multitude is all those who labour and produce under
capital, it is the ‘class of productive singularities, the class of the operators of immaterial
labor’ (Hardt and Negri, 2000). The Multitude however has power that is driven by its desire
for liberation from Empire’s global structures and networks. Edwards and Skinner (2006)
have drawn upon this theoretical framework provided by Hardt and Negri (2000) to critique
the implications of a new world order on global sport management.
communities are both tied into and construct trans-local/transnational networks and
discourses, such that while people might be organizing and acting at local spatial scales they
are consistently framing their identities with reference to larger scale and global contexts.
241
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
The purpose of this research was to develop a model for cross-cultural sport spectatorship,
and then to compare American and Chinese basketball spectators. Means–end theory guided
the development of a conceptual framework, and structural equation modelling was used to
test the relationship between focal attributes and expected consequences. Focal attributes
referred to the concrete features of basketball games, while expected consequences referred
to abstract motives for watching sporting events. Participants were National Basketball
Association spectators in the United States and Chinese Basketball Association spectators
in China. Spectators in the two countries were compared on their preferences for: Kahle’s
List of Values, individualism/collectivism dimensions, attributes, consequences, consequence–
attribute paths and behavioural intentions. This study contributed to the growing body of
literature in cross-cultural sport marketing.
CONCLUSION
In articulating the postcolonial notion to sport management it has been demonstrated that
the negotiation of cultural differences and meanings is the basis upon which culturally safe
sport management practice can be designed. The issue is to adapt sport management practice
to the needs of marginalized people by integrating marginalized knowledge in sport
management scholarship. Postcolonial research provides the analytic lens to critically assess
242
EMERGING QUALITATIVE APPROACHES
the effects of power, race, gender and social class on sport management practice; to
democratize Sport Management Research and practice, and to bridge theory and practice by
generating transformative sport management knowledge. In this chapter it has been argued
that contemporary globalizing contexts provide opportunities for sport management
globalization research. The key question that will be answered within the next few years is:
does globalization constitute a research paradigm to enhance our understanding of sport
management practice in changing times?
If researchers are to broaden their approach and seek knowledge through new and
innovative research approaches, the emerging research issues discussed in this chapter need
to be considered. Each method explored in this chapter presents its own set of unique
challenges while at the same time presenting opportunities to understand social reality
through different theoretical lenses.
243
QUALITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
QUESTIONS
1 Of the research methodologies in this chapter, which would you choose as a lens to study
Kenyan rugby? Explain why.
2 What outcome would your study have? Explore and describe? Provide awareness? Enact
change?
REVIEW QUESTIONS
Each of the emerging issues discussed in this chapter embrace a unique methodological
approach that has significant relevance to Sport Management Research. With a general
understanding of these emerging issues, attempt to answer the following questions:
n Is there any place within Sport Management Research for these approaches to Sport
Management Research? Justify your answer.
n Discuss the positive and negative features of each approach.
n Provide examples of how two of these approaches could be applied to Sport
Management Research.
244
Part 3
Quantitative research
for sport management
researchers
This page intentionally left blank
Chapter 15
LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of this chapter you should be able to:
KEY TERMS
Research instrument – an instrument is a tool for measuring, observing or documenting
quantitative data.
Descriptive statistics – refers to the transformation of the raw data into a form that will
make them easy to understand and interpret.
Inferential statistics – statistical techniques that make an inference about a population from
observations collected from a sample. They can establish that an obtained statistical
description of a sample is genuine and it is not due to chance occurrence.
Survey – involves selecting a sample of individual people from a given population and
presenting them with a series of questions in the form of a structured questionnaire.
KEY THEMES
n What are the key aspects of a quantitative research design?
n What are the most common quantitative research designs?
n How can survey designs be used by sport management researchers?
247
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
CHAPTER OVERVIEW
In many ways all sport managers are researchers. Sport managers are constantly engaged in
solving problems in the organizational context in which they find themselves. To avoid making
poor decisions sport managers need to first identify the problem at hand, collect pertinent
information in relation to that problem and draw a conclusion in terms of an appropriate
course of action. This chapter outlines how the sport management researcher would design
their research to be able to complete the above.
Collecting data
In quantitative research, the data collection tends to consist of using instruments with preset
questions and responses, gathering quantifiable (numeric) data and collecting information from
248
RESEARCH DESIGN FOR A QUANTITATIVE STUDY
a large number of individuals. A simple example is an online poll embedded into ESPN.com
asking readers’ opinions and knowledge on various current sport stories. An instrument is a
tool for measuring, observing or documenting quantitative data. It contains specific questions
and response possibilities that one establishes or develops in advance of the study. Examples
of instruments are survey questionnaires, standardized tests and checklists. The instruments
are administered to participants and data is collected in the form of numbers. The intent of
this process is to apply the results from a small number of people to a large number, a few
thousand ESPN.com readers to all sport fans. The larger the number of individuals
studied, the stronger the case for applying the results to a large number of people. For example,
a survey sent to 500 parents of teenage football players from one club should provide
a significant amount of data from which to extrapolate relevant information. It is important,
however, to note that these types of polls can be misleading in relation to the assumptions
of generalizability. Randomness in sampling is an assumption of generalization; hence, it is
likely that ESPN would use a convenience sample, which would not represent all ESPN
consumers or satisfy the condition of random sampling.
249
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
Experimental designs
Experimental designs are where the researcher determines whether an activity or materials
make a difference in results for participants. This is done by giving one group one set of
activities (the intervention) and withholding the set from another group. While very popular
in the sport science discipline (training protocols, rehabilitation, supplementation, etc.),
experimental designs are not very popular among sport management researchers.
250
RESEARCH DESIGN FOR A QUANTITATIVE STUDY
Correlational designs
Correlational designs are procedures, according to Creswell (2008), in which researchers:
measure the degree of association (or relation) between two or more variables using
the statistical procedure of correlational analysis. The degree of association, expressed
as a number, indicates whether the two variables are related or whether one can
predict another. (p. 60)
To accomplish this, the researcher ‘studies a single group of individuals rather than two or
more groups as in an experiment’ (p. 60).
The researchers investigated the correlations among gender, motives for spectating, points
of attachment (or team identification) and sport preference by surveying 669 spectators at
intercollegiate contests. The study was aimed at sport marketers looking to segment the
market based on the correlations.
Survey designs
According to Creswell (2008) survey designs:
Survey designs are often used in sport management, especially when investigating large fan
or sport event participant bases.
Survey designs
A survey involves selecting a sample of individual people from a given population and
presenting them with a series of questions in the form of a structured questionnaire. Answers
251
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
are transformed into a numerical format (producing quantitative data) so you can analyse the
data in terms of comparing the responses on different questions or variables, using statistical
techniques. For the survey to be complete, we need to produce some kind of report of the
results. Thus, key characteristics of surveys are that they focus on individuals and that
individuals are part of a sample. The individuals answer a questionnaire that can produce
quantitative/numerical data about each individual. The variables in the data set are then
analysed to identify patterns in them or relationships between them.
There are a number of strengths and benefits associated with surveys. Some of the strengths
include the ability to collect information for individuals including attitudinal data such as
opinions and values about team success or sponsor engagement. When done correctly data
collected from a survey can be representative of a given population and the results, within
limits, can be generalized. In these cases we are therefore able to produce ‘scientific’ results
that can be replicated and verified. We can therefore produce ‘hard’ data that allows us to
test theories and the results can be treated with some confidence.
Similarly, there are weaknesses and criticisms of surveys. These include their tendency to
reduce everything to numbers and therefore they don’t capture the richness of the real world.
This has led some critics to suggest that surveys don’t investigate interesting questions and
that the accuracy of surveys is open to question (opinion polls). Some qualitative researchers
might even suggest that surveys are a barren atheoretical approach to research that may make
results look solid and scientific (factual), but in reality this may not be the case.
Generalizability is considered questionable and results are often considered not very
meaningful as researchers cannot establish causal connections unequivocally. This has led some
to suggest that surveys can be used in some cases to prove a point or support a political stance
by manipulating the sorts of answers the survey produces.
Administering surveys
There are four main ways of administering surveys. These are the personal interview, mail,
telephone and, increasingly, the Internet. The personal interview is a face-to-face interview
that takes place in an agreed location, oftentimes at a stadium or sport venue. The interviewer
works through a structured interview schedule and asks questions and records answers. They
don’t show the respondent the questions. The strengths of the personal interview include
that it is the preferred method in the survey industry and is often referred to as the default
option. It has certain design advantages over the other methods, especially over mail. For
example, the interviewer can control (to some extent) the context of the interview, that is,
who is present. The interviewer is able to build rapport with respondents and is capable of
handling complex questions better than with other methods. That is, the interviewer can
introduce flow sequences, different paths for different respondents and they can probe on
certain responses.
The weaknesses of administering a survey face to face are that it is expensive, highly labour
intensive, the interviewer can’t cover large areas easily, and it is not as fast as telephone
interviewing. Potential problems could arise when it comes to asking sensitive questions,
particularly given the lack of anonymity. There is also the possibility of responses being
susceptible to a social desirability bias and the potential for interviewer bias when asking the
252
RESEARCH DESIGN FOR A QUANTITATIVE STUDY
questions. In general, the personal interview method has advantages over other methods in
terms of design and disadvantages compared to other methods with respect to implementation.
Mail surveys are (usually) mailed out with a covering letter and all instructions included.
In some cases these are done as a ‘leave behind’ add-on to a personal interview. The
respondent sees all questions, can take their time and think more deeply about answers. In
general terms, mail surveys are weak on design and strong on implementation. Their strengths
include the fact that they are relatively inexpensive and extensive coverage for data collection
is possible. They are particularly useful for specialized populations and topics. They don’t
require trained interviewers and responses are free of interviewer bias. Their weaknesses are
that the fieldwork process is slow and you have no control over who answers the questionnaire.
Response rates tend to be lower and it is harder to get good response rates. Completion also
requires a certain level of literacy although, in fact, all social surveys tend to over-represent
those with greater literacy skills and more formal education.
Telephone surveys, as the name suggests, means the interview is done by telephone. There
is no face-to-face contact but the interviewer asks questions and records answers as in face-
to-face. The researcher can control the interview as in face-to-face in some respects to a greater
degree, in some respects to a lesser degree. For example, the respondent can’t look over the
interviewer’s shoulder at questions, but the interviewer can’t control or see whether others
might be present, who, although they can’t hear questions, may influence the general openness
of responses. These types of surveys are being increasingly used by commercial survey
organizations.
The strengths of the telephone survey are that the fieldwork process can be completed
quickly and efficiently. They tend to be less expensive than personal interviews and interviewers
don’t face any personal risk. Interviewers can also be supervised directly and performance
monitored. The approach lends itself to computer assistance in various ways and facilitates
direct data entry. Telephone surveys also allow for complex designs. For example, multiphase
questionnaires, in which different subsamples are asked different questions, asked the questions
in a different order or questions can be asked in random order. Their weaknesses are they
are more expensive than mail surveys and the issue of length is important as they can’t be
too long as respondents can become agitated. When delivering the survey it is difficult to
build rapport and as such the respondent can hang up before the interview is finished.
Surveys can also be implemented via the Internet as well as being conducted by email, or
through a webpage, or a combination of both. This approach requires self-completion, so all
instructions must be included and the respondent can answer in their own time. It does assume
however an extensive Internet coverage of the target population, which is very common in
most sport management contexts. The strengths of the Internet survey are that it is inexpensive
in most instances and email surveys are amenable to the use of simple random sampling. They
are good for reaching populations where all members are connected to the Internet, for
example large modern sporting organizations where most have a database of their employees,
fans and members (ticket buyers), and athletes. Internet surveys can also use sophisticated
computer-assisted survey design features (for web-based surveys) and data entered by the
respondent can be coded and set up in a database automatically. There are weaknesses with
this survey method. For example, there is reduced control over timing of responses and a
limited coverage of the general population. This may require specific strategies to be used to
253
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
counter this problem. Finally, they often can only be used with non-probability sampling
methods, as webpage surveys usually result in haphazard samples (a discussion of sampling
methods follows in the next chapter). It is important to note, however, that some of these
disadvantages will decrease with time.
organizations). Make sure you keep the questions balanced (e.g. do you agree or disagree?).
Make sure the answer categories fit linguistically with the stem of the question and generally
phrase questions in the positive as negatives can be confusing. It is important to provide
sufficient response categories to produce a well differentiated range of answers so avoid just
yes/no or agree/disagree response categories. You need to provide variety in the types of
questions used and use multiple indicators for complex concepts. It is also necessary to avoid
double-barrelled questions, leading questions and threatening questions. Even when you get
all of this correct don’t forget to consider the introduction to the questionnaire, the initial
sequence of questions and its layout and attractiveness for self-completion questionnaires.
The placement of particular sections of the questionnaire can have an influence on completion
rates as can the ordering of questions within particular batteries. In other words the flow and
length of the questionnaire are key elements in its design. When we put this all together it
may sound overwhelming but with the support of a good supervisor and the benefit of
experience it becomes common practice. In summary the survey research process is shown
in Figure 15.1.
Each element of the survey research process is discussed throughout the text but in the
next chapter we concentrate our discussion on quantitative sampling.
1 How would you survey the participants for the economic impact study?
2 What types of data would you need to collect from the participants? What questions
would you ask on the survey?
3 How would you ensure reliable and valid results?
CONCLUSION
This chapter has provided an understanding of the key elements involved in a quantitative
research design. It has explained the role of surveys in the collection of quantitative data. It
has been shown that a number of survey methods can be employed in the data collection
process and each has its own unique set of advantages and disadvantages. The sport management
researcher needs to consider these advantages and disadvantages in the context of the research
problem under investigation and the resources available to them to complete the research.
256
RESEARCH DESIGN FOR A QUANTITATIVE STUDY
Identification of
population to be sampled
Decisions of method of
interview
Questionnaire design
Pretesting
Refinement of
questionnaire
Field work
Data preparation
Data analysis
Research report
257
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
REVIEW QUESTIONS
Understanding how a research project should be designed is a core skill the sport management
researcher requires. If your research is based on poor survey design it can result in the collection
of data that can fail to answer your research question(s); given this:
258
Chapter 16
LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of this chapter you should be able to:
n understand what a variable is and the various scales of measurement used in quantitative
research;
n discuss data collection techniques in quantitative research;
n discuss the principles of sampling and provide examples of a number of sampling
techniques;
n understand the place of statistics in Sport Management Research.
KEY TERMS
Variables – anything that varies from case to case or observation to observation that can
be measured.
Population – all members of a specified group.
Sample – a subset of a population.
Subject – a specific individual participating in a study.
Sampling technique – the specific method used to select a sample from a population.
KEY THEMES
n When is a number not a number?
n The importance of presenting data clearly so that it can be understood by the reader.
n What are the different types of data that can be collected for analysis?
259
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
CHAPTER OVERVIEW
In a world of variability we need statistics to help us understand this variability. As such,
statistical techniques perform three main functions. First, they provide ways of summarizing
the information that is collected from a multitude of sources. Second, they provide a
mechanism to facilitate economy of effort in research and finally, statistical techniques enable
the researcher to clarify trends in vast quantities of data using a number of powerful methods
(Howitt and Cramer, 2000). This chapter begins our discussion around these themes by first
discussing what a variable is and the various scales of measurement used in quantitative research.
The second part will discuss data collection techniques in quantitative research. Part of this
process understands how to select an appropriate sample. We therefore discuss the principles
of sampling and provide examples of a number of sampling techniques that can be used by
the sport management researcher. The final section of the chapter will introduce some
foundation statistical techniques and provide a greater understanding of the place of statistics
in Sport Management Research.
however, the possibility for confusion. For example, let us say we are conducting a human
resource audit of a professional sporting organization. In doing this we find that the organization
has 30 people with occupations you may wish to count. We may want to know how many
coaches there are, or how many marketing personnel there are? The numbers in each case
merely correspond to the count or frequency, the number of cases falling into each occupational
category. They are not scores, they are frequencies and do not correspond to a single
measurement but are the aggregate of many specific nominal measurements (Johnson and
Kuby, 2011).
Score/numerical measurement is the assignment of a numerical value to a measurement.
Within this measurement scale three different types of numerical scores can be generated.
First, ordinal (or rank) measurement values of the numerical score tells you little other than
the order of the data. It is sometimes called rank measurement since we can assign ranks to
the first place-getter, second place-getter etc. These ranks have the numerical value of 1, 2,
and 3, etc. Second, there is interval or equal-interval measurement. In some cases the intervals
between numbers on a numerical scale are equal in size. An example of this is the distance
between certain markers on a scale. In measuring distance we know the distance between
1 metre and 2 metres is the same as the distance between 4 metres and 5 metres. Finally,
there is ratio measurement. This allows you to work out ratios between measures. Many scales
have zero points that are absolute. The zero is the smallest point you can have on the scale.
In these cases it is possible to work out ratios between measures. For example, a football
stadium that is 20 km away is twice as far away as a football stadium that is 10 km away.
In summary and as indicated above, virtually in all practical purposes there are only two
different types of measurement in statistics (1) nominal/category measurement – deciding
the category the variable belongs in and (2) score/numerical measurement – the assignment
of a numerical value to a measurement.
QUANTITATIVE SAMPLING
A population in research terms can be considered the larger pool of cases from which a sample
is drawn (containing all the cases that the researcher is interested in) – the target group. As
such, a sample is a subset of the population or more directly a subset of cases selected from
a population. An example is provided in Figure 16.1. The aim of sampling is that the sample
will be representative of the population from which it is drawn and so we will be able to generalize
from the sample to the population. To within certain limits of accuracy we can talk about
the information we have for the sample as though it were the population. Figures obtained
from samples are estimates of the characteristics of the population. With proper sampling
we can calculate the extent to which the estimates are likely to be accurate and thus make
inferences about the population with some confidence (Johnson and Kuby, 2011).
When trying to determine sample size there is no definitive answer to the question of how
big a sample should be as it depends on various considerations. These include what is
considered an acceptable size in the field of study, the level of accuracy required, the need
to gain large enough numbers of important subgroups in the population and finally its cost
relative to your budget. The size of population generally doesn’t matter as the sampling fraction
is only relevant for very small populations. As sport management researchers you may be
261
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
confronted with the possibility of a sampling error. The term ‘sampling error’ assumes the use
of correct probability sampling methods and is a statistical property of samples that is quite
benign. The term error refers not to a ‘mistake’ but to the extent to which the sample is
likely to differ from the population. In other words, sampling error is the deviation of the
selected sample from the true characteristics, traits, behaviours, qualities or figures of the
entire population (Zikmund, 2000).
The degree of sampling error in any sample is related to the size of the sample, larger
samples have smaller amounts of sampling error. For example, if a stadium has 50,000 fans
(population) and you only sample ten people, there is a chance the team loyalty distribution
of fans calculated from that sample will be erroneous for the population. Sampling error on
its own, however, doesn’t necessarily lead to bias, just imprecision, though bad sampling
practices can create bias. A good rule of thumb is that a fourfold increase in sample size will
halve the error. A large sample may not be a guarantee of good results as it must be combined
with good sampling techniques (Bryman and Bell, 2011).
Non-sampling error can cause bias in surveys. Non-sampling error includes coverage error,
which means having a sampling procedure that does not allow for the whole population to
be covered; for example, only asking fans in the home team section of a stadium what team
has their loyalty. Non-response error refers to systematically under- or over-representing certain
groups in a sample, in turn producing an unrepresentative sample; for example, only asking
fans wearing one team’s apparel for their loyalty. Measurement error is the result of poorly
designed questions that provide unreliable and/or invalid responses; for example, asking fans
262
DATA COLLECTION METHODS
where they grew up and assuming that they are loyal to their hometown team. Finally, processing
error is the result of mistakes in the coding of variables or recording of answers (Johnson and
Kuby, 2011); this can be simply writing down or incorrectly transcribing the wrong team
loyalty for some fans.
Sampling assumptions
In summary the assumptions of quantitative sampling are shown in Figure 16.2.
We shall now examine in more detail some of these assumptions.
Types of samples
Samples can be selected by either ‘probability’ or ‘non-probability’ methods. Probability
samples include simple random sampling, systematic random sampling, stratified random
sampling and multi-stage cluster sampling (Muijs, 2011; Chase and Brown, 2000).
In a simple random sample we assign a unique number to each sampling unit. We can select
sampling units by using a table of random numbers. You need to list all members of the
population and assign consecutive numbers to all members. It is necessary to ignore duplicates
and numbers out of range when sampled. In systematic random sampling we select the first sample
unit randomly and then select the remaining units according to the interval. It is the researcher
who determines the sampling interval. For example, we select a random number, which will
be known as k. We then get a list of people, or observe a flow of people (e.g. fans entering
a stadium). We then select every k-th person being careful that there is no systematic rhythm
to the flow or list of people. If every fourth person on the list is, say, ‘rich’ or ‘senior’ or
some other consistent pattern, we would therefore need to avoid this method. The advantage
of this approach is that it is very easily done. The disadvantages, however, are that it is
susceptible to systematic inclusion of some subgroups and some members of the population
don’t have an equal chance of being included. There are also selection issues in terms of listing
Aim to generalize to
the population
Probability sampling is
the best approach
263
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
all members of the population, determining the value of k, and starting at the top of the list
again if the desired sample size is not reached (Thomas and Nelson, 1996).
In a stratified random sample proportional and non-proportional approaches can be used.
Proportional means the same proportion of subgroups whereas non-proportional relates to
different, often equal, proportions of subgroups. For example, we can separate our population
into groups or strata that are proportionate. From here we do either a simple random sample
or systematic random sample. Note you must know easily what the ‘strata’ are before
attempting this. If your sampling frame is sorted by, say, regional sporting districts, then
you’re able to use this method. In sum, the researcher selects a random sample proportionate
to the size of the stratum in the population (disproportionate). If the members of three regional
sporting districts are 100 in region one, 150 in region two and 250 in region three, then
you would randomly sample members with 20 per cent, 30 per cent and 50 per cent coming
from each respective region. The advantage of this approach is you are able to achieve a
representation of subgroups in the sample. The disadvantages are the identification of all
members of the population can be difficult, identifying members of all subgroups can be difficult
and there are selection issues; that is, the identification of relevant strata, coding subjects
regarding strata and selecting randomly from within each level of the strata (Johnson and
Kuby, 2011).
Finally, a multi-stage cluster sample is where the researcher determines the number of levels
of clusters and from each level of clusters they select a sample randomly. You may choose
to select subjects by using groups that have similar characteristics and in which participants
can be found, let’s say by sporting district, sporting club or sporting teams. For example,
you get a list of ‘clusters’, e.g. teams within a district. You then randomly sample clusters
from that list. If you have a list of, say, ten teams you then randomly sample people within
those teams. This method, however, is complex and expensive. Another example might be:
The advantage of this approach is that it is very useful when populations are large and spread
over a large geographic region, as well as being convenient and expedient. The disadvantages
are that representation is likely to become an issue, the assumptions of some statistical
procedures can be violated, and selection issues. That is, identifying logical clusters and the
average number of population members per cluster, determining the number of clusters
needed, and randomly selecting necessary clusters may create problems (Muijs, 2011).
Selecting non-random samples also known as non-probability samples includes convenience
sampling, snowball sampling, quota sampling and purposive sampling. Convenience sampling
is where you find some people that are easy to find. Population elements are selected based
on the judgement of the researcher, who then chooses the elements to be included because
264
DATA COLLECTION METHODS
he/she believes they are representative of the population (Chase and Brown, 2000). Selection
is therefore based on the availability of subjects, for example, volunteers or pre-existing
sporting groups. This approach raises concerns related to representation and generalizability.
Snowball sampling is based on finding a few participants that are relevant to your topic and
asking them to refer you to more of them. For example, if you are researching drugs in sport
and you are trying to understand why elite athletes may engage in this type of behaviour, an
athlete who completes your survey may be able to provide access to other athletes through
their networks. Quota sampling is where you determine what the population looks like in terms
of specific qualities. You then create ‘quotas’ based on those qualities and select people for
each quota. Selection is therefore based on the exact characteristics and quotas of subjects in
the sample when it is impossible to list all members of the population. This approach does
raise concerns with accessibility, representation and generalizability. Purposive sampling is where
selection is based on the researcher’s experience and knowledge of the group being sampled.
They rely heavily on the experience and insight of the researcher to select participants. There
is a need for clear criteria for describing and defending the sample. Again, however, there
are concerns related to representation and generalizability (Muijs, 2011). In summary, types
of samples are depicted in Figure 16.3.
Probability samples
Non-probability samples
265
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
The best and the rest: Revisiting the norm of normality of individual performance.
Aguinis, H. (2012). Personnel Psychology, 65(1), 79–119.
This study tested a long-held assumption that individual performance follows a normal
distribution. By sampling athletes, entertainers, politicians and researchers, they disproved
that assumption by finding individual performance follows a power law distribution.
Both variance and standard deviation are measures of variability. To illustrate how these
techniques are used we shall use the two sets of data in Table 16.1 as an example.
If we look at the data set we need to ask what is it telling us? Looking at the two sets of
scores we can see there are major differences between the scores. They differ substantially
in terms of their typical value. In one case (variable B) the scores are relatively large, in the
other case the scores are much smaller (variable A). The scores also differ in their variability.
Variable B seems to have a greater spread or a greater variability than the other set of scores.
Each of these different features can be described using various indexes. Sport management
researchers will speak about the central tendency of scores. By doing this they are raising the
issue of what are the most typical and likely scores in the distribution of measurements. To
repeat, measures of central tendency are:
266
DATA COLLECTION METHODS
Scores Scores
variable A variable B
4 54
4 58
6 70
6 80
6 82
8 84
8 90
8 90
8 98
8 98
10 98
All three apply to score data, only the mode applies to categorical data. Sometimes however
there is no single mode since scores jointly have the highest frequency. In this case the
distribution is referred to as a bi-modal distribution. Similarly, when calculating the median
it may seem straight forward when we have an odd number of scores that are all different.
This is because there is no single score that corresponds to the middle score in the set of
scores. However, if there is an even number of scores in the data set then sometimes the mid
point will not be a single score but two scores. So, if we have two scores of 3 and 4 that fall
in the middle we would say the median is 3.5. Usually the mean, median and mode will give
different values of central tendency when applied to the same set of scores. It is only when
the Mean = Median = Mode that the scores are symmetrically distributed. Regard big
differences between the mean, median and mode as a sign that your distribution of scores is
rather asymmetrical or lopsided.
The other key numerical technique for describing variables relates to the spread of scores
and refers to their variability. Variability in scores can be assessed in a number of ways. For
example there is the range of the data. Range refers to the difference between the largest and
smallest scores. The range tends to ignore important information. It does not take into account
all the scores in a set, merely the extreme ones. For this reason measures of the spread of
variability have been developed that include the extent to which each of the scores in the set
differs from the mean score of the set. One example of this is the mean deviation. Mean deviation
highlights the extent to which each of the scores in the set differs from the mean score of the
set; however, it is limited in its application and not as accurate as some other measures. The
closely related concept of variance is a much more useful tool (Bryman and Bell, 2011).
Variance is the average of each score’s squared deviation from the mean score. Variance,
however, is difficult to interpret in isolation from other information about data. It is best
treated comparatively, when variances of different groups of people are compared. The standard
267
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
deviation is another standard unit of measurement in statistics. Standard deviation is the square
root of the variance. In a normal curve the following rules apply to standard deviation:
n plus or minus 1 standard deviation from the mean includes 68 per cent of the scores;
n plus or minus 2 standard deviations from the mean includes 95 per cent of the scores;
n plus or minus 3 standard deviations from the mean includes 99 per cent of the scores.
The size of the standard deviation will depend on the scale of measurement in question;
however, once the standard deviation is known all scores can be re-expressed in terms of the
number of standard deviations they are from the mean (Thomas and Nelson, 1996).
4
Frequency
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
268
DATA COLLECTION METHODS
1 How would you choose the sample for this study? Explain.
2 How could you avoid getting an erroneous or biased sample?
CONCLUSION
This chapter has described and discussed what a variable is and the various scales of
measurement used in Sport Management Research. The chapter then moved on to discuss
the role of sampling in the data collection phase and its importance to collecting data that can
be representative of the broader population. We discussed how samples can be representative
of a given population, the possibility for sampling error, the assumptions that underpin sampling
and the different types of sampling techniques. Each of these issues is a vital part of the
quantitative data collection process and needs to be carefully considered. This chapter then
outlined how statistical techniques can be applied to organize, review and interpret numerical
data. It has shown how data can be represented to capture the key components that can help
describe the data set.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
With an understanding now of the basic functions of statistical techniques that enable the
sport management researcher to clarify trends in vast quantities of data using a number of
powerful methods, can you:
n Discuss the place of statistics in Sport Management Research. Give three examples of
studies in which statistical information would be critical.
n Describe ways in which the data can be presented so that it is easily understood by the
reader.
269
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
270
Chapter 17
LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of this chapter you should be able to:
n identify the basic functions of the SPSS (Statistical Package for the Social Sciences)
and its application to Sport Management Research;
n describe the process of preparing and organizing your data for analysis;
n recognize how to design and present results in tables, figures, graphs and a results section.
KEY TERMS
SPSS – Statistical Package for the Social Sciences.
Code book – a systematic record of the variables in a survey.
Validity – an indicator of the extent to which a test actually measures the characteristic of
interest.
KEY THEMES
n How does the SPSS support good data analysis?
n Why is good data analysis important to the sport management researcher?
271
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
CHAPTER OVERVIEW
Sport management researchers of today have access to statistical software packages that can
analyse data and provide detailed information. However, we know that good data analysis
not only requires we produce figures and calculate the numerical summaries, but that we
know which figures and numerical summaries to choose and how to interpret the results in
plain language.
While this chapter will cover some basic procedures it will not provide a detailed account
of how to use all features of statistical software packages available. Instead it will focus on
one software package that is commonly used by sport management researchers: the Statistical
Package for the Social Sciences (SPSS). The main emphasis of the chapter is to provide a
general overview of SPSS (recognizing that each version of the software package will vary
slightly) and how it can be used in the data analysis process. It will then go on to discuss the
key issues of validity and reliability as they relate to data analysis.
1 clarity of explanation:
n produces a basic understanding of the trends found in the data;
n helps focus the sport management researcher on the questions to be answered;
n keeps explanations logical;
2 greater effectiveness and efficiency in later confirmatory analyses. Warnings of errors
or illogically and poorly performed procedures can be detected;
3 reducing ambiguity in interpretation and forcing the sport management researcher to
address patterns they were hoping not to find. It can provide evidence of previously
unthought-of relationships that can be pursued in later research;
4 alerting the sport management researcher to possible spurious relationships in the data
produced by some anomalous scores. This gives you an indication of how robust the
findings are in your analysis.
This detective work has been made easier with the development of statistical software
packages such as the Statistical Package for the Social Sciences (SPSS). SPSS has three
parts/windows:
n data
– where you enter the data (.sav)
n syntax
– where details of the analyses you are going to do are displayed (.sps)
n viewer/output
– where the results are displayed (.spo)
– where any messages (such as errors) are displayed.
272
QUANTITATIVE DATA ANALYSIS
The code book usually closely follows the survey, but contains additional information (and
excludes some material in the survey that is only relevant to instructing the interviewer on
how to ask the questions, etc.). In sum, the code book provides a guide for coding the responses
to the survey. Coding includes: (1) pre-coding: i.e., closed ended/forced choice questions,
which can have a code already assigned to them on the questionnaire; (2) assigning numerical
codes to pre-coded/closed-ended questions, which have fixed categories, but have not been
assigned numerical codes on the questionnaire; (3) generating coding frames for open-ended
questions; (4) coding the open-ended questions according to the coding frame, or (5) dealing
with ‘missing’ data.
Descriptive statistics
Sport management researchers edit and code data to provide input that results in tabulated
information that will answer the research questions. With this information sport management
researchers logically and statistically describe the results of the research project. Within this
context the term analysis is difficult to define because it refers to a variety of activities and
processes. One form of analysis is summarizing large quantities of raw data (e.g. ratings from
273
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
local residents after hosting a sport event) so the results can be interpreted (e.g. social impact
of hosting that particular sport event in that region). Categorizing, or separating out the
component or relevant parts of the whole data set, is also a form of analysis to make the data
easily manageable. Rearranging, ordering or manipulating data may provide descriptive
information that answers questions posed in the problem definition. For example, was the
social impact of a sport event perceived differently among different groups in society? All
forms of analysis attempt to portray consistent patterns in the data so that results may be
studied and interpreted in a brief and meaningful way (Bryman and Bell, 2011; Muijs, 2011).
Descriptive statistics refers to the transformation of the raw data into a form that will make
them easy to understand and interpret. Describing responses or observations is typically the
first form of analysis. The calculations of averages, frequency distributions and percentage
distributions are the most common form of summarizing data (Bryman and Bell, 2011). As
the analysis progresses beyond the descriptive stage the sport management researcher will
generally apply what are called inferential statistics. These forms of statistics are discussed later.
Nominal data
The sports media regularly feature statistical tables and diagrams. This makes it easier for
their viewers to absorb and compare the large amounts of game data that are presented
throughout the course of the telecast. For example, if we are to conduct some market research
for a subscription TV provider into the type of viewer that watches the English Premier League,
we might ask 100 people their age, sex, marital status, income and occupation. This would
yield separate pieces of information. It is not helpful to present these 500 measurements in
your report. Such unprocessed information is called raw data. Statistical data has to be more
than describing the raw ingredients. It requires structuring it in ways that effectively
communicate the major trends. If you fail to structure your data you may as well just provide
copies of the completed questionnaire. There are very few rules in terms of the presentation
of tables and diagrams in statistics as long as they are clear and concise and convey the major
trends in the data.
One of the main characteristics of tables and diagrams for nominal data is that they have
to show the frequencies of the cases in each category used. While there may be as many
categories as you wish, it is not the function of statistical analysis to communicate all the data
in detail; the task is to identify the major trends. For example, let us say you are researching
public attitudes towards drugs in sport as you want to use this information as a reference
point for developing anti-doping policies. If you ask the participants in your research their
occupations you might find you have hundreds of different job occupations. Counting the
frequencies with which different job titles are mentioned would result in a vast number of
categories. You need to think of reducing this large number into a smaller number that captures
the major trends. As ‘drugs in sport’ is often linked to the health of the athlete you may wish
to formulate a category that is made up of those individuals involved in the health sector.
Each of these separate categories could then be collapsed into one category such as ‘health
worker’. It is important to note there is no guiding rule for combining categories; however,
274
QUANTITATIVE DATA ANALYSIS
the following are useful rules for using tables and diagrams for nominal data: (1) keep your
number of categories low, and (2) try to make combined categories meaningful and sensible
in light of the purposes of the research (Howitt and Cramer, 2000; Johnson and Kuby, 2011).
Frequencies are mainly presented in two ways:
25 Frequencies
20
15
10
0
Athletes Swimmers Coaches Students Other
275
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
Numerical data
The crucial consideration when deciding what tables and diagrams to use for score data is the
number of separate scores recorded for the variable in question. In some cases scores can be
grouped into bands or ranges of scores to allow for efficient tabulation. Table 17.2 highlights
this.
Questions can be used that pre-specify just a few response alternatives. A Likert-type
questionnaire is used in these circumstances. The Likert scale was invented by Rensis Likert,
an educator and psychologist. It is an ordered, one-dimensional scale from which respondents
choose one option that best aligns with their view. There are typically between five and seven
options. A common form is an assertion, with which the person may agree or disagree to
varying degrees. In scoring, numbers are usually assigned to each option such as 1 to 5.
Similarly, responses that range from strongly agree to strongly disagree can be used (Howitt
and Cramer, 2000; Johnson and Kuby, 2011): for example, on a scale of 1–5, with 1 ‘strongly
disagree’ and 5 ‘strongly agree’, do you think this event is beneficial to the local community?
How this information would be presented in a table is highlighted in Table 17.3.
Histograms can also be used to represent numerical data. They are similar to bar charts
but without the gaps between the bars. Histograms do not represent distinct unrelated
categories but different points on a numerical measurement scale. An example of a histogram
is provided in Figure 17.2.
Table 17.3 Distribution of public attitudes on the event benefiting the local community
276
QUANTITATIVE DATA ANALYSIS
20
18
16
14
12
Frequency
10
0
Category 1
Age
The researchers utilized SPSS to analyse data from an online survey of running participants.
Using the Psychological Continuum Model as a framework, the survey asked runners to rate
various cognitive measures on a Likert scale of 1–7 (very unlikely to very likely), in addition
to demographic and running behaviour questions. Unsurprisingly, they found that the longer
race a person completed (from 5 km to marathon) the more allegiant they are to running.
Using SPSS to segment the sample based on demographics found no differences to the
allegiance – only distance run.
CONCLUSION
This chapter has discussed the basic data analysis procedures of SPSS. It has provided examples
of how data can be coded, entered into SPSS, the process to analyse the data and finally how
the output from the data can be presented. It has also outlined how statistical techniques can
277
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
be applied to organize, review and interpret numerical data. It has shown how data can be
represented to capture the key components.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
Good data analysis requires the sport management researcher to not only produce figures and
calculate the numerical summaries, but know which figures and numerical summaries to choose
and how to interpret the results in plain language. It also provides you with an understanding
of ways of summarizing the information that is collected from a multitude of sources. With
these points in mind:
278
Chapter 18
Introduction to inferential
statistics
LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of this chapter you should be able to:
KEY TERMS
Independent variable – what the sport management researcher is manipulating.
Dependent variable – critical feature of behaviour of the subjects.
Research hypothesis – there is some relationship between the independent and dependent
variables.
Null hypothesis – there is no relationship between the independent and dependent variables
or there is no difference between means or frequencies.
P-value – the probability value.
Inferential statistics – can the description be regarded as genuine or could the results be due
to chance or random happenings, and can the results that describe a sample be
generalized to the population from which the sample was drawn.
KEY THEMES
n The experimental method is a common approach to establishing facts.
n How do you express a research and null hypothesis?
279
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
CHAPTER OVERVIEW
Inferential statistics take data analysis one step further than descriptive statistics by asking two
related questions. First, can the description be regarded as genuine or could the results be
due to chance or random happenings? Second, can the results that describe a sample be
generalized to the population from which the sample was drawn? At the risk of over-
simplifying, if through inferential statistics techniques we can establish that an obtained
statistical description of a sample is genuine and not due to chance occurrence, then we can
infer that what we can say about the sample can also be said about the population from which
the sample is drawn. Statisticians have developed agreed-upon ways of reaching conclusions
when the results of a survey are not clear cut. They apply the appropriate statistical test.
Before the sport management researcher can do this, however, they need to understand some
key concepts that are central to conducting inferential statistical analyses. This chapter will
discuss some of the key concepts and their relationship to inferential statistics.
INFERENTIAL STATISTICS
The following example highlights the value of inferential statistics. Suppose a sport management
researcher is faced with the problem that it is assumed that prior alcohol consumption is
considered to be causing a number of public disorder problems within the stadium. It is
hypothesized that fans that consume alcohol for two hours before attending a football match
will demonstrate significantly higher mean public disorder scores than fans who consume non-
alcoholic drinks. In this case the nominal independent variable is alcoholic or non-alcoholic
consumption. The interval level dependent variable is a mean public disorder score, which
is measured on a scale of 0–100. The following data is produced.
n Non-alcoholic consumers have a mean public disorder score of 46.
n Alcoholic consumers have a mean public disorder score of 54.
The question we must ask is whether this difference is significant. When differences between
means are very small we are confident that the differences are not significant. Similarly, when
differences between means are very large we are confident that the differences are significant.
However, in some cases the means may be very close together, as in the above example. So
at what stage in between do we conclude that the means are different? This is where inferential
statistics can be applied to reach a conclusion.
280
INTRODUCTION TO INFERENTIAL STATISTICS
to as the dependent variable, the response variable or the criterion variable. Any difference
between these two conditions that we observe on the dependent variable is called the
treatment effect and is usually assumed to have been caused by the experimental treatment.
In essence, the dependent variable is the effect of the independent variable. In the comparison
of the two sales approaches to increase sales the measure of sales is the dependent variable
(Johnson and Kuby, 2011).
n differences between means – the mean age for purchasing team merchandise will be
significantly lower for males than for females;
n relationships between variables – the higher the disposable income of fans the greater
their potential to purchase;
n differences in frequency of occurrences – there will be a significantly higher number of men
than women who watch the English Premier League on Subscription TV.
The research hypothesis can either be one tailed or two tailed (Chase and Brown, 2000). A
one tailed research hypothesis predicts the direction of the relationship of differences. For
example, that there will be significantly more men than women who attend English Premier
League matches.
A two tailed research hypothesis is non-directional. For example: there will be a significant
gender difference in English Premier League match attendance. In this hypothesis the gender
differences could be one of two possible differences. That is, more males than females or
more females than males. This is therefore referred to as a two tailed hypothesis.
The null hypothesis (H0) is the negation of the research hypothesis. It claims there is no
relationship between the independent and dependent variables or there is no difference
between means or frequencies (Chase and Brown, 2000). That is, there will be no significant
gender difference in English Premier League match attendance. The null hypothesis is
sometimes called the chance hypothesis because it claims any results obtained in an experimental
or observational study are just due to chance. In statistics it is always the null hypothesis not
the research hypothesis that is tested. The reason for this is quite straightforward. You can
only work out the probability that a statement is true for a precisely worded statement. You
cannot work out precise probability for an imprecise statement.
The null hypothesis (H0) makes a precise statement: for example, that the difference
between two means is zero or that the correlation (relationship) between two variables is
zero. For this reason H0 can be statistically tested, and the probability of it being true can be
found. On the other hand, the research hypothesis (H1) makes an imprecise statement. For
example, one mean is greater than another or that the correlation (relationship) between
variables is something other than zero. Because of this imprecise statement, the H1 cannot
be directly statistically tested (Chase and Brown, 2000).
281
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
How does the sport management researcher go about testing a hypothesis? Usually in a
roundabout fashion that at first glance may seem unusual. For example, to find out whether
Chicago Cubs fans are more aware of their team’s main sponsor than non-fans, a sport
management researcher will begin by claiming that the difference does not exist – that is,
the null hypothesis is true. They will then conduct a statistical test to determine the extent
of the difference. The probability of the null hypothesis being true is then determined from
the results of the statistical test.
As these two steps are central to understanding inferential statistics we shall restate them
in more technical terms.
1 To test a research hypothesis (H1) you must formulate the corresponding null
hypothesis (H0).
2 You then conduct an inferential statistical test to determine the extent of the
difference or relationships (types of inferential statistics are discussed later).
n If the data from the test disagrees with the null hypothesis (H0) you can reject H0
and accept the H1.
n However, if the data is compatible with the H0, then you have to accept the H0
and reject the H1.
As we have just stated, the H0 must always be a precisely worded statement, for example:
H1: Chicago Cubs fans will have significantly higher mean awareness scores than non-fans.
H0: The difference between the mean awareness scores of Chicago Cubs fans and non-fans
is zero.
We next have to look at how we go about proving whether H0 is true or not. That is, how
can we be sure the findings are genuine and not due to chance. To do this we need to understand
three key concepts that underpin all inferential statistical tests. These three concepts are: the
p-value (i.e. the probability of H0 being true), degrees of freedom (df) and the confidence
limit. We shall now discuss these concepts.
The researcher tested three hypotheses relating to the academic achievement of sport
management students in order to compare athletes and non-athletes. However, other data
282
INTRODUCTION TO INFERENTIAL STATISTICS
that may bias the sample was collected, such as working hours, practice and competition
hours, gender, race and sport. The primary hypothesis was found to be true, that student
athletes do have lower GPAs (grade point average) than non-athletes. Other hypotheses were
found to be inconclusive.
P-value
The probability value (or p-value) is the most central concept in inferential statistics. There
are a number of ways of defining this notion of ‘p’ that can be considered precise and somewhat
less precise. For example, a precise definition is that ‘p’ is a measure of the extent to which
the obtained data agrees with H0. A less precise definition is that ‘p’ is the probability that
the obtained results are due to chance. The final aim of every inferential statistic is to produce
a p-value that will allow the sport management researcher to make a decision about a null
hypothesis. Being a measure of probability, the values of ‘p’ will lie between zero and one
(Muijs, 2011; Howitt and Cramer, 2000).
In order to accurately calculate the p-value the sport management researcher has to take
into consideration what is known as degrees of freedom (df), whether the H1 is one tailed or
two tailed, and then compare the p-value with the confidence limit. A confidence limit is an
agreed probability, and if the p-value is above this limit we must accept the H0 (Bluman,
2001).
Degrees of freedom
Two important factors have a bearing on probability of the null hypothesis being true. These
are:
We discussed one and two tailed hypotheses earlier in this chapter, so we will now concentrate
on the second factor: the number of subjects in the sample. It is intuitive that the greater the
number of subjects sampled, the less likely you are to encounter a chance or random
occurrence in your research. However, it is not mathematically correct to use N by itself to
arrive at a p-value. For this, it is more appropriate to use the concept of degrees of freedom.
Degrees of freedom simply mean the number of scores that are free to vary within any
given set. For example, if you select five numbers and write them down you would be free
to vary all numbers, i.e. df = N = 5
If you choose five numbers and the total must be 25, then four numbers are free to vary
but the fifth being the last to be chosen must be fixed. For example, 3+2+6+4+X = 25.
This can be expressed as:
283
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
df = N–1
= 5–1
= 4
If you choose five numbers, the mean of which is to be 6, the same situation would be true.
Four numbers could vary but once they are chosen, the fifth would be fixed. This is shown
below:
The df can be considered the corrected N. It is the number of observations minus the number
of parameters being estimated.
When we select a sample for our research and find the mean, standard deviation, correlation
coefficient etc. we are estimating the population parameters, that is, from the sample we are
estimating the mean of the population. The parameters restrict the degrees of freedom in the
sample observations. As such, when calculating ‘p’ (keeping in mind we must consider N,
the number in our sample), we must correct for the fact that the use of any parameter has
restricted the degrees of freedom of our observations (Thomas and Nelson, 1996). For
example, say we want to see whether there is a difference in the mean sponsor awareness
scores of Chicago Cubs fans and non-fans. Each group has an N of 10. If we apply an inferential
statistical test known as an unpaired t-test (this test is discussed in Chapter 20) to measure
the difference between the means of the two groups, we can say that the degrees of freedom
for each group has been restricted by one parameter (i.e. the mean of each group).
In other words, while we have started out with N = 20, the fact that we are using two
parameters results in the loss of two degrees of freedom. This needs to be considered in the
calculation of ‘p’. If we used N = 20 to calculate the p-value we may reject H0, but it is possible
that if df = 18 it might have resulted in H0 being accepted. For other inferential statistical tests
the calculation for df will vary, but will be in accordance with the rules highlighted above.
Although statistical computer programs will automatically produce a p-value for you it is
important that you understand the principles that underpin the calculations of the p-value.
hypothesis is rejected and the research hypothesis is accepted. However, if you show that
there are more than five chances out of 100 that the null hypothesis is true then the null
hypothesis is retained and the research hypothesis is rejected.
This can be expressed in more technical terms as:
n If p ≤ 0.05 then H0 is rejected and H1 is accepted (please note ≤ is less than or equal
to).
n If p > 0.05 then H0 is accepted and H1 is rejected.
HYPOTHETICAL CASE
A team is conducting research on the effect of a specific sponsor’s, in this case a mobile
phone company, fan engagement strategies. The team (and sponsor) would like to know if
fans are more inclined to like, purchase and recommend that mobile phone provider compared
to the general public since the beginning of the sponsorship engagement activities.
1 What hypotheses and null hypotheses could you test? Would each test be one-tailed or
two-tailed?
2 What questions could you ask to test those hypotheses?
3 What sampling technique would you use? What groups and how many of each group?
CONCLUSION
This chapter has outlined the fundamental principles that underpin the approaches sport
management researchers must take in order to test the outcomes of their empirical
investigations. We began by defining the nature and purpose of inferential statistics, arguing
that these statistical methods go further than just describing data; they attempt to determine
whether differences or relationships are really due to chance and whether they allow us to
285
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
infer any such differences to populations. The chapter then led you through some key concepts
that are central to conducting inferential statistical analyses. We have argued that you cannot
understand hypothesis testing in inferential statistics without understanding certain key
concepts and their relationship to inferential statistics.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
Inferential statistics take data analysis one step further than descriptive statistics by asking two
related questions. First, can the description be regarded as genuine or could the results be
due to chance or random happenings? Second, can the results that describe a sample be
generalized to the population from which the sample was drawn? With this in mind:
n Discuss when the sport management researcher would use inferential statistics.
n What are the advantages of being able to generalize from a sample?
286
Chapter 19
LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of this chapter you should be able to:
n explain how the sport management researcher can explore relationships between
variables;
n distinguish between a scattergram and scatterplot;
n explain the purpose of a correlation coefficient;
n define and explain Pearson product moment correlation coefficient;
n distinguish between the different types of regression analysis.
KEY TERMS
A correlation coefficient – is a single numerical index that summarizes some, but not all, of
the key features of a scattergram.
Pearson product moment correlation coefficient – identifies the closeness of fit of the
points of a scattergram to the best-fitting straight line through those points and gives
information about whether the slope of the scattergram is positive or negative.
The squared correlation coefficient – is known as the coefficient of determination.
Regression – allows the researcher to make predictions, and regression equations always use
a predictor variable and a criterion variable.
KEY THEMES
n What do scattergrams and scatterplots tell the sport management researcher?
n Why would a sport management researcher use regression analysis?
287
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter will discuss in general terms how the relationships between two or more
variables can be explained through the use of statistical techniques. In doing this it will describe
some of the main graphical and tabular methods for presenting interrelationships. It will then
discuss the meaningfulness and reliability of correlation coefficients and tools to measure this
relationship between variables.
INTRODUCTION
Although it is essential to be able to describe the characteristics of each variable in your research
both diagrammatically and numerically, the interrelationships between variables are also
an essential component of Sport Management Research. For example, membership opinion
polling is something we are familiar with and the most common use of single-variable statistics
that most of the population will encounter. Sport management researchers may ask a variety
of questions about candidates who are seeking appointment as President of a Football Club,
and voting intentions, which are reported separately. However, sport management researchers
often report relationships between variables. For example, if one asks whether the voting
intentions of male members and female members differ, it is really to enquire whether there
is a relationship between the variable ‘sex’ and the variable ‘voting intention’. Similarly, if
one was to ask whether the popularity of the current Club President has changed over time,
this really implies that there may be a relationship between the variable ‘time’ and the variable
‘popularity’ of the Club President. This is what is meant by the interrelationship between
variables.
Choosing appropriate techniques to show relationships between two variables requires an
understanding of the difference between nominal category data and numerical score data.
The type of charts or tables you use depends on whether the variables are scores, nominal
categories, or both. Where both variables take the form of numerical scores, generally the
best form of graphical presentation is the scattergram or scatterplot. The values of one variable
are plotted against the values on the other variable (Harnett and Soni, 1991; Johnson and
Kuby, 2011; Thomas and Nelson, 1996).
A scatterplot is something you might see in a financial newspaper. The share price of say
Manchester United Football Club is plotted on the Y axis and the year is plotted on the X
axis. This fictitious example is shown in Figure 19.1 and we can see that if we plot the share
price overtime it is dropping.
A scattergram contains the essential features of a scatterplot. That is, it is a graph
representing the distribution of two variables in a sample population. One variable is plotted
on the vertical axis; the second is plotted on the horizontal axis. The scores or values of each
sample unit are usually represented by dots. A scattergram demonstrates the degree or
tendency with which the variables occur in association with each other. A scattergram may
also include a line that runs through these points (Harnett and Soni, 1991; Johnson and Kuby,
2011; Thomas and Nelson, 1996). This is called the regression line and is highlighted in
Figure 19.2.
288
CORRELATION AND REGRESSION ANALYSIS
800
700
600
500
Share price
400
300
200
100
0
2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
Year
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.0
Y-axis
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
X-axis
In Figure 19.2 the horizontal line is your X axis with the values written along it. The
vertical line is your Y axis and the values as listed against this axis. The different scores are
plotted and represented as squares. The point marked represents a case where the score on
the X variable is 4 and on the Y variable is 2. The line that runs through these points is
called the line of ‘best fit’. It is a line that runs through all the data and is also called the
regression line.
Sometimes, and as is the case in the above example, it is possible to see that the points on
a scattergram fall more or less in a straight line. In some instances, however, it is difficult to
289
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
Male Female
Previously a member f = 20 f = 25
Not previously a member f = 30 f = 14
illustrate the number of overlapping cases (i.e. the same scores) on a scattergram. Under
these circumstances sport management researchers might use what is known as contingency
or cross-tabulation tables in which scores are allocated into bands and expressed in frequency
of occurrences. An example of a cross-tabulation/contingency table example is shown
Table 19.1.
Table 19.1 simple shows the frequencies of each group and whether they have been a
previous member of the club or not. If we wished we could summarize it as a percentage.
We could say that 40 per cent of the males surveyed had previously been a member.
CORRELATION COEFFICIENTS
Although a scattergram is an important tool for showing relationships between variables it is
space consuming. For many purposes it is convenient to have the main features of a scattergram
expressed as a single numerical index. This single numerical index is the correlation coefficient.
This is a number index that summarizes some, but not all, of the key features of a scattergram.
To obtain this index there are a number of underlying assumptions required (Bluman, 2001;
Howitt and Cramer, 2000; Johnson and Kuby, 2011; Keppel, 1973; Wild and Seber, 2000).
These are:
n related pairs – data must be collected from related pairs. For example, if you obtain a
score on an X variable there must also be a score on the Y variable from the same
subject;
n scale of measurement – score data;
n normality – the scores within each variable should be normally distributed;
n linearity – the relationships between two variables must be linear (that is only affected
by each other);
n homoscedasticity – the variability in the scores for one variable is roughly the same at
all values of the other variable. That is, it is concerned with how scores cluster
uniformly around the regression line. The variability in the X scores is roughly the
same variability that exists in the Y scores (Bluman, 2001; Howitt and Cramer, 2000;
Johnson and Kuby, 2011; Keppel, 1973; Wild and Seber, 2000).
There are two types of correlation coefficients. Pearson product moment correlation and
Spearman’s rho. In this chapter we will look at Pearson’s correlation. Spearman’s rho will
be discussed in greater detail in Chapter 21.
290
CORRELATION AND REGRESSION ANALYSIS
on the second variable (Y). The correlation coefficient is a measure of the lack of variation
around a straight line though a scattergram. When we get a large positive value of covariance
there is a strong positive relationship between the two variables. A large negative value indicates
a negative relationship between the two variables. If there is no relationship between the
variables then the covariance is zero (Bluman, 2001; Howitt and Cramer, 2000; Wild and
Seber, 2000).
Another example of using the Pearson correlation coefficient may be that a sport
management researcher is interested in determining the relationship between playing contact
sports and the reported incidence of violence towards women. The researcher collects data
from the appropriate databases and formulates the following hypotheses:
n null hypothesis: there is no relationship between playing contact sports and reported
incidences of violence towards women;
n research hypothesis: there is a relationship between playing contact sports and
reported incidences of violence towards women.
Before commencing it is always good practice to draw the scattergram for any correlation
coefficient you are calculating as a cross-checking measure. Once the calculation is completed
the researcher will need to determine statistical significance by referring to the critical value
tables of correlation coefficients. Remember the sign of the correlation coefficient tells you
whether the relationship is positive or negative. In order to establish how much variance is
shared you need to square the correlation of coefficient. The squared correlation coefficient
is known as the coefficient of determination (Howitt and Cramer, 2000; Muijs, 2011; Wild and
Seber, 2000). For example, a correlation coefficient of 0.8 means 64 per cent of the variance
is shared.
Part of this research included Pearson correlations between corporate social responsibility
(CSR) and variables such as win percentage (–0.329), team revenues (0.164) and team
value (–0.013). Win percentage seemed to have the only minor relationship – as teams win
more, self-reported involvement in CSR decreased.
292
CORRELATION AND REGRESSION ANALYSIS
Regression analysis
The vast majority of Sport Management Research is aimed at accounting for an event or a
particular type of behaviour. Regardless of the research question, data analysis treats variables
in the same way. Statistics uses numbers to find relationships between variables. It does not
consider what the variables are, only the relations between the numbers.
The use of any statistical model produces two types of variability. That explained by the
manipulation of, or association between variables, and that which can’t be explained,
unaccounted for variability or error. A general statistical model can be represented as:
As previously discussed, good methodology plays a critical role in maximizing the variability
accounted for. The best or most complex statistical analyses will not rectify problems with
the data collection procedure. The statistics are a tool for the analysis of this data only. They
cannot provide a miraculous cure for methodological sloppiness or errors.
The simplest model used in data analysis concerns description: how well the model is
accepted as a true representation or description of behaviour or phenomena is determined
by the amount of variability accounted for by the model. The size and distribution of the
error evaluates this. The simplest form of a model is a single parameter where a single measure
is produced. In many circumstances taking more variables into account can reduce the error
term, thereby producing a better fit of the model. For example, does the number of years
of experience as a sport manager contribute to the salary earned? A simple regression model
is a two parameter model that works on this notion. This statistical technique allows prediction
of a score on one (dependent or criterion) variable based on a score on a second (independent
or predictor) variable (Bluman, 2001; Howitt and Cramer, 2000; Muijs, 2011; Wild and
Seber, 2000).
So we have established that regression that allows the researcher to make predictions and
regression equations always uses a predictor variable and a criterion variable (Muijs, 2011;
Thomas and Nelson, 1996; Wild and Seber, 2000). When undertaking regression analysis
the horizontal axis (X axis) should always be used to represent the variable from which the
prediction is being made. The vertical dimension (Y axis) should always represent what is
being predicted. We have previously noted, however, that a scattergram can act as a tool for
prediction. If we draw a straight line as best we can through the points on a scattergram, this
line could be used as a basis for making predictions. Remember this line is called the regression
line. The problem with this procedure is that prediction depends on the particular line drawn
through the points on a scattergram. We could all draw different lines. These subjective factors
are not desirable and a method that is not influenced by subjectivity and subsequently reduces
the possibility of variability would be desirable. To do this, mathematical ways of determining
the regression lines have been developed (Zikmund, 2000).
293
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
The line through a set of points on a scattergram is called the regression line. The sum of
deviations of the scattergram points from the regression line should be minimal. In order to
specify the regression line for any scattergram, you quantify two things: first, the point at
which the regression line cuts the vertical axis. It can take a positive or negative value and it
is normally denoted in regression as point a or the intercept. Second, the slope of the regression
line, which can be positive or negative, is normally denoted by the letter b. The slope is
simply the number of units that the regression line moves up the vertical axis for each unit
it moves along the horizontal axis. Prediction is the main function of regression (Muijs, 2011).
The major differences between correlation and regression are first, that regression retains
the original units of measurement so direct comparison between regression analyses based
on different variables is difficult. Correlation coefficients can be readily compared as they are
essentially on a standardized measurement scale and free of the original units of measurements.
Second, the correlation coefficient does not specify the slope of the scattergram as a regression
analysis does. The correlation coefficient indicates the spread of variability of the points around
the regression line in the scattergram. In other words, correlation and regression have
somewhat different functions despite their close similarities. Linear regression analysis
produces a line of best fit referred to as the least squares regression equation. This line can be
thought of as a prediction line (Bluman, 2001). How linear regression could be applied to
Sport Management Research could be as follows.
A group of athletes’ absence from work after poor performance at the London Olympic
Games was calculated in days over a six-month period. A questionnaire designed to measure
the amount of positive reinforcement received by the athlete from family and friends showed
no overall relationship with the amount of absence from work. However, the greater the
amount of criticism received by the athlete the more the athlete was absent from work. In
this case the sport management researcher could carry out a regression analysis to establish
what the best prediction of absence from work would be for a person with a certain positive
reinforcement score. It should be remembered though that the proper interpretation of the
regression equation depends on the scattergram between the two variables showing a more
or less linear (straight line) trend. If it does not show this, then the interpretations of the
regression calculations for the slope and intercept will be misleading since the method
assumes a straight line
Multiple regression
In most instances it is unlikely that a single independent variable can account for the majority
of the variability in a dependent variable. Generally, a number of variables contribute to any
behaviour (Bluman, 2001; Howitt and Cramer, 2000; Muijs, 2011; Wild and Seber, 2000).
For example, if you are considering purchasing some sporting memorabilia there are a
number of factors that contribute to your decision whether to purchase or not. When more
than one independent variable is used we generally are able to account for more of the
variability (or components of the dependent variable) than when a single independent variable
is used. When more than one independent variable is used in a regression analysis the analysis
is termed multiple regression analysis. In this case the value of Y is obtained using two or
294
CORRELATION AND REGRESSION ANALYSIS
more independent variables. Multiple regression takes the influence of all independent
variables into account when predicting Y. In multiple regression analysis variability in the
dependent variable is accounted for in the way the independent variables are related to one
another and the dependent variable. In multiple regression the regression equation is the same
as simple linear regression except that there are several predictors and each predictor has its
own (partial) regression coefficient (Thomas and Nelson, 1996; Wild and Seber, 2000).
There are three major regression models. These are: standard/simultaneous regression,
hierarchical regression and stepwise regression (Thomas and Nelson, 1996). These models
differ in two ways. They differ first in the treatment of overlapping variability due to the
correlation of the independent variables, and second, in terms of entry of the independent
variables into the equation. In the standard/simultaneous model all independent variables
enter the regression equation at once because you want to examine the relationship between
the whole set of predictors and the dependent variable. In hierarchical multiple regression
you determine the order of entry of the independent variables based on theoretical knowledge.
In stepwise regression the number of independent variables entered and the order of entry
is predetermined by statistical criteria generated by the stepwise procedure (Bluman, 2001;
Howitt and Cramer, 2000; Muijs, 2011; Wild and Seber, 2000). The choice of technique
depends largely on the researcher’s goals. In the case of sport management it may be that a
national sport marketing manager of a large fitness chain wants to determine the effect of
shelf space and price on the sales of protein drinks. A random sample of 25 equal sized stores
could be selected and the sales, shelf space in square metres, and price per kilogram recorded.
All three regression models discussed could be applied to this research problem.
Ten independent (Y) variables involving demographics, behaviours and attitudes were used
to predict how much money people may spend on sport apparel (the dependent or X variable).
The profile with the highest probability (0.60) to purchase sport apparel was females aged
41–45, university educated, small family, intensive sport participation, partner that is
involved in sport, highly favourable attitude towards sport, with many sport friends, but does
not watch much sport on TV.
295
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
CONCLUSION
This chapter discussed in general terms how the relationships between two or more variables
can be explained through the use of statistical techniques. It described some of the main
graphical and tabular methods for presenting interrelationships. It then discussed the
meaningfulness and reliability of correlation coefficients and tools to measure this relationship
between variables. It finished by providing a general discussion of multiple regression analysis.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
In this chapter we discussed how to examine the relationships between variables. With this
in mind:
n Identify how the sport management researcher can graphically and numerically
represent the relationships between two variables. Prepare an example that highlights
this.
n Discuss regression and how it differs from multiple regressions. Provide examples of
when the sport management researcher may use regression and multiple regression
techniques.
296
Chapter 20
Determining difference
among groups
LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of this chapter you should be able to:
n explain how the sport management researcher establishes the nature of the variable;
n distinguish between dependent and independent variables;
n define and identify different types of t-tests;
n define and explain analysis of variance and repeated measures ANOVA;
n explain the purpose of post hoc testing;
n define and explain analysis of covariance;
n explain when the sport management researcher would use multivariate analysis of
variance.
KEY TERMS
Univariate statistics – seek to measure the differences between a single variable and a fixed
value.
Bivariate statistics – deal with the relationship between two variables.
Multivariate statistics – deal with complex interrelationships between two or more variables.
KEY THEMES
n Which inferential test is appropriate for the sport management researcher to use in a
given situation?
n How do you determine difference between groups?
297
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
CHAPTER OVERVIEW
So far in this text we have noted that different types of data (nominal, ordinal and interval)
and different types of hypothesis (differences or relationships) require different methods of
analysis. In this chapter we examine the criteria we use to establish which inferential test
should be chosen to effect an appropriate analysis. Inferential statistics can fall into three groups.
These include: univariate, bivariate and multivariate (Harnett and Soni, 1991; Johnson and
Kuby, 2011). Univariate statistics seek to measure the differences between a single variable
and a fixed value. For example, the researcher may want to know whether the English Premier
League viewing habits of a group of men aged 20–25 in Manchester, England is significantly
different from the national average of the same sample. In this case, the single variable is the
viewing habits of men located in Manchester, and the fixed value is the national average of
viewing habits. Bivariate statistics deal with the relationship between two variables. Sport
management researchers may be interested in gender differences in certain behaviours such
as purchasing merchandise. In this case we have two variables: gender (independent variable)
and purchasing behaviour (dependent variable). Gender is the nominal variable (male vs female)
while purchasing behaviours is an interval level variable (say, scores on a test of intent to
purchase). Multivariate statistics deals with complex interrelationships between two or more
variables. Let’s say we want to test whether the architectural skills of sport stadium designers
are more closely related to creative styles than to intelligence. Here we have two independent
variables (creative styles and intelligence) and one dependent variable (architectural skills).
First we need to identify the independent and dependent variables, the type of data involved
in each and where applicable the number of categories per variable. For this hypothesis question
we could use the data in Table 20.1.
We have established that it is a difference hypothesis as we are trying to predict a difference
between the means of two different groups on the dependent variable. We also know the
number of categories in the independent variable (alcoholic and non-alcoholic), so we can
say there are two groups of fans to be tested. The first group consumes alcoholic drinks and
the second group consumes non-alcoholic drinks. Since we have two groups in our hypothesis
we know that we must apply the unpaired t-test. A t-test is used to determine whether a set
298
DETERMINING DIFFERENCE AMONG GROUPS
Nominal-level
data
Nature of the
Ordinal-level
independent
data
variable
Interval-level
data
Nominal-level
data
Nature of the
Ordinal-level
dependent
data
variable
Interval-level
data
Number of
categories in
the independent
variable
Difference
Nature of the
Number of
hypothesis
independent
Relationship groups
tested
299
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
or sets of scores are from the same population. In other words, is there a significant difference
between two sets of measures? There are two main types of t-tests that will be covered in
this chapter:
Underpinning assumptions
There are generic assumptions underlying all t-tests. These relate to the scale of measurement,
that is the data should be at the interval or ratio level of measurement; the principle of random
sampling, the scores should be randomly sampled from the population of interest; and the
concept of normality, the scores should be normally distributed in the population (Howitt
and Cramer, 2000; Johnson and Kuby, 2011). The assumption of normality is a prerequisite
for many inferential statistics. The normal curve describes a particular shape of a frequency
curve. The normal curve is characterized by the mean, median and mode being at the same
point (centre of the distribution) (Bryman and Bell, 2011).
The question is whether the mean scores in the two conditions are sufficiently different from
each other to fall in the extreme 5 per cent of cases. If they do it may allow us to generalize
(depending on the size of the sample) from the research findings. The key characteristic is
that a group of participants is measured twice on a single variable in slightly different
conditions or circumstances. The scores on this example are on the dependent variable of
swimming efficiency. The independent variable refers to the various conditions in which the
measurements are being taken, wearing normal or sharkskin swimsuits. If we were to
300
DETERMINING DIFFERENCE AMONG GROUPS
conclude that the two-tailed significance is less than .05, we would accept H1 and reject H0.
Therefore, a significant difference does exist between swimming efficiency with and without
the sharkskin swimsuit. The sharkskin swimsuit significantly improves the number of metres
swum per minute.
If we were to conclude that the two-tailed significance for without sharkskin swimsuit indicates
that the probability is less than .05 and is not significant we would accept the null hypothesis
(H0) and reject the research hypothesis (H1). In relation to with-suit, if we were to conclude
that no significant differences are apparent (p>.05) we would again accept the null hypothesis
(H0) and reject the research hypothesis (H1). That is, there is no significant difference in
swimming efficiency between male and female swimmers either with or without the sharkskin
swimsuit.
Analysis of variance
In order to use analysis of variance (ANOVA), three general conditions must be satisfied.
First, for each condition the data are normally distributed, often referred to as the normality
assumption. Second, each condition is assumed to have the same variance, referred to as homo-
geneity of variance. When differences between groups are being considered, the size of the
standard deviations between groups is important. This is referred to as homogeneity of variance
and is tested with a number of different statistics. Violation of this assumption inflates
301
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
the type 1 error rate (Chase and Brown, 2000). Finally it is assumed that the performance
of one individual or element is not influenced by a score obtained by another individual or
element; this is referred to as the independence of observations. The general opinion currently
is that if there are equal numbers of subjects in the groups, modest violations of these
assumptions are acceptable when performing ANOVA (Howitt and Cramer, 2000; Keppel,
1973; Muijs, 2011; Wild and Seber, 2000).
Underpinning theory
The analysis of variance (ANOVA) is a general statistical technique for comparing the means
of more than two treatments (levels of independent variables). It is related to the t-test and
has variations corresponding to independent and repeated measure designs. ANOVA operates
using the principle that each individual score can be portioned (or separated) into a number
of components that are additive. The general idea underlying ANOVA is to determine
whether differences between groups occur as a result of presentation of different levels of
the independent variable or whether differences found are due to chance fluctuations only.
The notion behind this form of analysis is that the total variability in a set of scores can be
split up into a series of components, each of which can be attributed to different sources.
These are within and between groups’ variability. ANOVA describes the partitioning of terms
such as the sum of squares. The sum of squares is the sum of the squared differences between
individual scores and the mean of the group of interest. At its most general level of description
the total sum of squares is divided up into a component due to differences between treatments
(differences between the different levels of the independent variable) and a component that
measures the variability of scores within conditions (within group variability) (Howitt and
Cramer, 2000; Keppel, 1973; Muijs, 2011; Wild and Seber, 2000).
ANOVA is based on a comparison of the variability between and within treatments
(Howitt and Cramer, 2000; Johnson and Kuby, 2011; Keppel, 1973; Wild and Seber, 2000).
Let us consider within-treatment variability first. For any experimental condition carried out
on a group of participants we would expect the scores within the condition to vary. Examples
of causes of this variability are chance fluctuations, individual differences or measurement
error. This gives you an estimate of the general variability within each group treatment. This
provides an estimate of the sampling error and can be measured by estimating the variability
of individual scores about the individual treatment mean. Now let us consider the differences
between treatments. If the null hypothesis is true, the treatment means are equal. It is not
expected that the obtained treatment means will be exactly equal, due to sampling error
caused by general variability of scores. The amount of variability found between condition
means is determined by the sampling distribution of the means (where the participants come
from in the population) and how much each group differs from the total mean. This tells us
about the influence of each level of the independent variable plus associated error. With this
form of variability we take into account the difference between the mean for each level
of the independent variable and the mean of all conditions, together with the number of
participants in each of the individual groups, which is used as a weighting factor (Howitt and
Cramer, 2000; Johnson and Kuby, 2011; Keppel, 1973; Wild and Seber, 2000).
302
DETERMINING DIFFERENCE AMONG GROUPS
In ANOVA the variability found within and between treatments is evaluated using a ratio.
The key concept is that within-group variability represents the sampling error and the
between-group variability represents sampling error plus the treatment effects. Therefore,
under the null hypothesis, where there is no treatment effect, this value, called the F ratio
or variance ratio, should be about 1.0. If there is an effect of treatment the F ratio should be
greater than one (Howitt and Cramer, 2000; Johnson and Kuby, 2011; Keppel, 1973; Wild
and Seber, 2000).
303
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
period. Basically, the repeated measure is used as four levels of the independent variable,
which is the packaging. The most frequent use of repeated measures involves factorial
ANOVA (which has been previously discussed). In this case one or more of the factors
(independent variables) are repeated measures.
According to Pedhazur (1982), repeated measures designs have some key advantages. First,
they provide the sport management researcher with the opportunity to control for individual
differences among participants. This is important as it is probably the largest source of variation
in most research studies. Second, repeated measure designs are more economical in that fewer
participants are required. Finally, repeated measure designs allow for phenomena to be studied
across time. There is, however, a disadvantage with repeated measure designs that should be
known. As indicated above, repeated measure designs have the additional assumption of
sphericity. A failure to meet this assumption can result in an increase in type 1 error (Howitt
and Cramer, 2000; Johnson and Kuby, 2011).
Analysis of covariance
The aim of analysis of covariance (ANCOVA) is similar to that of ANOVA. That is, it aims
to evaluate differences between groups. ANCOVA combines the features of regression
analysis and ANOVA. The technique is used to statistically remove the effects of an unwanted
variable (the covariate) prior to evaluating the effects between the groups. In other words,
it aims to adjust the independent variable for some distractor variable – called the covariate
(Johnson and Kuby, 2011; Keppel, 1973; Zikmund, 2000). Before undertaking ANCOVA
it is important to ensure that all six assumptions are accounted for. These assumptions can
be found in many statistics textbooks.
To highlight how this might be applied in Sport Management Research let us say we are
interested in looking at whether women or men were more successful at selling corporate
304
DETERMINING DIFFERENCE AMONG GROUPS
boxes for a professional sporting league. The researcher records sales made by 22 corporate
sales representatives over a 24-month period. However, the researcher is aware that years
of selling experience would also contribute to the success of the representative and considers
it may be fairer to make a comparison while taking into account this added factor. Thus the
dependent variable is sales in number of corporate boxes sold over a 24-month period, the
independent variable is gender and the covariate is years of experience in selling corporate
boxes.
CONCLUSION
This chapter has examined the criteria we use to establish which inferential test should be
chosen to effect an appropriate analysis. It identified the decisions a sport management
researcher must make before an appropriate inferential test can be selected. In particular, it
discussed the need to identify the independent and dependent variables, the type of data
involved and where applicable the number of categories per variable. By doing this the sport
management researcher is then able to perform the appropriate statistical analysis to the data,
which will allow them to accept or reject the null hypothesis.
305
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
RESEARCH QUESTIONS
In this chapter we examined the criteria used to establish which inferential test should be
chosen to affect an appropriate analysis. With this in mind:
n Identify how the sport management researcher can determine which inferential test is
appropriate for a given hypothesis.
n Discuss analysis of variance (ANOVA) and how it differs from multivariate analysis of
variance (MANOVA) and analysis of covariance (ANCOVA).
306
Chapter 21
Chi-square and
Spearman’s rho
LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of this chapter you should be able to:
KEY TERMS
Spearman’s rho – is a non-parametric alternative to Pearson’s correlation coefficient.
Chi-square test – is an inferential statistic used to measure the difference between an observed
set of frequencies and the expected frequencies under the null hypothesis.
KEY THEMES
n What are the different types of chi-square tests?
n When would the sport management researcher utilize non-parametric tests?
307
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
CHAPTER OVERVIEW
When you have serious violations of the assumptions required to perform parametric statistical
tests, then non-parametric tests are used. These tests however tend to be less powerful than
their parametric counterparts. Examples of non-parametric statistical tests include chi-square
(for frequencies) and Spearman’s rho (for correlations). We shall begin by first discussing
chi-square tests and then move on to a discussion of the use of Spearman’s rho for correlations.
CHI-SQUARE TESTS
The chi-square test is an inferential statistic used to measure the difference between an observed
set of frequencies and the expected frequencies under the null hypothesis. This test deals with
nominal-level data. It is generally used to investigate the difference between two groups
(nominal-level independent variable and some dependent variable that is also at a nominal
level). There are three assumptions you need to address before conducting chi-square tests.
These are random sampling, independence of observations and size of expected frequencies
(Harnett and Soni, 1991; Muijs, 2011; Thomas and Nelson, 1996; Wild and Seber, 2000).
If a sport management researcher has several samples of data that involve frequencies rather
than scores, a statistical test for frequency data must be used. The following are some
examples of research of this sort:
If we refer to the sporting orientation example (Table 21.2) we are able to determine
whether a preference for specific sporting orientation exists. Although the data suggests on
308
CHI-SQUARE AND SPEARMAN’S RHO
casual observation that there is a preference for contact sports by both groups, we are interested
primarily in whether the difference between the observed frequencies and expected frequencies
is statistically significant.
In each of the previous examples, both variables consist of a relatively small number of
categories. The independent variable is the sample and the dependent variable consists of one
of several categories. In the case of the sporting orientation example the dependent variable
categories linked to orientation include contact sports (football etc.), non-contact sports
(basketball etc.) and form sports (diving etc.). So we can see the different samples are the
independent variables and the different categories are the dependent variables.
Each cell contains the frequencies of the individuals in that particular sample and that
particular category. So the cell that corresponds to sample 2 (middle distance runners) and
category 3 (Africans) contains a frequency of 17. This means that in your data there are 17
cases of middle distance runners that are African. In other words, a cell is the intersection of
a row and a column. It is important that you know how to read these tables because they are
used in chi-square analysis. The statistical question based on this table is whether the
distribution of frequencies in the different samples is so varied that it is unlikely that these
all come from the same sample. That is, distance runners will be predominately of African
descent. The population is defined by the null hypothesis that suggests there is no relationship
between the independent and dependent variables. So our table is saying there is no relationship
between type of race and success in particular running events. This is presented as a cross-
tabulation or contingency table. An example of a cross-tabulation table based on these
principles is shown in Table 21.3.
Goodness of fit could be used if you were interested in people’s attitudes towards establishing
a professional sport franchise in a particular city. You may want to measure the different
response frequencies, for example those in favour, those against and those undecided. Your
309
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
single categorical variable is ‘attitude’. You would then be able to determine whether a
significant difference in frequency of attitudes exists. In sum, a chi-square test for goodness
of fit will allow us to determine whether differences in frequency exist across responses
(Harnett and Soni, 1991; Muijs, 2011; Wild and Seber, 2000; Zikmund, 2000). If we were
provided with the data as shown in Table 21.4 about the attitudes of 4,800 people towards
allowing golf as an Olympic sport we could construct the appropriate hypotheses.
We could then determine whether there are significant differences in the frequency of
attitudes towards allowing golf as an Olympic sport.
Independence or relatedness as a test could be used if say a publisher of a sports magazine
wants to determine whether preference is dependent on the geographical location of the reader.
In this case your two categorical variables are geographical location (let us say metropolitan
or regional) and sport magazines (let us say Sports Illustrated or Inside Sport). What this
means is that we have some observed data (observed frequencies) that we can then use to
determine whether a particular preference exists (Harnett and Soni, 1991; Muijs, 2011; Wild
and Seber, 2000).
Let us reshape the above example to highlight what we mean. We might want to know
whether people in metropolitan or regional areas prefer Nike or Adidas athletic shoes. If we
have observed data that tells us which shoes a sample of people in a metropolitan or regional
area purchase we can then determine what the expected frequencies would be under the null
hypothesis. These sources of information can then tell us whether a true preference exists
for a particular brand of athletic shoe in these locations.
What we are interested in knowing is whether there is a particular shoe preference. We
can determine this by calculating the difference between our observed frequencies and
expected frequencies. Under the null hypothesis there should be no relationship between the
independent and dependent variables. That is there should be no relationship between the
type of shoe purchased and geographical location. To substantiate this claim we need to
determine whether the difference between our observed frequencies (what we know) and
our expected frequencies (what it should be) is statistically significant. This will indicate
310
CHI-SQUARE AND SPEARMAN’S RHO
To determine whether this is true we need to know the observed frequencies, that is, what is
our obtained data? We also need to calculate what the expected frequencies would be. This is
what the data would be if the null hypothesis was true. There is no relationship between
university students preferring to watch a violent televised sport programme and having been
sanctioned for fighting.
Table 21.5 shows our observed frequencies. We can see by casual observation that the
fighters (sample 1) are more likely to prefer violent sport on TV and non-fighters (sample 2)
are more likely to prefer non-violent sport on TV. It is important to remember that this data
has been obtained through empirical observations.
So now let us look at how we would calculate our expected frequencies. That is, the
frequencies we would expect under the null hypothesis that assumes there is no relationship
between university students preferring to watch a violent televised sport programme and
having been sanctioned for fighting. Remember, if the null hypothesis is true, then the samples
come from the same population. So samples 1 and 2 combined give an estimate of the
population; remember we are still looking at the observed data.
So we assume that both samples come from the same population of data in which there is
no relationship between independent and dependent variables. This implies that any difference
between the samples is merely due to chance fluctuations of sampling. With chi-square we
simple add together the frequencies for whatever number of samples we have. The sums are
then used as an estimate of the distribution of the different categories in the population as
311
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
shown below.Table 21.6 shows that 55 university students prefer violent sport on TV
whereas 100 prefer non-violent sport on TV, assuming the null hypothesis.
So we now have the observed data with extra columns for row frequencies, column
frequencies and overall frequencies. So in the null hypothesis defined population we would
expect 55 out of every 155 to prefer violent TV sport and 100 out of the 155 to prefer the
non-violent sport on TV. But we obtained 40 out of 70 preferring violent sport on TV in
sample 1 and 15 out of 85 preferring violent sport on TV in sample 2. We need to know
how these figures match the expectations from the population defined by the null hypothesis.
To do this we need to calculate the expected frequencies of the cells in the above Table 21.5.
We do this by dividing the row frequencies by the overall frequencies and multiplying by
the column frequencies. As we know sample 1 contains 70 participants; if the null hypothesis
is true then we would expect 55 out of 155 of these to prefer violent sport on TV. If we do
the calculation we can see that our expected frequency of those preferring violent sport on
TV is 24.84 as compared to 40 in our observed data in sample 1. We can apply the same
logic to sample 2, which contains 85 participants. We expect 55 out of 155 will prefer violent
sport on TV and 100 out of 155 will prefer non-violent sport on TV. The expected frequency
for non-fighters preferring violent sport on TV is 30.16 as opposed to 15 in our observed
data.
Now if we add these two figures together, that is the sample 1 preferring violent sport on
TV and those from sample 2 preferring violent sport on TV we get 55 out of 155 as we would
expect. However, the expected distributions are different, 24.84 in sample 1 and 30.16 in
sample 2. This may already tell us there is a relationship because our observed values of fighters
are greater than the null hypothesis would suggest if no relationship between the variables
was to exist. Similarly, we would expect under the null hypothesis 100 out of 155 to prefer
non-violent sport on TV. Then our expected frequency for those preferring the non-violent
TV sport in sample 1 is calculated the same way. Thus our expected frequency in sample
1 is 45.16 participants out of 70 are expected to prefer non-violent sport on TV. You can
see that the sum of the expected frequencies for sample 1 is the same as the number of college
students in that sample – 24.84 + 45.16 = 70. If we apply the formula to obtain an expected
frequency for sample 2 in regards to preferring non-violent sport on TV the expected
frequency is 54.84 as opposed to 70 as reflected in our observed data. Again, you can see
that the sum of the expected frequencies for sample 2 is the same as the number of college
students in that sample – 30.16 + 54.84 = 85.
312
CHI-SQUARE AND SPEARMAN’S RHO
We now have the observed and expected data and can now complete the chi-square
calculation. This is in part the observed data minus the expected data and is based on the size
of the difference between the observed and expected data. The smaller the observed–expected
difference the more likely the null hypothesis is to be true. The larger the observed–expected
difference the more likely the research hypothesis is to be true. Chi-square involves calculating
the overall disparity between the observed and expected frequencies over all of the cells in
the table.
The calculated value of the chi-square is compared with a table of critical values of
chi-square in order to estimate the probability of obtaining our pattern of frequencies by
chance. In the above example if you were to complete the calculations we would establish
that the findings are significant and we can reject the null hypothesis (H0) and accept the
research hypothesis (H1): there is a relationship between university students preferring
to watch a violent televised sport programme and having been sanctioned for fighting on the
sporting field (H1).
This study investigated the mediating effects of involvement, trust, self-expression and
attachment to the outcome of team loyalty. The research found differences in chi-square of
several models of both direct and indirect mediating effects in varying directions, which led
to the conclusion of a hierarchy of effects process.
SPEARMAN’S RHO
Spearman’s rho is a non-parametric alternative to Pearson’s correlation coefficient discussed
in Chapter 19. When the requirements for a Pearson’s correlation are not met, especially
asymmetrical score distributions, Spearman’s rho can be used. In addition, a big difference
in the Pearson’s and Spearman’s correlation indicates that some outliers are having a greater
influence on the Pearson’s coefficient result; outliers have lower effect on Spearman’s rho
than on Pearson’s r so in these cases it is best to use Spearman’s rho (Harnett and Soni, 1991;
Howitt and Cramer, 2000; Muijs, 2011; Wild and Seber, 2000).
The difference with Spearman’s rho is that instead of taking scores directly from your
data, the scores on a variable are ranked from smallest to largest. That is, the smallest
score on variable X is given the rank of 1, the second smallest score on variable X is given
313
QUANTITATIVE SPORT MANAGEMENT RESEARCH
the rank of 2 and so on. Similarly, the smallest score on variable Y is given the rank of 1, the
second smallest score on variable Y is given the rank of 2 and so on. Then Spearman’s rho is
calculated like the Pearson’s correlation coefficient between two sets’ ranks as if the ranks
were scores. The ‘tied’ scores are given the average of the ranks they would occupy if they
were different (Howitt and Cramer, 2000; Muijs, 2011). Let us use table 21.7 to highlight
what this means.
In this example the two scores of 5 are each given the rank of 2.5 because if they were
slightly different they would have been given ranks 2 and 3 respectively. Similarly there are
3 scores of 9 that would have been allocated the ranks 7, 8 and 9 if the scores had been slightly
different from each other. These three ranks are averaged to give an average rank of 8, which
is entered as the rank for each of the three tied scores. An example of applying Spearman’s
rho could be if you wished to examine the relationship between athletic performance and
income. The Spearman’s r and the Pearson’s r will not necessarily yield the same coefficient
for the same data especially if there are a number of tied ranks. Also because r is based
on ranks that are not continuous or normally distributed the coefficient may differ from
Pearson r. The Spearman r is a valuable tool for special cases in which r cannot or should not
be used (Harnett and Soni, 1991; Howitt and Cramer, 2000; Muijs, 2011; Wild and Seber,
2000).
Scores 4 5 5 6 7 8 9 9 9 10
Ranks 1 2.5 2.5 4 5 6 8 8 8 10
Are children who play a sport or a musical instrument better at motor imagery
than children who do not? Dey, A., Barnsley, N., Mohan, R., McCormick, M.,
McAuley, J. H., and Moseley, G. L. (2012). British Journal of Sports Medicine,
46(13), 923–926.
The study compared child groups (athletes, musicians, neither, both) on whether each group
had better motor control. The researchers expected the data to be skewed, therefore they
used Spearman’s rho to compare groups. They found that being a musician or athlete had
no difference in motor accuracy, but did find that children rated as ‘clumsy’ by their parents
scored worse than other children.
314
CHI-SQUARE AND SPEARMAN’S RHO
CONCLUSION
This chapter has discussed chi-square tests and the use of Spearman’s rho for correlations. It
was noted that the chi-square test is an inferential statistic used to measure the difference
between an observed set of frequencies and the expected frequencies under the null hypothesis.
This test deals with nominal-level data. The chapter then moved on to discuss Spearman’s
rho as a non-parametric alternative to Pearson’s correlation coefficient. This test can be used
when the requirements for a Pearson’s correlation are not met, especially in the case of
asymmetrical score distributions. Both of these non-parametric tests are used when you have
serious violations of the assumptions required to perform parametric statistical tests; however,
it must be remembered that these tests tend to be less powerful than their parametric
counterparts.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
In this chapter we discussed how to examine the use of non-parametric tests. With this in
mind:
n Provide an example of how these types of tests can be used by the sport management
researcher.
n Discuss why non-parametric tests such as chi-square and Spearman’s rho tend to be
less powerful than their parametric counterparts.
315
This page intentionally left blank
Part 4
Alternative approaches
to Sport Management
Research
This page intentionally left blank
Chapter 22
LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of this chapter you should be able to:
KEY TERMS
Triangulation – should not be considered as a single unique method, but as a metaphor with
different possible meanings that can be related to a variety of different methodological
problems and tasks.
Facilitation – how quantitative methods can be used to help qualitative methods and vice
versa.
Complementarity – the strategy of ‘complementarity’ suggests that you really can’t do
everything with a single method. Sometimes you need to use other methods to answer
the entire question. Often, however, researchers mistake this for ‘more is better’.
KEY THEMES
n How does a mixed methods approach differ from a strictly qualitative or quantitative
approach?
n What are some of the main aspects of a mixed methods approach?
319
ALTERNATIVE APPROACHES
CHAPTER OVERVIEW
The construction of a multi-method design requires that methodological tools are selected
in regard to theoretical assumptions about the nature of the social reality under investigation.
Quantitative and qualitative methods usually provide information on different levels of
sociological description: quantitative analyses show phenomena on an aggregate level and can
thereby allow the description of macro-social structures. Although qualitative data may also
relate to phenomena on a macro-societal level, their specific strength lies in their ability to
lift the veil on social micro-processes and to make visible unknown cultural phenomena. In
order to formulate adequate sociological explanations of certain social phenomena it will often
be necessary to combine both types of information. This chapter will discuss the distinction
between quantitative and qualitative approaches and the advantages and disadvantages of
employing mixed methods research. In doing this it will provide a foundation understanding
of how mixed methods approaches to Sport Management Research can be employed.
to participate in various sports, and doping rates) within the context (seeking correlation,
relationships, causality) of the study. Quantitative designs seek the accumulation of facts and
causes of behaviour through careful isolation, measurement and evaluation of variables. They
are about predictability and control over time. Qualitative designs however are concerned
with the changing and dynamic nature of reality. That is, understanding a point in time (e.g.
explaining how the sponsor’s message affected purchase habits, why one chooses a certain
sport, and the process by which steroids are introduced to teens).
When it comes to data collection, quantitative designs place emphasis on numerical data,
measurable variables. Data is collected under controlled conditions in order to rule out the
possibility that variables other than the one under study can account for the relationships
identified. Quantitative research generates statistics through the use of large-scale survey
research, using methods such as questionnaires or structured interviews. If a sports marketing
researcher has stopped you on the streets, or you have filled in a questionnaire that has arrived
through the post, this falls under the umbrella of quantitative research. This type of research
reaches many more people, but the contact with those people is much quicker than it is in
qualitative research. Figure 22.2 summarizes the emphasis of quantitative designs.
Qualitative research explores attitudes, behaviours and experiences through such methods
as interviews or focus groups. It attempts to get an in-depth opinion from participants. As it
is attitudes, behaviour and experiences that are important, fewer people take part in the
research, but the contact with these people tends to last a lot longer. Qualitative researchers
seek saturation. How many isn’t the issue, it is rather, do you understand the phenomenon?
Have you learned enough? Mere numbers are irrelevant: you want ‘verstehen’ or deep
understanding. Qualitative designs, however, place emphasis on observation and interpret-
ation. Data are collected within the context of their natural occurrence. Qualitative design
focuses on a holistic view of what is being studied (via documents, case histories, observations
321
ALTERNATIVE APPROACHES
Qualitative
Research
is based on
Numerical data
and interviews). Under the umbrella of qualitative research there are many different
methodologies. Figure 22.3 summarizes the emphasis of qualitative designs and some of
these methodologies.
The differences between quantitative and qualitative research are presented in Figure 22.4.
322
MIXED METHODS APPROACHES
Qualitative
Research
is based on
Non-numerical data
Both quantitative and qualitative research designs seek reliable and valid results. For
example: quantitative reliability requires that the data are consistent or stable as indicated by
the researcher’s ability to replicate the findings. Will two different sport economics researchers
estimate the economic impact of the Super Bowl using the same methodology and methods?
Qualitative research seeks the validity of its findings as these are paramount so that the data
are representative of a true and full picture of constructs under investigation. Is the researcher’s
portrayal of a host community’s attitude towards a Super Bowl a true reflection?
323
ALTERNATIVE APPROACHES
Deductive
approach
Random
selection of Objective
reality
participants
Quantitative
research
Identify and
test Causal
relationships
hypotheses
Inductive
approach
Purposive Participant's
sampling perspectives
Qualitative
research
Describe and
Emerging understand
questions
relationships
324
MIXED METHODS APPROACHES
There are three strategies for mixing qualitative and quantitative methods. These are:
n triangulation
n facilitation
n complementarity.
We shall now discuss each of these and their relationship to mixed methods research.
Triangulation
The metaphor of triangulation in a mixed method approach is used in such a way that the
results of qualitative and quantitative methods are regarded as analogous to the results of the
single measurement operations. Normally, in describing different aspects of the same
phenomenon or even different phenomena by two methods, the sport management researcher
would naturally expect different results. In a true mixed method approach, qualitative and
quantitative methods have to be combined in order to produce sound sociological explanations.
Triangulation should not be considered as a single unique method, but as a metaphor with
different possible meanings that can be related to a variety of different methodological
problems and tasks. The form of ‘between-method triangulation’ quite often is used in
sociological research, whereby qualitative and quantitative data are collected and analysed
separately and the results are related to each other. If qualitative and quantitative methods
are combined in this way to answer a specific research question, in principle, one of the
following three outcomes may arise:
1 the title of the research includes terms that suggest more than one method is being
used, such as:
a) mixed methods
b) integrated
c) triangular
d) quantitative–qualitative;
2 both quantitative and qualitative methods are used in the study;
3 the researcher describes the kinds of mixed methods being used;
4 the data collection section indicates narrative, numerical or both types of data are
being collected;
5 the purpose statement or the research questions indicate the types of methods being
used;
6 questions are stated and described for both quantitative and qualitative approaches;
7 the researcher indicates the sequencing of collecting qualitative and/or quantitative
data (i.e. QUAN–Qual, QUAL–Quan or QUAN–QUAL);
8 the researcher describes both quantitative and qualitative data analysis strategies;
9 the writing is balanced in terms of quantitative and qualitative approaches.
Triangulation offers a balance between logic and stories. Qualitative research, which
emphasizes exploration, understanding, contextualizing, introspection and theory construc-
tion, provides a strong base for wider quantitative measures, scaling and generalization. For
326
MIXED METHODS APPROACHES
example, through qualitative research, a sport manager may better be able to identify trends
in sponsor activation attitudes and behaviours, and then develop quantitative scales to measure
and compare those trends. Quantitative research, which emphasizes large samples, can
provide an overview of an area that can reveal patterns, inconsistencies and so forth that can
be further investigated with qualitative methods. For example, if one sponsor has significantly
higher recall rates after an event than other sponsors, a qualitative follow-up study can identify
why and how that sponsor was able to stand out. In order for triangulation to be used
effectively, four principles must be adhered to. First, the research question(s) must be clearly
focused. Second, the strengths and weaknesses of each chosen method must complement each
other. Third, the data collection methods should be selected according to their relevance to
the nature of the phenomenon being studied, and finally, a continual evaluation of the
approach should be under taken during the study.
Developing a method for comparing the elite sport systems and policies of nations:
a mixed research methods approach. De Bosscher, V., Shibli, S., van Bottenburg,
M., De Knop, P., and Truyens, J. (2010). Journal of Sport Management, 24(5),
567–600.
Qualitative exploration led to a conceptual model of nine ‘pillars’ of factors important for
international sporting success. A quantitative study followed, comparing countries against
each other with an objective scoring system. Qualitative data was then added to discuss
contextual limitations that may have created scoring imbalances.
Facilitation
Qualitative methods can be used to assist quantitative research. Similarly, quantitative methods
can assist qualitative research. How this is done is highlighted in Figure 22.5.
Sale, Lohfeld and Brazil (2002), however, caution against an over-simplification of the
research object in an attempt to utilize mixed methods. Or, what in actual fact may not be
mixed methods at all. They pose the question, how can the results from studies using
qualitative and quantitative methods appear to agree if the two paradigms are looking at
different phenomena? They propose that what ‘may account for seemingly concordant results
could be that both are, in fact, quantitative. Conducting a frequency count on responses to
open-ended questions is not qualitative research’ (p. 47). It is important that the researcher
therefore, if asserting that they are using a mixed methods approach, be sure of the processes
327
ALTERNATIVE APPROACHES
Generating
hypotheses
Aiding
measurement
meas
Providing
deeper
analysis
Identifying
different
types of
Identifying participants
participants
partic
Measure
participant
opinions
Figure 22.5 How qualitative and quantitative methods can assist each other
328
MIXED METHODS APPROACHES
they are following, and not merely labelling qualitative or quantitative data collection and
analysis techniques as mixed methods to suit the proposed research question.
Complementarity
In a mixed method research design the advantages of quantitative and qualitative research
each complement the other resulting in a stronger research design, and more valid and reliable
findings. The strategy of ‘complementarity’ suggests that you really can’t do everything with
a single method. Sometimes you need to use other methods to answer the entire question.
Often, however, researchers mistake this for ‘more is better’. How the strategy of
complementarity emerges is highlighted in Figure 22.6.
Greene, Caracelli and Graham (1989) believe that utilizing both qualitative and quantitative
methods in the same study to measure different but also overlapping facets of a phenomenon
yield ‘an enriched, elaborated understanding for the phenomenon. This differs from the
triangulation intent in that the logic of convergence requires that the different methods assess
the same conceptual phenomenon’ (p. 258).
Sale et al. (2002) propose a method of mixing methods that does not rely on ‘merely using
the strengths of each method to bolster the weaknesses of the other(s), or capturing various
aspects of the same phenomena’ (p. 50). They start from the premise that qualitative and
quantitative researchers do not study the same phenomena. However, they go on to say that
329
ALTERNATIVE APPROACHES
methods can be mixed in a single study if the distinction of phenomena is maintained and
clarified. Translated to a sport management setting, a mixed methods study to develop a
measure of burnout experienced by athletes
In such a study, the results from one method could be used to elaborate on, help develop or
inform the other method.
quantitative or qualitative study, and data collection also requires that the researcher
utilizes efficient data storage, management and recording techniques.
6 Analyse the data.
Data can be analysed separately, or can be integrated as in a triangulation design. The
process of data analysis will be determined by the specific type of mixed method
design.
7 Write the report.
As in both a quantitative and qualitative study, the final step for the sport management
researcher in a mixed methods study is to write the research report. How this is
presented will be determined by how the data collection, analysis and interpretation
steps have proceeded throughout the study. If these steps have proceeded separately,
then the report will need to reflect this by containing distinct sections for the
quantitative and qualitative methods used in the data collection, analysis and
interpretation process. A triangulation design on the other hand will describe how the
data collection and analysis attempts to converge both sets of data, from which the
sport management researcher formulates results that attempt to answer the research
question.
1. Is a mixed
method study
appropriate?
3. Identify a data
6. Analyse the
collection
data strategy
4. Develop the
5. Collect the
research
data strategy
331
ALTERNATIVE APPROACHES
1 Does the study use at least one quantitative and one qualitative research strategy?
2 Does the study include a rationale for using a mixed methods design?
3 Does the study include a classification of the type of mixed methods design?
4 Does the study describe the priority given to quantitative and qualitative data
collection and the sequence of their use?
5 Was the study feasible, given the amount of data to be collected and concomitant
issues of resources, time and expertise?
6 Does the study include both quantitative and qualitative research questions?
7 Does the study clearly identify qualitative and quantitative data collection techniques?
8 Does the study use appropriate data analysis techniques for the type of mixed methods
design?
It is important to remember that you don’t mix for the sake of ‘more is better’. Mixing adds
to time, scope and the budget among other considerations, and as such you should consider
mixing in multiple phases, not a single research project.
HYPOTHETICAL CASE
You are interested in how sport event organizers communicate with volunteers. In the past,
the main form of communication was physical mail and phone calls. More recently, email
has more commonly been used and preferred by both parties. However, the younger generation
is beginning to rely more on social media for communication than phone calls and email.
As a sport event organizer, which forms of communications are critical, which are preferred,
and which are a waste of time? Additionally, are there differences in the types of messages
volunteers would like to receive by varying formats of communication? Furthermore, how
can a sport event organizer educate its volunteer base on a specific and agreeable
communication protocol?
1 What type(s) of qualitative research methods could you use (content analysis, interviews,
and observation, etc.)?
2 What type of quantitative data would you collect? How would you analyse it?
3 What would be the order of a mixed methods approach? For example QUAN–qual or
QUAL–quan?
332
MIXED METHODS APPROACHES
CONCLUSION
This chapter has examined the use of mixed methods research in sport management. It supports
both quantitative and qualitative approaches, and the notion of mixed research approaches
combining both quantitative and qualitative approaches. It has been suggested that by using
different data collection methods at various points in the research process the research can
build on the strength of each type of data collection and minimize the weaknesses of any
single approach. A mixed method approach to research has the potential to increase both the
validity and reliability of the data, and may also lead sport management researchers to modify
or expand their data collection methods.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
In Sport Management Research, using more than one method to study the same phenomenon
has the potential to strengthen the validity of the results. It also has the potential to lead sport
management researchers to modify or expand the research design and/or the data collection
methods employed in the study. With this in mind:
n Discuss how a mixed methods approach can benefit the sport management researcher.
n Is there any place in Sport Management Research for a mixed methods approach?
n Provide examples of the type of sport management study where a mixed methods
approach would be appropriate.
n What is the relationship between triangulation, facilitation and complementarity?
333
Chapter 23
Research 2.0
A framework for sport management
LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of this chapter you should be able to:
KEY TERMS
Web 2.0 – the network as platform, spanning all connected devices.
Research 2.0 – a framework for undertaking qualitative and quantitative research in the
Web 2.0 environment.
KEY THEMES
n What is Web 2.0?
n What is Research 2.0?
334
RESEARCH 2.0: A FRAMEWORK
OVERVIEW
This chapter explores the potential of the Web 2.0 environment for conducting qualitative,
quantitative and mixed methods research. Web 2.0 technologies create a number of new
opportunities to conduct research broadly labelled as Research 2.0.
INTRODUCTION
Web 2.0 technologies such as social networking sites and other interactive, user-driven tools
have created a new environment of research, termed Research 2.0. Research 2.0 can be defined
as the application of Web 2.0 technologies in shaping the next generation of research
methodologies. Within the field of sport management there has been limited examination of
the potential of Web 2.0 technologies in qualitative and quantitative research. Studies of
research practice, including ethical and legal implications of conducting research in Web 2.0
environments, are needed to facilitate innovative use of these new technologies for Sport
Management Research.
This chapter explores how Web 2.0 technologies can be applied in the research domain.
The chapter also explores how qualitative and quantitative research can fit a Web 2.0
framework. In the following sections the key concepts of Web 2.0 and Research 2.0 will be
examined.
WEB 2.0
Tim O’Reilly (2005) first defined Web 2.0: ‘Web 2.0 is the network as platform, spanning
all connected devices; Web 2.0 applications . . . through an “architecture of participation”
. . . deliver rich user experiences’ (http://oreilly.com/pub/a/oreilly/time/news/2005/09/
30/what-is-web-20.html, accessed 19 June 2011).
Originally, Web 1.0 was created by web designers to provide text-based information to
the public. There was little opportunity for user interaction apart from email exchange. Web
2.0 is about social publishing and not just developing web pages.
Greenhow, Robelia and Hughes (2009) state that Web 2.0 provides four affordances:
335
ALTERNATIVE APPROACHES
n collaboration – creation is collaborative rather than isolated (and users can share data
in different forms);
n cumulative – it’s an ongoing process, where creation can be built upon. (O’Reilly,
2005)
1 Research about the Internet: research that deals with phenomena related to or
deriving from use of the Internet itself. For instance: user demographics and rates of
sport websites; quality of service in B2C services such as Ticketmaster;
2 Research through the Internet: research that employs the Internet as a platform to
study issues that traditionally used to be studied through other channels. For example:
sport opinion polls; fan satisfaction surveys. (Ahituv and Steimberg, 2006)
Most early research has been on computer mediated communication (CMC). The primary
focus of this research was:
n email
n listservs
n instant messaging
n Internet relay chat (IRC)
n online synchronous and asynchronous interviews
n virtual focus groups. (Rathie and Given, 2010)
Some of the current literature focuses on Web 2.0 as a research environment, including what
separates this emerging domain from CMC and other traditional approaches to qualitative
and quantitative research in cyberspace. This distinction is known as the ‘architecture of
participation’ (O’Reilly, 2005, available at: http://oreilly.com/pub/a/oreilly/time/news/
2005/09/30/what-is-web-20.html, accessed 19 June 2011). In this approach users are
encouraged to be creators of data through use of Web 2.0 tools and techniques: for example,
336
RESEARCH 2.0: A FRAMEWORK
creating a research-themed Twitter account to interact with fans of a particular team, league
or sport.
According to Rathie and Given (2010), recent trends relevant to online research include:
All these influence the practice of conducting qualitative and quantitative research online.
Data collection
Web 2.0 is changing traditional modes of research. These changes include the use of different
tools for analysis of the collected data, as well as different approaches to research ethics.
Different data collection tools in Web 2.0 have been categorized into a framework based on
the traditional research model of primary and secondary data sources. Primary research tools
in Web 2.0 are those platforms that are purposefully set up for specific research objectives
and secondary tools are those online platforms that are not explicitly meant for research but
can provide access to information for research participants.
A review of literature suggests the advantages and disadvantages of Web 2.0 research as
shown in Table 23.1.
In summary, Rathie and Given (2010) suggest that:
n Web 2.0 allows for the creation of personalized research spaces. Users can compile
and save personalized collections of archival holdings generated from customized
searches and can classify research materials in their own ways;
n researchers are able to save search results to be accessed from multiple locations,
influence the generation of those results, or create personalized classification systems;
n researching can happen in the same virtual space and from any appropriate physical
location. Users can annotate and write notes about groups of images and access these
notes and artefacts from any networked computer location;
n Web 2.0 provides less face-to-face interaction, but it offers more possibilities for
quickly connecting textually with a wide and potentially large range of people.
RESEARCH 2.0
Currently, the concept of ‘Research 2.0’ is a focus for scholars as they attempt to demystify
this domain; often, this literature addresses the mechanics of techniques and strategies for
conducting research in Web 2.0 environments. There is limited discussion in the sport
management literature that focuses on analysing this new research context or exploring the
theoretical frameworks that might help researchers to develop scholarly practices for these
environments.
337
ALTERNATIVE APPROACHES
Advantages Disadvantages
Data collection at low cost Lack of facial expressions and paralinguistic cues
Instantaneous Extended time frame of user engagement in data
collection
Efficient use for data collection Work place interruptions prevent effective data
collection
More participants from a range Participants may fall into typically high socio-
of geographic contexts economic and educational demographics
Large amounts of publicly Participants who are not as ‘web savvy’ as Web 2.0
available data technologies require may be excluded from projects
Spatial and temporal barriers to Software gap between computers and other devices
conducting research needs to be bridged
Browsers are able to support different Problems of coverage, measurement errors and bias,
applications for data types in the response rate and dropout rates
same environment
Participants could be involved in Problem of bias, people who respond voluntarily to
many phases of the work, from design surveys on the web have different characteristics to
of the project, through analysis to those who choose not to participate in these surveys
dissemination
Environment allows for the creation
of personalized research spaces
Sources: Ferneley, Heinze and Child (2009); Greenhow, Robelia and Hughes (2009); O’Reilly (2005);
Rathie and Given (2010)
The effect of user motives and interactivity on attitude toward a sport website.
Taesoo, A. (2010). Unpublished doctoral dissertation. Florida State University
College of Education.
Sport websites have become an important communication tool for companies and business,
such as sport organizations, to deliver information, connect with sport consumers, generate
profits, and much more. Based on uses and gratifications theory, a conceptual model of
attitude towards the sport website including antecedents (user motives and interactivity) and
consequence (revisit intention) was proposed. The results indicate that user motives and
interactivity are significant predictors of attitude towards the sport website, which
consequently influences intention to revisit a sport website.
338
RESEARCH 2.0: A FRAMEWORK
Research 2.0 is a framework for undertaking qualitative and quantitative research in the
Web 2.0 environment. This implies that we have to consider both the behavioural and technical
changes that have occurred to:
Although it is unlikely that this approach will ever fully replace established research techniques,
this is a valuable addition to the researcher’s repertoire in the digital age.
n participants share common goals (e.g. fans want their team to be successful);
n participants mutually engage (e.g. fans cheer and jeer team transactions and
performance on an online forum or social media page); and
n participants have a shared repertoire (e.g. fans sharing links, photos, insights, and
stories about their team).
Trust between community members is a key enabler of community contributions. An
example is the fan communities of sport teams;
2 online research communities (ORCs). According to Ferneley et al. (2009), there are key
features of ORCs that differentiate them from the more traditional online
communities. NOOCs tend to connect people with common interests, in ORCs the
community is closed and members are selected based on specified profiles. NOOCs
tend to attract people who are passionate about the subject; while this may be the case
in ORCs, the aim is to ensure that the participating body represents a broader view of
users rather than only brand advocates.
The nature of NOOCs means that the community is usually discovered via word of mouth
or serendipity; in the case of ORCs, which are closed communities, recruitment to the
community is targeted and strictly controlled. This means that NOOCs may have a much
larger membership base than ORCs (Table 23.3), although engagement in ORCs tends to be
much higher.
340
RESEARCH 2.0: A FRAMEWORK
341
ALTERNATIVE APPROACHES
n web cloud
n perpetual beta
n mashups
n multiple interface
n the participatory research experience.
1 Ethics
A key issue in Research 2.0 relates to research ethics, particularly in the areas of informed
consent, confidentiality and privacy. It is the responsibility of researchers to maintain a safe
environment and ensure that participants are aware of the implications for engaging in online
research in public forums. For example, Web 2.0 tools can be very public. Participants must
understand the implications of engaging in online research in public forums prior to answering
a researcher’s (or another participant’s) call for commentary. Even where forums are closed
342
RESEARCH 2.0: A FRAMEWORK
Process Description
The web as a research Software in the Web 2.0 environment could be delivered over the web
host and run in a web browser (O’Reilly, 2005). In this way, data could be
gathered, stored, analysed and disseminated purely in an online
environment. Currently many qualitative analysis software packages
(e.g. NVivo) are designed for single-use, stand-alone computing;
however, the Web 2.0 environment offers new tools.
Crowdsourcing The key element of Web 2.0 is ‘turning the web into a kind of global
brain’ (O’Reilly, 2005). Some authors have identified crowdsourcing
where users are co-developers in the project as one of the key trends in
the Web 2.0 environment.
Web cloud It is argued that ‘every significant Internet application to date has
been backed by a specialized database’ (O’Reilly, 2005). The
availability of data in a web ‘cloud’ (e.g. blog data, temporal data
of wikis, social tagging data, etc.) as a primary data source
represents a significant issue in the process of data collection in
Research 2.0.
Perpetual beta In this new era, the creation of products is always in ‘perpetual beta’
(i.e. there is no final product release; instead, there is a continuous
update of the software and release of newer versions). In a Research
2.0 environment data gathering is continuous in nature (i.e. data
collection continues, in perpetuity). Although this may be a new way of
working for many quantitative and qualitative researchers, this
practice does mirror some qualitative approaches (e.g. ethnography),
where the researcher lives in a community for many weeks to many
years, gathering data in a very continuous way.
Mashups Web 2.0 aims to syndicate and not coordinate (i.e. allow others to
use the data without worrying about what will happen at the other
users’ end). This approach is often referred to as mashups. The data
collected from blogs, wikis or forums can be mixed to conduct
research. In qualitative research, this would be similar to
triangulation, where data from various sources (often using different
methods) are combined to provide holistic perspectives on
phenomena.
Multiple interface In a Web 2.0 environment, different data types are more integrated
and available for collection at the same place and time. The data can
then be interlinked with different data formats. Researchers should be
able to connect seamlessly to the database on the Internet with any
type of device and be able to view different data formats in a single
device.
The participatory In many traditional research projects (including some web
research experience approaches, such as online questionnaires) the interaction between
the participant and the researcher is generally limited to the data
collection phase. In Research 2.0, participants could be involved in
many phases of the work, from design of the project, through analysis
and dissemination. This process is termed the ‘participatory research
experience’.
343
ALTERNATIVE APPROACHES
Process Description
Start with the basics Websites such as Wikipedia and CliffsNotes can be good places to
begin researching your subject.
Academic databases Academic databases ERIC, HubMed, Google Scholar and Academic
Search are resources that can help make search time productive.
Library resources Digitized archives provide access to materials not available in physical
form.
Knowledge and A sound KIM system is important to ensure that data is recorded and
information able to be retrieved for analysis.
management
Check for plagiarism Incidents of plagiarism are on the rise. Avoid copying and pasting
information directly from a website into your paper or project notes
unless you are quoting a person or resource. It’s easy to lose track of
what text you have written and what came from outside sources.
Use documentation Use a citation format such as EndNote to help organize your work.
resources
Analyse a source’s A lot of information online is inaccurate. Carefully check Internet
validity and reliability resources you use in your paper or project.
Develop a research plan There is a vast amount of information online. Develop a research plan
to provide steps in the research process.
to researchers and participants, only, there may be the potential for participant-to-participant
breaches of privacy and confidentiality.
344
RESEARCH 2.0: A FRAMEWORK
The digital age continues to bring sweeping changes to how college athletic sites function.
This thesis examined the changes in the Lehigh Athletics website over ten years. Analysis of
the website changes, interviews and other data collected revealed that the changes being
made are done primarily to directly address the leading audiences and in ways that will be
most appealing. Many of the changes involved incorporation of video or video technology
and other new media, such as social networking sites.
CONCLUSION
The framework proposed by Rathi and Given (2010) presents a Research 2.0 framework for
undertaking qualitative and quantitative research in the Web 2.0 environment. This framework
can provide sport management researchers with a reference point for future research in these
environments. It is suggested, however, that this evolving field of research is a work in progress
and researchers should attempt to update and familiarize themselves with new developments
as they occur.
REVIEW QUESTIONS
With a general understanding now of the potential of a Research 2.0 framework for qualitative
and quantitative research in sport management, attempt to answer the following questions:
n What are some of the key ethical issues facing the sport management researcher who
intends to use Research 2.0 as a framework?
n What are some of the platforms from which Research 2.0 can be undertaken?
345
References
Abdel-Shehid, G. (2005). Who da man? Black masculinities and sporting cultures. Toronto,
Canada: Canadian Scholars.
Adler, P. A., and Adler, P. (1987). Membership roles in field research. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Ahituv, N., and Steimberg, Y. (2006). The impact of the Internet on research methods: Is a new
methodology being created or just a new use of existing methodologies. Working Paper No
23/2006. Available at: www.itu.dk/courses/DDKU/E2007/artikler/internet%20new%20
methods_Ahituv.pdf (accessed 18 July 2013).
Alcoff, L., and Potter, E. (1993). Feminist epistemologies. London: Routledge.
Altheide, D. L. (1996). Qualitative media analysis. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Altheide, D. L. (2000). Tracking discourse and qualitative document analysis. Poetics, 27(4),
287–299.
Amis, J., and Silk, M. (2005). Rupture: Promoting critical and innovative approaches to the study
of sport management. Journal of Sport Management, 19, 355–366.
Anderson, J. M. (2000). Gender, ‘race’, poverty, health and discourses of health reform in the
context of globalization: A postcolonial feminist perspective in policy research. Nursing Inquiry,
7, 220–229.
Appadurai, A. (1996). Modernity at large: Cultural dimensions of globalization. Minneapolis, ME:
University of Minnesota Press.
Atkinson, P., Coffey, A., and Delamont, S. (1999). Ethnography: Post, past and present. Journal
of Contemporary Ethnography, 28(5), 460–71.
Badger, T. G. (2000). Action research, change and methodological rigour. Journal of Nursing
Management, 8, 201–207.
Barnes, J. A. (1954). Class and committees in a Norwegian island parish. Human Relations, 7,
39–58.
Barthes, R. (1981). Camera lucida. London: Vintage Press.
Barthes, R. (1996). Introduction to the structural analysis of narratives. In S. Onega and J. A. G.
Landa (eds), Narratology (pp. 45–60). New York: Longman.
Bate, P., Khan, R., and Pye, A. (2000). Towards a culturally-sensitive approach to organizational
restructuring. Organization Science, 11(2), 197–211.
Bauman, Z. (2001). The Individualized Society. Cambridge: Polity.
Beattie, V. A. (2000). The future of corporate reporting: A review article. Irish Accounting Review,
7(1), 1–36.
Beemyn, B., and Eliason, M. (eds) (1996). Queer studies: A lesbian, gay, bisexual, and transgender
anthology. New York: New York University Press.
Bergen, A., and While, A. (2000). A case for case studies: Exploring the use of case study design
in community nursing research. Journal of Advanced Nursing, 31, 926–934.
346
REFERENCES
Birrell, S., and Theberge, N. (1994). Feminist resistance and transformation in sport. In M. Costa
and S. Guthrie (eds), Women and sport: Interdisciplinary perspectives (pp. 361–376).
Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics.
Bless, C., Higson-Smith, C., and Kagee, A. (2006). Fundamentals of social research methods: An
African perspective (4th edn). Cape Town, SA: Juta & Co.
Blommaert, J., and Bulcaen, C. (2000). Critical discourse analysis. Annual Review of Anthropology,
29, 447–466.
Bluman, A. G. (2001). Elementary statistics: A step by step approach (4th edn). New York:
McGraw-Hill.
Boas, F. (1928). The dynamics of cultural transmission. New York: Morton.
Bogdan, R. C., and Biklen, S. K. (1982). Qualitative research for education: An introduction to
theory and methods. Toronto, Canada: Allyn & Bacon.
Bray, J., Lee, J., Smith, L. L., and Yorks, L. (2000). Collaborative inquiry in practice: Action,
reflection, and making meaning. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Bridel, W. (2006). Gender, sexuality, and the body: Exploring the lived experiences of gay and
queer marathoners. Unpublished doctoral dissertation. University of Ottawa, Canada.
Brown, D. M. (2007). Communicating design: Developing web site documentation for design and
planning. Berkeley, CA: Peachpit.
Bryman, A. (2004). Social research methods (2nd edn). Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Bryman, A., and Bell, E. (2011). Business research methods. London: Oxford University Press.
Burke, M. (2001). Sport and traditions of feminist theory. Unpublished doctoral dissertation,
Victoria University, Melbourne, Australia.
Burns, R. B. (1997). Introduction to research methods (3rd edn). Melbourne, Australia: Longman.
Burr, V. (1995). An introduction to social constructionism. London: Routledge.
Butler, J. (1991). Gender trouble: Feminism and the subversion of identity. New York: Routledge.
Campbell, D. T. (1966). Quasi-experimental designs for use in natural social settings. In D. T.
Campbell (ed.), Experimenting, validating, knowing: Problems of method in the social sciences.
New York: McGraw-Hill.
Cannella, G. S., and Bailey, C. (1999). Postmodern research in early childhood education. In
S. Reifel (ed.), Advances in early education and day care, Vol. 10, (pp. 3–39). Greenwich, CN:
Jai Press.
Carr, W., and Kemmis, S. (1986). Becoming critical: Education, knowledge and action research
(Rev. edn). Geelong, Australia: Deakin University.
Casey, K. (1995). The new narrative research in education. Review of Research in Education, 21,
211–253.
Catelli, L. A. (1995). Action research and collaborative inquiry in a school–university partnership.
Action in Teacher Education, 16(4), 25–38.
Chambers, E. (2000). Applied ethnography. In N. K. Denzin and Y. S. Lincoln (eds), Handbook
of qualitative research (2nd edn, pp. 851–869). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Chase, W., and Brown, F. (2000). General statistics (4th edn). New York: John Wiley & Sons.
Clandinin, D. J., and Connelly, F. M. (2000). Narrative inquiry: Experience and story in qualitative
research. San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass.
Coffey, A., Holbrook, B., and Atkinson, P. (1996). Qualitative data analysis: Technologies and
representations. Sociological Research Online, 1(1). Available at: www.socresonline.org.uk/
socresonline/1/1/4.html (accessed 23 March 2011).
Coghlan, D., and Brannick, T. (2001). Doing action research in your own organisation. London:
Sage.
Coghlan, P., and Coghlan, D. (2002). Action research for operations management. International
Journal of Operations and Production Management, 22(2), 220–240.
Collier, J., and Collier, M. (1986). Visual anthropology: Photography as a research method,
Albuquerque, NM: University of New Mexico Press.
347
REFERENCES
Cooky, C. A. (2006). Getting girls in the game: A qualitative analysis of urban sport programs.
Unpublished doctoral dissertation, University of Southern California.
Creswell, J. W. (1998). Qualitative inquiry and research design: Choosing among five traditions.
Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Creswell, J. W. (2003). Research design: Quantitative, qualitative and mixed methods approaches
(3rd edn). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Creswell, J. W. (2007). Qualitative inquiry and research design: Choosing among five approaches
(2nd edn). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Creswell, J. W. (2008). Educational Research. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson.
Creswell, J. W. (2009). Research design: Quantitative, qualitative and mixed methods approaches
(4th edn). New York: Sage.
Creswell, J. W., and Plano Clark, V. L. (2007). Designing and conducting mixed methods research.
Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Creswell, J. W., and Plano Clark, V. L. (2010). Designing and conducting mixed methods research
(2nd edn). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Crofts, K., and Bisman, J. (2010). An illustration of the use of Leximancer software for qualitative
data analysis. Qualitative Research in Accounting and Management, 7(2), 180–207.
Dale, G. A. (1996). Existential phenomenology: Emphasizing the experience of the athlete in sport
psychology research. The Sport Psychologist, 10(4), 307–321.
Dann, S. (2010). Redefining social marketing with contemporary commercial marketing definitions.
Journal of Business Research, 63(1), 147–153.
Davidson, J., and Shogan, D. (1998). What’s queer about studying up? A response to Messner.
Sociology of Sport Journal, 15(4), 359–366.
De Wet, J. J., Monteith, J. De K., Steyn, H. S., and Venter, P. A. (1981). Navorsingsmetodes in
die opvoedkunde: ’n ’inleiding tot empiriesenavorsing. Durban, SA: Butterworth.
Delgado, R., and Stefancic, J. (1993). Critical race theory: An annotated bibliography. Virginia
Law Review, 79(2), 461–516.
Denison, J., and Rinehart, R. (2000). Imagining sociological narratives. Sociology of Sport
Journal, 17, 1–4.
Denzin, N. K. (1989). Interpretive interactionism. Newbury Park, CA: Sage.
Denzin, N. K. (1991). The reflexive interview and a performative social science. Qualitative
Research, 1(1), 23–46.
Denzin, N. K. (1994). Postmodernism and deconstruction. In D. R. Dickens and A. Fontana (eds),
Postmodernism and social inquiry. London: Guilford Press.
Denzin, N. K. (1997). Interpretive ethnography. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Denzin, N. K. (2004). The war on culture, the war on truth. Cultural Studies Critical Methodologies,
4(2), 137–142.
Denzin, N. K, and Lincoln, Y. S. (eds). (1994). Handbook of qualitative research. London: Sage.
Denzin, N. K. and Lincoln, Y. S. (eds). (1998). Collecting and interpreting qualitative materials.
Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Denzin, N. K., and Lincoln, Y. S. (eds). (2000). Handbook of qualitative research (2nd edn).
Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Denzin, N. K., and Lincoln, Y. S. (eds). (2002). The qualitative inquiry reader. Thousand Oaks,
CA: Sage.
Denzin, N. K., and Lincoln, Y. S. (eds.). (2005). Handbook of qualitative research. London: Sage.
Derrida, J. (1976). Of grammatology (G. C. Spivak, trans.). Baltimore, MD: John Hopkins
University Press.
Derrida, J. (1978). Writing and difference (A. Bass, trans.). Chicago, IL: University of Chicago
Press.
Derrida, J. (1981). Positions (A. Bass, trans.). Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press.
Derrida, J. (1982). Margins of philosophy (A. Bass, trans.). Chicago, IL: University of Chicago
Press.
348
REFERENCES
349
REFERENCES
Fielding, N. G., and Lee, R. M. (2002). New patterns in the adoption and use of qualitative software.
Field Methods, 14(2), 197–216.
Fine, M. (1994). Working the hyphens: Reinventing self and other in qualitative research. In N.
K. Denzin, and Y. S. Lincoln (eds), Handbook of qualitative research (pp. 70–82). Thousand
Oaks, CA: Sage.
Foucault, M. (1980). Power/knowledge selected interviews and other writings, 1972–77. (C.
Gordon, trans.). New York: Harvester Wheatsheaf.
Foucault, M. (1983). The subject and power. In D. Dreyfus, P. Rabinow and M. Foucault (eds),
Beyond structuralism and hermeneutics (2nd edn, pp. 208–226). Chicago, IL: University of
Chicago Press.
Franklin, R. (2012). Making waves: Contesting the lifestyle marketing and sponsorship of female
surfers. Unpublished doctoral dissertation, Griffith University Queensland, Australia.
Freire, P. (1970). Pedagogy of the oppressed. Harmondsworth: Penguin.
Gall, M. D., Borg, W. R., and Gall, J.P. (1996). Educational research: An introduction. New York:
Longman.
Gamson, J. (2000). Sexualities, queer theory, and qualitative research. In N. K. Denzin and Y. S.
Lincoln (eds), Handbook of qualitative research (2nd edn, pp. 347–365). Thousand Oaks, CA:
Sage.
Garfinkel, H. (1967/1999). Studies in ethnomethodology. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
Gartner, A., Latham, G., and Merritt, S. (2003). The power of narrative: transcending disciplines.
Available at: http://ultibase.rmit.edu.au/Articles/dec96/gartn1.htm# (accessed 3 March 2011).
Gatenby, B., and Humphries, M. (1996). Feminist commitments in organisational communication:
Participatory action research as feminist praxis. Australian Journal of Communication, 23(2),
73–88.
Gay, L. R., Mills, G. E., and Airasian, P. (2009). Educational research: Competencies for analysis
and applications (9th edn). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson Merrill.
Gibbs, W. W. (2007). Comment: The courage of prediction. Conservation Magazine, 8, 31–34.
Giddens, A. (1990). The consequences of modernity. Cambridge: Polity Press.
Giffney, N. (2004). Denormatizing queer theory: More than (simply) lesbian and gay studies.
Feminist Theory, 5(1), 73–78.
Gilbert, N. (2008). Researching social life (3rd edn). London: Sage.
Gilbert, K., and Schantz, O. J. (eds). (2008). The Paralympic Games: Empowerment or side show?
Maidenhead: Meyer & Meyer.
Gingrich, A. (2002). When ethnic majorities are ‘dethroned’. In A. Gingrich and R. G. Fox (eds),
Anthropology, by comparison (pp. 225–232). London: Routledge.
Giorgi, A. (1975). An application of the phenomenological method to psychology. In A. Giorgi, C.
Fisher, and E. Murray (eds), Duquesne studies in phenomenology, Vol. 2, (pp. 82–103).
Pittsburgh, PA: Duquesne University Press.
Giroux, H. A. (2002). Breaking in to the movies: Film and the culture of politics. Maiden, MA:
Blackwell.
Gottschalk, S. (1998). Postmodern sensibilities and ethnographic possibilities. In A. Banks and S.
P. Banks (eds), Fiction and social research: By ice or fire (pp. 205–233). Walnut Creek, CA:
Altamira.
Grbich, C. (1999). Qualitative research in health: An introduction. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Greene, J. C., Caracelli, V. J., and Graham, W. (1989). Toward a conceptual framework for mixed-
method evaluation designs. Educational evaluation and policy analysis, 11(3), 255–274.
Greenhow, C., Robelia, B., and Hughes, J. (2009). Web 2.0 and classroom research: What path
should we take now ? Educational Researcher, 38(4), 246–259.
Greenwood, D. J., and Levin, M. (1998). Introduction to action research. Thousand Oaks, CA:
Sage.
Gronhaug, K., and Olson, O. (1999). Action research and knowledge creation: Merits and challenges.
Qualitative Market Research: An International Journal, 2(1), 6–14.
350
REFERENCES
Guba, E. G., and Lincoln, Y. S. (1981). Effective evaluation: Improving the usefulness of evaluation
results through responsive and naturalistic approaches. San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass.
Guba, E. G., and Lincoln, Y. S. (1982). Epistemological and methodological bases of naturalistic
inquiry. Educational Technology Research and Development, 30(4), 233–252.
Guba, E. G., and Lincoln, Y. S. (1989). Fourth generation evaluation. Newbury Park, CA: Sage.
Guba, E. G., and Lincoln, Y. S. (1994). Competing paradigms in qualitative research. In N. K.
Denzin and Y. S. Lincoln (eds), Handbook of qualitative research (pp. 105–117). Thousand
Oaks, CA: Sage.
Gubrium, J., and Holstein, J. (2000). Analyzing interpretive practice. In N. K. Denzin and Y. S.
Lincoln (eds), Handbook of qualitative research (2nd edn, pp. 487–508). Thousand Oaks, CA:
Sage.
Gudsmundsdottir, S. (1991). Story maker, story teller: Narrative structures in the curriculum.
Journal of Curriculum Studies, 23(3), 207–218.
Gummesson, E. (2000). Qualitative methods in management research (2nd edn). Thousand Oaks,
CA: Sage.
Habermas, J. (1978). Knowledge and human interests (J. J. Shapiro, trans.). Cambridge: Polity.
(Original work published 1965).
Hall, S. (1997) The local and global: Globalization and ethnicity. In A. McClintock, A. Mufti
and E. Shohat (eds), Dangerous liaisons: Gender, nation, and postcolonial perspectives
(pp. 173–187). Minneapolis, MN: University of Minnesota Press.
Halperin, D. M. (1995). Saint-Foucault: Towards a gay hagiography. New York: Oxford University
Press.
Hammersley, M. (1990). Reading ethnographic research: A critical guide. New York: Longman.
Hammersley, M. (1992). What’s wrong with ethnography: Methodological explorations. London:
Routledge.
Hammersley, M., and Atkinson, P. (1983). Ethnography: Principles in practice. London: Tavistock.
Hammersley, M., and Atkinson, P. (1995). Ethnography: Principles in practice (2nd edn, pp. 263-
287). London: Routledge.
Hardt, M., and Negri, A. (2000). Empire. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Harnett, D. L., and Soni, A. K. (1991). Statistical methods for business and economics (4th edn).
New York: Addison-Wesley.
Harrison, B. (2002). Seeing health and illness worlds-using visual methods in a sociology of health
and illness: A methodological review. Sociology of Health and Illness, 24(6), 856–872.
Hart, E. (1996). Action research as a professionalizing strategy: Issues and dilemmas. Journal of
Advanced Nursing, 23, 454–461.
Hart, E., and Bond, M. (1995). Action research for health and social care: A guide to practice.
Buckingham: Open University Press.
Hasselgren, B., and Beach, D. (1996). Phenomenography: A ‘good-for-nothing brother’ of
phenomenology? Or phenomenography is what phenomenographers do when doing
phenomenography. Available at: www.ped.gu.se/biorn/phgraph/misc/constr/goodno2.html
(accessed 20 July 2008).
Hatch, J. A. (2002). Doing qualitative research in education settings. Albany, NY: State University
of New York Press.
Heidegger, M. (1962). Being and time. New York: Harper & Row.
Heidegger, M. (1977). The question concerning technology, and other essays. New York: Harper
& Row.
Heritage, J. (1984). Garfinkel and ethnomethodology. Cambridge, MA: Polity Press.
Heron, J., and Reason, P. (1997). Qualitative inquiry. London: Sage.
Holt, N. (2003). Representation, legitimation, and autoethnography: An autoethnographic writing
story. International Journal of Qualitative Methods, 2(1), Article 2, 18–28.
Hook, D. (2001). The disorders of discourse. Theoria, 1(97), 41–68.
351
REFERENCES
Howitt, D., and Cramer, D. (2000). An introduction to statistics in psychology. London: Prentice
Hall.
Humphreys, D. R., Austin, S. A., Baumgardner, J. R., and Snelling, A. A. (2003). Precambrian
zircons yield a helium diffusion age of 6,000 years. American Geophysical Union, Fall Conference,
Abstract V32C-1047. Available at: www.icr.org/pdf/research/AGUHeliumPoster_Humphreys.pdf
Abstract published in Eos, Transactions of the American Geophysical Union 84(46), Fall
Meeting Supplement as ‘Recently measured helium diffusion rate for zircon suggests inconsistency
with U-Pb age for Fenton Hill granodiorite’.
Humphreys, D. R., Austin, S. A., Baumgardner, J. R., and Snelling, A. A. (2004). Helium diffusion
age of 6,000 years supports accelerated nuclear decay. Creation Research Society Quarterly,
41(1), 1–16. Available at: www.creationresearch.org/crsq/articles/41/41_1/Helium_lo_res.pdf
(accessed 12 June 2013).
Huntington, S. P. (1993). The clash of civilizations. Foreign Affairs, 72(3), 22–49.
Huntington, S. P. (1996). The clash of civilizations and the remaking of world order. New York:
Simon & Schuster.
Husserl, E. (1931). Ideas: General Introduction to Phenomenology. New York, NY: Macmillan.
Isakhan, B. (2005). From Despotism to democracy: Reporting Iraq’s January 2005 election in the
Australian and Middle Eastern print media. Paper presented at the Journalism Education
Australia Conference, Surfers Paradise, Australia, available at: http://live-wirez.gu.edu.au/jea
(accessed 12 September 2013).
Jacob, E. R., Barnett, T., Walker, L., Cross, M., and Missen, K. (2012). Australian clinicians’
views on interprofessional education for students in the rural clinical setting. Journal of Research
in Interprofessional Practice and Education, 2(2), 219–229.
Jagose, A. M. (1996). Queer theory: An introduction. New York: New York University Press.
Johansson, B., Marton, F., and Svensson, L. (1985). An approach to describing learning as change
between qualitatively different conceptions. In L. West & A. Pines (eds), Cognitive structure
and conceptual change (pp. 233–257). New York: Academic Press.
Johnson, R. R., and Kuby, P. (2011). Elementary statistics. Boston, MA: Brooks/Cole.
Jorgensen, D. L. (1989). Participant observation. Newbury Park, CA: Sage.
Kemmis, S., and Grundy, S. (1997). Educational action research in Australia: Organization and
practice. In S. Hollingsworth (ed.), International action research: A casebook for educational
reform (pp. 40–48). London: Falmer Press.
Kemmis, S., and McTaggart, R. (1988). The action research planner (3rd rev. edn). Waurn Ponds,
Australia: Deakin University.
Keppel, G. (1973). Design and analysis: A researcher’s handbook. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice
Hall.
Kerry, D. S., and Armour, K. M. (2000). Sports sciences and the promise of phenomenology:
Philosophy, method, and insight. Quest, 52(1), 1–17.
Kozinets, R. V. (1998). On netnography: Initial reflections on consumer investigations of
cyberculture. In J. Alba and W. Hutchinson (eds), Advances in consumer research, Vol. 25,
(pp. 366–371). Provo, UT: Association for Consumer Research.
Krane, D. (2001). Disorderly progress on the frontiers of policy evaluation. International Journal
of Public Administration, 24(1), 95–123.
Krueger, R. A. (1994). Focus groups: A practical guide for applied research. Thousand Oaks, CA:
Sage Publications.
Kuhn, T. (1996). The structure of scientific revolutions (3rd edn). Chicago, IL: University of Chicago
Press.
Kusch, M. (1991). Foucault’s strata and fields: An investigation into archaeological and genealogical
science studies. Dordrecht, The Netherlands: Kluwer Academic Publishers.
Labov, W. (1972). Language in the inner city. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press.
Labov, W. (1982). Speech actions and reactions in personal narrative. In D. Tannen (ed.),
Georgetown University round table on languages and linguistics 1981: Analyzing discourse:
Text and talk (pp. 219–247). Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press.
352
REFERENCES
Lather, P. (1986). Issues of validity in openly ideological research: Between a rock and a soft
place. Interchange, 17, 63–84.
Lather, P. (1991). Deconstructing/deconstructive inquiry: The politics of knowing and being known.
Educational Theory, 41(2), 153–173.
LeCompte, M. D., and Preissle, J. (1993). Ethnography and qualitative design in educational
research (2nd edn). New York: Academic Press.
Lee, J. R. E. (1991). Language and culture: The linguistic analysis of culture. In G. Button (ed.),
Ethnomethodology and the human sciences (pp. 196–226). Cambridge: Cambridge University
Press.
Leininger, M. M. (ed.). (1985). Qualitative research methods in nursing. Orlando, FL: Grune &
Stratton.
Lewins, A., Taylor, C., and Gibbs, G. (2005). What is qualitative data analysis? Huddersfield:
School of Human and Health Sciences, University of Huddersfield.
Lewin, K. (1948). Resolving social conflicts: Selected papers on group dynamics. New York: Harper
& Row.
Lewin, K. (1951). Field research in social sciences. New York: Harper & Row.
Lieblich, A., Tuval-Mashiach, R., and Zilber, R. (1998). Narrative research. Thousand Oaks, CA:
Sage.
Lincoln, Y. S., and Guba, E. G. (1985). Naturalistic inquiry. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage.
Lincoln, Y. S., and Guba, E. G. (2000). Paradigmatic controversies, contradictions, and emerging
confluences. In N. K. Denzin and Y. S. Lincoln (eds), Handbook of qualitative research (2nd
edn, pp. 163–188). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Lindlof, T. R., and Taylor, B. C. (2002). Qualitative communication research methods (2nd edn).
Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Lofland, J., and Lofland, L. H. (1995). Analyzing social settings: A guide to qualitative observation
and analysis (3rd edn). Belmont, CA: Wadsworth.
Lugones, M., and Spelman, E. (1983). Have we got a theory for you! Hypatia. 1 [special issue],
Women’s Studies International Forum, 6, 573–581.
Lundgren, E. (1995). Feminist theory and violent empiricism. Aldershot: Avebury.
Lysaght, P. (2001). Intelligent profiles: A model for change in women’s lives. Unpublished doctoral
thesis, University of Wollongong, Australia.
McAllister, S. L. (2006). Women administrators’ perceptions of the contribution of competitive
sport experiences to their career paths and leadership practices. Unpublished doctoral
dissertation, Illinois State University, Bloomington, IN.
McCall, M. M. (2000). Performance ethnography: A brief history and some advice. In N. K. Denzin
and Y. S. Lincoln (eds), Handbook of qualitative research (2nd edn, pp. 412–433). Thousand
Oaks, CA: Sage.
McCarl-Nielsen, J. (1990). Feminist research methods: Exemplary readings in the social sciences.
Boulder, CO: Westview.
McConaghy, C. (2000). Rethinking indigenous education: Culturalism, colonialism and the politics
of knowing. Flaxton: Post Pressed.
McCoy, M. I. (2010). Sports information in a digital age: A case study of Lehigh Athletics.
Unpublished doctoral dissertation. Lehigh University, Pennsylvania, PA.
McKenna, B. J., and Waddell, N. (2007). International political responses to the 2005 London
Bombing: Epideictic discourse and public condoling. Journal of Language and Politics, 6,
377–399.
McLean, J. E. (1995). Improving education through action research. Thousand Oaks, CA: Corwin
Press.
McLuhan, M. (1964). Understanding media: The extension of man. London: Routledge.
McMillan, A. (2004). Take-home numeracy kits for preschool children. Australian Journal of Early
Childhood, 29. Available at: www.questia.com/googleScholar.qst?docId=5006517649 (accessed
21 August 2011).
353
REFERENCES
McMillan, J., and Schumacher, S. (2006). Research in education (6th edn). Boston, MA: Pearson
Education.
MacTaggart, R. (1991). Action research: Issues for the next decade. Curriculum perspectives, 11(4),
44–46.
Maguire, P. (1987). Doing participatory research: A feminist approach. Amherst, MA: University
of Massachusetts.
Malinowski, B. (1922). Argonauts of the Western Pacific. New York: Dutton.
Markula, P., Grant, B., and Denison, J. (2001). Qualitative research and aging and physical activity:
Multiple ways of knowing. Journal of Aging and Physical Activity, 9, 245–264.
Marshall, C., and Rossman, G. B. (1995). Designing qualitative research. Newbury Park, CA: Sage.
Martin, J. (1990). Deconstructing organizational taboos: The suppression of gender conflict in
organizations. Organization Science, 1(4), 339–359.
Mason, J. (1996). Qualitative researching. London: Sage.
Maynard, M., and Purvis, J. (1994). Methods, practice and epistemology: The debate about
feminism and research. New York: Taylor & Francis.
Maxwell, J. A. (1996). Qualitative research design: An interactive approach. Thousand Oaks, CA:
Sage.
Mead, M. (1928). Coming of age in Samoa. New York: Dell.
Merriam, S. B. (1998). Case study research in education: A qualititative approach. San Francisco,
CA: Jossey-Bass.
Meyerson, D. E., and Kolb, D. M. (2000). Moving out of the ‘armchair’: Developing a framework
to bridge the gap between feminist theory and practice, Organization, 7(4), 553–571.
Michael, M. G., Fusco, S. J., and Michael, K. (2008). A research note on ethics in the emerging
age of überveillance. Computer Communications, 31(6), 1192–1199.
Mienczakowski, J. (2001). Ethnodrama: Performed research – limitations and potential. In
P. Atkinson, A. Coffey, S. Delamont, J. Lofland, and L. Lofland (eds), Handbook of ethnography
(pp. 468–476). London: Sage.
Mienczakowski, J., and Morgan, S. (1993). Busting: The challenge of the drought spirit. Brisbane,
Australia: Griffith University Reprographics.
Mies, M. (1991). Women’s research or feminist research? The debate surrounding feminist science
and methodology. In M. M. Fonow, and J. A. Cook (eds), Beyond methodology: Feminist
scholarship as lived research (pp. 60–84). Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press.
Miles, M. B., and Huberman, M. A. (1994). Qualitative data analysis. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Mintzberg, H. (1979). An emerging strategy of ‘direct’ research. Administrative Science Quarterly,
24, 580–589.
Mishler, E. G. (1995). Models of narrative analysis: A typology. Journal of Narrative and Life
History, 5(2), 87–123.
Morse, J. M., Barrett, M., Mayan, M., Olson, K., Spiers, J., and Hon, D. (2002). Verification
strategies for establishing reliability and validity in qualitative research. International Journal
of Qualitative Methods, 1(2), 1–19.
Morse, J. M., and Richards, L. (2002). Readme first for a user’s guide to qualitative research.
Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Muijs, D. (2011). Doing quantitative research in education with SPSS (2nd edn). Thousand Oaks,
CA: Sage.
Nachimas C. F., and Nachimas, D. (1992). Research methods in the social sciences. New York:
St Martin’s Press.
Neuman, D. L. (1994). Social research methods: Qualitative and quantitative approaches. Boston,
MA: Allyn & Bacon.
Nilan, P. (2002). Dangerous fieldwork re-examined: The question of researcher subject position.
Qualitative Research, 2, 363–386.
Noffke, S. E., and Stevenson, R. B. (1995). Educational action research: Becoming practically
critical. New York: Teachers College Press.
354
REFERENCES
Oleson, M. E. (ed.) (2000). Feminism, community and communication. Binhamton, NY: The
Haworth Press.
O’Reilly, T. (2005). What is Web 2.0: Design patterns and business models for the next generation
of software. Available at: http://oreilly.com/pub/a/oreilly/tim/news/2005/09/30/what-is-web-
20.html (accessed 19 June 2011).
Paccagnella, L. (1997). Getting the seats of your pants dirty: Strategies for ethnographic research
on virtual communities. Journal of Computer-Mediated Communication, 3(1). Available at:
http://jcmc.indiana.edu/vol3/issue1/paccagnella.html (accessed 10 January 2008).
Packwood, A., and Sikes, P. (1996). Adopting a postmodern approach to research. International
Journal of Qualitative studies in Education, 9(3), 335–346.
Padgett, D. (2008). Qualitative methods in social work research. Los Angeles, CA: Sage.
Pajares, F. (2007). Self efficacy information. In T. Urden and F. Pajares (eds), Self-efficacy beliefs
of adolescents (pp. 339–367). Charlotte, NC: Information Age Publishing.
Parker, I. (1992). Discourse dynamics: Critical analysis for social and individual psychology.
London: Routledge
Patel, R., and Davidson, B. (2003). Forskningsmetodikens grunder: Att planera, genomföra och
rapportera en undersökning. Lund, Sweden: Studentlitteratur.
Patton, M. Q. (1990). Qualitative evaluation and research methods. Newbury, CA: Sage.
Pedersen, K. (1998). Doing feminist ethnography in the wilderness around my hometown.
International Review for the Sociology of Sport, 33(4), 393–402.
Pedhazur, E. J. (1982). Multiple regression in behavioural research (2nd edn). Fort Worth, TX:
Holt, Rinehart & Winston.
Pierce, J. (1995). Reflections of fieldwork in a complex organization. In R. Hertz and J. Imber
(eds), Studying elites using qualitative methods (pp. 94–110). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Polkinghorne, D. E. (1988). Narrative knowing and the human sciences. Albany, NY: State
University of New York Press.
Polkinghorne, D. E. (1989). Phenomenological research methods. In R. S. Valle and S. Halling
(eds), Existential phenomenological perspectives in psychology (pp. 41–60). New York: Plenum
Press.
Pollio, H. R., Henley, T. B., and Thompson, C. B. (1997). The phenomenology of everyday life.
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Popkewitz, T. S. (1984). Paradigm and ideology in educational research: The social functions of
the intellectual. Philadelphia, PA: The Falmer Press.
Potter, J., and Wetherell, M. (1987). Discourse and social psychology: Beyond attitudes and
behaviour. London: Sage.
Psathas, G. (1995). Conversation analysis: The study of talk-in-interaction. Thousand Oaks, CA:
Sage.
Quatman, C. (2006). The social construction of knowledge in the field of sport management: A
social network perspective. Unpublished doctoral dissertation, The Ohio State University,
Columbus.
Quayson A. (2000). Postcolonialism: Theory, practice or process? Cambridge: Polity Press.
Ramella, M. (2004). Positive futures impact report: Engaging with young people. London: Home
Office.
Ramella, M., and Olmos, G. (2005). Participant authored audiovisual stories (PAAS): Giving the
camera away or giving the camera a way? Papers in Social Research Methods: Qualitative Series
no. 10, June (London School of Economics and Political Science Methodology Institute).
Rathie, D., and Given, L. M. (2010). Research 2.0: A Framework for Qualitative and Quantitative
research in web 2.0 environments. Proceedings of the 43rd Hawaii International Conference on
System Sciences.
Rao, A., Stuart, R., and Kelleher, D. (1999). Gender at work: Organizational change for equality.
West Hartford, CO: Kumarian Press.
355
REFERENCES
Reason, P. (1990). Human inquiry in action: Developments in new paradigm research (2nd edn).
London: Sage.
Reason, P., and Bradbury, H. E. (2001). Handbook of action research. London: Sage.
Reed-Danahay, D. (1997). Auto/ethnography: Rewriting the self and the social. Oxford: Berg
Publishing.
Reid, L. (1997). Exploring the ways that dialogue journaling affects how and why students write:
An action research project. Teaching and Change, 5(1), 50–57.
Reinhartz, S. (1992). Feminist methods in social research. New York: Oxford University Press.
Richardson, L. (2000). Writing: A method of inquiry. In N. K. Denzin and Y. S. Lincoln (eds),
Handbook of qualitative research (2nd edn, pp. 923–948). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Richardson, L., and Lockridge, E. (2004). Travels with Ernest: Crossing the literary/sociological
divide. Walnut Creek, CA: Alta Mira Press.
Riessman, C. K. (1993). Narrative analysis. Newbury Park, CA: Sage.
Rinehart, R. E. (2005). ‘Experiencing’ sport management: The use of personal narrative in sport
management studies. Journal of Sport Management, 19(4), 497–522.
Ritchie, J., Lewis, J., and Elam, G. (2003). Designing and selecting samples. In J. Ritchie and
J. Lewis (eds), Qualitative research practice: A guide for social sciences students and researchers
(pp. 77–109). London: Sage.
Ritchie, J., and Spencer, L. (1994). Qualitative data analysis for applied policy research. In
A. Bryman and R. Burgess (eds), Analyzing qualitative data (pp. 173–194). London: Sage.
Robinson, W. (1996). Promoting polyarchy. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Roche, C. (1999). Impact assessment for development agencies: Learning to value change. Oxford:
Oxford University Press.
Rodwell, M. (1998). Social work constructivist research. New York: Garland.
Ross, R. J. S., and Trachte, K. C. (1990). Global capitalism: The new Leviathan. Albany, NY:
SUNY Press.
Said, E. W. (2000). The Edward Said Reader, M. Bayoumiand A. Rubin (eds). New York: Vintage
Books.
Saldana, J. (1998). Ethical issues in an ethnographic performance text: The dramatic impact, the
juicy stuff. Research in Drama Education, 3(2) 181–196.
Saldana, J. (2005). Ethnodrama: An anthology of reality theatre. Walnut Creek, CA: Alta Mira
Press.
Sale, J. E. M., Lohfeld, L. H., and Brazil, K. (2002). Revisiting the quantitative–qualitative debate:
Implications for mixed-methods research. Quality and quantity, 36(1), 43–53.
Sandberg, J. (1995). Are phenomenographic results reliable? Nordisk Pedagogik, 15, 156–164.
Sandberg, J. (1997). Are phenomenographic results reliable? Higher Education Research and
Development, 16, 203–212.
Sandelowski, M. (1996). Using qualitative methods in intervention studies. Research in Nursing
and Health, 19, 359–364.
San Juan, E., Jr. (1998). Beyond postcolonial theory. New York: St Martin’s Press.
Saukko, P. (2003). Doing research in cultural studies. London: Sage.
Schegloff, E. (1991). Reflections on talk and social structure. In D. Boden and D. H. Zimmerman
(eds), Talk and social structure: Studies in ethnomethodology and conversation analysis
(pp. 44–70). Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.
Schön, D. (1991). The reflective practitioner (2nd edn). San Francisco, CA: Jossey Bass.
Schwandt, T. A. (2001). Dictionary of qualitative inquiry. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Schwandt, T. A., and Halpern, E. S. (1988). Linking auditing and metaevaluation: Enhancing
quality in applied research. Newbury Park, CA: Sage.
Scrogum, J. (2005). Binaries and bridging: A feminist analysis of women’s rugby participation.
Unpublished masters thesis. University of North Carolina at Greensboro.
356
REFERENCES
Seiter, E., Borchers, H., Kreutzner, G., and Warth, E. (1989). Don’t treat us like we’re so stupid
and naive: Toward an ethnography of soap opera viewers. In E. Seiter, H. Borchers, G.
Kreutzner and E. Warth (eds), Remote Control (pp. 223–247). New York: Routledge.
Semerjian, T. Z., and Waldron, J. J. (2001). The journey through feminism: Theory, research, and
dilemmas from the field. The Sport Psychologist, 15, 438–444.
Shapiro, M. J. (1987). Educational theory and recent political discourse: A new agenda for the
left? Teachers College Record, 89(2), 171–200.
Shaw, S. and Frisby, W. (2006). Can gender equity be more equitable?: Promoting an alternative
frame for sport management research, education, and practice. Journal of Sport Management,
20(4), 2–24.
Silverman, D. (1993). Interpreting qualitative data: Methods for Analysing talk, text and interaction.
London: Sage.
Skinner, J. L. (2001). Environmental turbulence and its impact on strategic change and
organisational culture: The case of the Queensland Rugby Union. Unpublished doctoral
dissertation, Victoria University, Australia.
Skinner, J., and Edwards, A. (2005). Inventive pathways: Fresh visions for sport management
research. Journal of Sport Management, 19(4), 404–421.
Sklair, L. (2002). Globalization: Capitalism and its alternatives. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Smart, A. (1992). Making room: Squatter clearance in Hong Kong, Hong Kong: Centre of Asian
Studies.
Smith, A., and Stewart, B. (2010). The special features of sport revisited. Sport Management
Review, 10(1), 1–11.
Smith, A. E., and Humphreys, M. S. (2006). Evaluation of unsupervised semantic mapping of
natural language with Leximancer concept mapping. Behavior Research Methods, 38(2),
262–279.
Smith, B. (1981). Narrative versions, narrative theories. In W. J. T. Mitchell (ed.), On narrative
(pp. 209–232). Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press.
Smith, B., and Weed, M. (2007). The potential of narrative research in sports tourism. Journal
of Sport and Tourism, 12(3–4), 249–269.
Smith, R. (1993). Potentials for empowerment in critical education research. The Australian
Educational Researcher, 20(2), 75–93.
Sparkes, A. C. (2000). Fictional representations: On difference, choice, and risk. Sociology of Sport
Journal, 19, 1–24.
Sparkes, A. C. (2002). Telling tales in sport and physical activity: A qualitative journey. Champaign,
IL: Human Kinetics.
Spiegelberg, H. (1982). The phenomenological movement: A historical introduction. Dordrecht,
The Netherlands: Kluwer Academic Publishers.
Spivak, G. C. (1988). Can the subaltern speak? In C. Nelson and L. Grossberg (eds), Marxism
and the interpretation of culture (pp. 24–28). London: Macmillan.
Spradley, J. (1979). The ethnographic interview. New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston.
Spradley, J. P. (1980). Participant observation. New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston.
Spry, T. (2001). Performing autoethnography: An embodied methodological praxis. Qualitative
Inquiry, 7(6), 706–732.
Stake, R. E. (1995). The art of case study research. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Stake, R. (2000). Case studies. In N. K. Denzin and Y. S. Lincoln (eds), Handbook of qualitative
research (2nd edn, pp. 435–454). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Stanley, L., and Wise, S. (1993). Breaking out again: Feminist ontology and epistemology.
London: Routledge.
Strauss, A., and Corbin, J. (1990). Basics of qualitative research: Grounded theory procedures
and techniques. London: Sage.
Streubert, H. J., and Carpenter, D. R. (1999). Qualitative research in nursing: Advancing the
humanistic imperative (2nd edn). Philadelphia, PA: Lippincott.
357
REFERENCES
Stringer, E. (1999). Action research (2nd edn). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Stringer, E., and Genat, W. J. (2004). Action research in health. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson.
Stockwell, P., Colomb, R., Smith, A., and Wiles, J. (2009). Use of an automatic content analysis
tool: A technique for seeing both local and global scope. International Journal of Human-
Computer Studies, 67(5), 424–436.
Sullivan, S., and Brockington, D. (2004). Qualitative methods in globalisation studies: or, saying
something about the world without counting or inventing it. CSGR Working Paper, 139/04.
Svensson, L. (1994). Theoretical foundations of phenomenography. In R. Ballantyne and C. Bruce
(eds), Phenomenography: Philosophy and practice (pp. 9–20). Brisbane, Australia: Queensland
University of Technology.
Sykes, H. (1996). Constr(i)(u)cting lesbian identities in physical education: Feminist and
poststructural approaches to researching sexuality. Quest: Journal of the National Association
for Physical Education in Higher Education, 48(4), 459–69.
Taesoo, A. (2010). The effect of user motives and interactivity on attitude toward a sport website.
Unpublished doctoral dissertation. Florida State University College of Education.
Tashakkori, A., and Teddlie, C. (2003). Handbook of mixed methods in social and behavioural
research. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Teddlie, C., and Tashakkori, A. (2009). Foundations of mixed methods research: Integrating
quantitative and qualitative approaches in the social and behavioural sciences. Thousand Oaks,
CA: Sage.
Tedlock, B. (2000). Ethnography and ethnographic representation. In N. K. Denzin and Y. S. Lincoln
(eds), Handbook of qualitative research (2nd edn, pp. 455–486). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Tellis, W. (1997). Application of a case study methodology. The Qualitative Report, 3(3). Available
at: www.nova.edu/ssss/QR/QR3-2/tellis1.html (accessed 4 February 2014).
Thomas, J. R., and Nelson, J. K. (1996). Research methods in physical activity (3rd edn).
Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics.
Thomas, J. R., Nelson, J. K., and Silverman, S. J. (2005). Research methods in physical activity.
Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics.
Thomas, S. P., and Pollio, H. R. (2002). Listening to patients: A phenomenological approach to
nursing research and practice. New York: Springer.
Thompson, D. (1992). Against the dividing of women: Lesbian feminism and heterosexuality.
Feminism and Psychology, 2, 387–398.
Tierney, W. (1997). Academic outlaws: Queer theory and cultural studies in the academy. London:
Sage.
Tierney, W. G. (1998). Life history’s history: Subjects foretold. Qualitative Inquiry, 4, 49–70.
Tomaselli, K. G. (2003). ‘Dit is Die here Se Asem’: The wind, its messages, and issues of auto-
ethnographic methodology in the Kalahari. Cultural Studies <=> Critical Methodologies, 3(4),
397–428.
Tomlinson, J. (1999). Globalization and culture. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press.
Trochim, M. K., and Donnelly, J. P. (2008). The research methods knowledge base (3rd edn).
Mason, OH: Cengage Learning.
Trochim, W. (1989). An introduction to concept mapping for planning and evaluation. In W.
Trochim (ed.), A Special Issue of Evaluation and Program Planning, 12, 1–16.
Tuhiwai Smith, L. (1999). Decolonizing methodologies: Research and indigenous peoples. London:
Zed Books.
Tukey, J. W. (1977). Exploratory data analysis. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley.
Van Maanen, J. (1988). Tales of the field: On writing ethnography. Chicago, IL: University of
Chicago Press.
Van Maanen, J. (1995). Style as theory. Organization Science, 6, 133–143.
Van Manen, M. (1990). Researching lived experience: Human science for an action sensitive
pedagogy. Ontario, Canada: The University of Western Ontario.
358
REFERENCES
Van Manen, M. (1994). Pedagogy, virtue, and narrative identity in teaching. Curriculum Inquiry,
24(2), Summer, 135–170.
Van Zoonen, L. (1994). Feminist media studies. London: Sage.
Vander Kloet, M. A. (2005). Baywatch babes as recreation workers: Lifeguarding, subjectivity,
equity. Masters Dissertation, University of Toronto, Canada.
Viruru, R., and Cannella, G. S. (2001). Postcolonial ethnography, young children and voice. In S.
Grieshaber and G. S. Cannella (eds), Embracing identities and early childhood education. New
York: Teachers College Press.
Wallerstein, I. (1974). The modern world-system, I: Capitalist agriculture and the origins of the
European world-economy in the sixteenth century. New York/London: Academic Press.
Waterman, H. (1998). Embracing ambiguities and valuing ourselves: Issues of validity in action
research. Journal of Advanced Nursing, 28, 101–105.
Waterman, H., Tillen, D., Dickson, R., and de Konig, K. (2001). Action research: A systematic
review and guidance for assessment. Health Technology Assessment, 5(23), iii–157.
Webb, C. (1990). Partners in research. Nursing Times, 86(32), 40–44.
Weitzman, E. A., and Miles, M. B. (1995). Computer programs for qualitative data analysis: A
software sourcebook. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Whitmore, R. J. (2003). In search of development: An autoethnographic exploration of the Liberty
Hyde Bailey Scholars Program. Unpublished doctoral dissertation, Michigan State University.
Wild, C. J., and Seber, G. A. F. (2000). Chance encounters: A first course in data analysis and
inference. New York: John Wiley & Sons.
Willig, C. (2001). Memory work. In C. Willig (ed.), Introducing qualitative research in psychology:
Adventures in theory and method. Buckingham: Open University Press.
Wolcott, H. F. (1995). The art of fieldwork. Walnut Creek, CA: AltaMira Press.
Woods, P. (1996). Researching the art of teaching: Ethnography for educational use. London:
Routledge.
Wortham, S. M. (1998). Counter-institutions: Jacques Derrida and the question of the university.
New York: Fordham University Press.
Yin, R. (1984). Case study research: Design and methods (1st edn). Beverly Hills, CA: Sage.
Yin, R. (1989). Case study research: Design and methods (Rev. edn). Beverly Hills, CA: Sage.
Yin, R. (1993). Applications of case study research. Newbury Park, CA: Sage.
Yin, R. (1994). Case study research: Design and methods (2nd edn). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Yin, R. K. (2003). Case study research, design and methods (3rd edn). Newbury Park, CA: Sage.
Yin, R. K. (2009). Case study research, design and methods (4th edn). Newbury Park, CA: Sage.
Zikmund, W. G. (2000). Business research methods (6th edn). London: The Dryden Press.
Zuber-Skerritt, O. (1992). Action research in higher education: Examples and reflections. London:
Kogan Page.
359
Index
360
INDEX
361
INDEX
ethics 44–45, 105; and covert observation 52; Gall, M. D., Borg, W. R. and Gall, J. P. 103
ethnographic research 169–170; and Gamson, J. 190
feminism 188; netnography 177; Research Garfinkel, H. 151
2.0 342–344 Gartner, A., Latham, G. and Merritt, S. 196
ethnic studies 226–227 Gay, L. R., Mills, G. E. and Airasian, P. 166
ethnodrama: audience role 180; case example gender identity 191
180; definition 179; scripting 179–180; gender research methodologies 186
sport management 180 generalizability 75, 82–83, 131
ethnography 79, 117, 193; case example 170; Giddens, A. 239
and critical theory 162–163; definition Gilbert, K. and Schantz, O. J. 229
160; design 167–170; development 162; Gilbert, N. 230
emerging methodologies 170–182; Giorgi, A. 215
ethics 169–170; features 160–161; Giroux, H. A. 235
hypothetical example 183; postmodern globalization 5, 6; case example 242; decentred
164–165; process 166–167; research 239–240; definition 238–239; qualitative
design 165 research 241–242; research approach
ethnomethodology: analytic tools 153–154; 240–241; sport management 241
case example 155; definition 151–152; ‘goodness of fit’ 309–310
methodology 153 Gottschalk, S. 164
evaluative case study 119 Greene, J. C., Caracelli, V. J. and Graham, W.
existential phenomenology 208, 212 329
expected frequencies 310, 311–312 Greenhow, C., Robelia, B. and Hughes, J.
experimental method 280 335
explanatory case studies 118, 120 Greenwood, D. J. and Levin, M. 109
exploratory research 7 Griffin, R. 226
external auditing 80 Gronhaug, K. and Olson, O. 106
grounded theory 86
facilitation 327–329 group dynamics movement 99
Fairclough, N. 144–147 Guba, E. G. and Lincoln, Y. S. 61
fan engagement 6 Gubrium, J. and Holstein, J. 152
Farrell, K. 189
Fay, B. 164 Habermas, Jurgen 99
Feldman, A. 173 Hall, S. 234
feminism 11; case example 189–190; definition Halloran, Erin M. 61
186; ethics 188; hypothetical example Hammersley, M. 160, 162, 163
193–194; methodology 187–188; origins Hammersley, M. and Atkinson, P. 52, 160
186; and sport management 189; theory Hardt, M. and Negri, A. 239, 240, 241
making 189 Harris, J., Cale, L. and Musson, H. 119
Ferneley, E. et al. 339 Harrison, B. 231
Fetterman, D. M. 79 Hatch, J. A. 78
Fielding, N. G. and Lee, R. M. 88 health science 4
field notes 53 Heidegger, M. 208, 209
field research 117 Heritage, J. 151
fieldwork 52–53 hermeneutic circle 213–214
Fine, M. 187–188 hermeneutic phenomenology 208, 209,
focus groups 17, 58, 59 211–212
Foucault, Michael 107, 142, 234; discourse Heron, J. and Reason, P. 98
analysis (DA) 143–144 histograms 276–277
framework analysis 86 historiography 25
Frankfurt School 162 Hockey, J. and Collinson, J. A. 212, 231
Franklin, R. 58, 91 Holt, N. 175
Freire, Paulo 107 Humberstone, B. 176
frequency curve 268 Huntington, S. P. 239
funding 19 Husserl, E. 207, 208
362
INDEX
363
INDEX
364
INDEX
queer theory 11, 190–191; case example 193; Robinson, M. J. and Trail, G. T. 251
criticisms 192; features 191 Roche, C. 123
questionnaires 16 rugby 243–244; hypothetical example 148–150
quota sampling 265
Said, E. W. 234
race 223–224, 237 Saldana, J. 180
race theory 224–226 Sale, J. E. M., Lohfeld, L. H. and Brazil, K.
racial stereotypes in sport, hypothetical example 327, 329
139 sampling 125, 215, 249; error 262; quantitative
Ramella, M. and Olmos, G. 231, 232 260–263; types of 263–266
random sample 263–264 Saukko, P. 135
range 267 scales of measurement 260–261
Rathie, D. and Given, L. M. 337, 341, 342, scattergrams 288–291, 294
345 scatterplots 288–289
raw data 274 Scheerder, J., Vos, S. and Taks, M. 295
Razack, S. 238 Scheffe post hoc test 304
Reason, P. 104 Schegloff, E. 153
Reason, P. and Bradbury, H. E. 98, 110–111 ‘scientific method’ 11
Redmond, Derek 203–204 Scrogum, J. 189
Reed-Danahay, D. 171 secondary sources 62
referencing 37 self-disclosure statement 78
reflection 103, 173 self-evaluation checklist 27, 28
reflexivity 78, 167–168 Semerjian, T. Z. and Waldron, J. J. 165
regression: analysis 293–294, 304; line semi-structured interviews 55
288–289, 291, 294; multiple regression sequential triangulation 325
294–295 sevens, hypothetical example 243–244
Reinhartz, S. 77, 188 Shapiro, M. J. 142
Reissman, C. K. 197, 200 Shaw, S. and Frisby, W. 189
reliability 75, 81–82, 126, 168–169, 250; Sheth, H and Babiak, K. 292
autoethnography 174–175; narrative Shockley, Justin 65
inquiry 201; phenomenography 215; Silverman, D. 154
surveys 255–256 simple random sample 263
research: approval 19; ethics 44–45; paradigms simultaneous triangulation 325
10–11; planning 16, 17–18, 22; problems single case studies 120
with 5; process 17–22; questions skewness 268
124–125; saturation 31; types 7–8 Skinner, J. 165
Research 2.0 337–338; case example 338–339; Skinner, J. and Edwards, A. 162, 163, 164
difference of 341; framework 342; Skinner, J., Stewart, B. and Edwards, A.
hypothetical example 341; issues 137
342–344; online research communities Sklair, L. 238
339–340 Smart, A. 165
research hypothesis, the 281–282, 300 Smith, A. and Stewart, B. 4
research problems: assumptions 42; feasibility Smith, A. C. T. et al. 132
33; finding 32–33; limitations 43; Smith, B. 196
selecting 31–32, 35–36 Smith, B. and Weed, M. 202, 203
research proposals: preparing 19; purpose 22; Smith, R. 108
seven steps 18–19; template 23 snowball sampling 265
researchers’ role: action research 106–107; bias social network theory: analysis 220–222; case
74, 78, 80; ethnographic research 166; example 222–223; definition 220; sport
skill 80 research 222
respondent validation 77 Sparkes, A. C. 164, 172, 175, 200
Richardson, L. 53, 76 Spearman’s rho order correlation 313–314
rigour 131; and action research 109–111 sponsorships, hypothetical example 285
Rinehart, R. 202 sport, special features of 4–5
365
INDEX
366